Steel Doors & Frames

An ASSA ABLOY group company ASSA ABLOY

 Page
F1
FOREWORD Date
Mar ‘05

INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the commercial steel door and frame industry. We at Fleming Door Products
Ltd. are proud and privileged to have you on our team of professionals in the non-
residential steel door and frame industry.

This manual is designed to give you an understanding of exciting and profitable product
lines which, in many instances, sell themselves by virtue of their strength, durability,
versatile application and building or life safety code requirements, which after all, are the
back bone of every building.

This “Basic Hollow Metal Training Manual” (Third Edition), is a starting point and a
reference guide to provide you with a working knowledge of steel doors, frames and,
because of their inter-relationship, builders’ hardware.

The manual has been formatted in the following sections;

• Forward
• Table of Contents and Illustrations
• Steel Door Frames
• Hollow Metal Doors
• Builders’ Hardware
• Estimating and Ordering
• Glossary and Abbreviations
• Index
• Catalogues

The Forward, Table of Contents and Table of Illustrations are provided as an over-view for
quick reference. The Frame, Door and Hardware sections are extensively illustrated with
over 230 drawings and tables. Following the Estimating and Ordering section are a
Glossary, Abbreviations, a comprehensive Index for the Manual and both our Steel Door
and Frame Catalogue and the Fleming Fire Labeling Specifications brochure.

To provide you with support and assistance, our industry renowned Customer Support,
Engineering and Technical Services people are there for you, just a 1-800 (263-7515) call
away.

To augment your training Fleming also offers other basic, intermediate and advanced level
factory seminars and programs, designed to target specific areas of specialization.

This manual, like everything else at Fleming, is the result of the combined efforts of our
sales, marketing, engineering and manufacturing groups. The manual was developed by
Bud Bulley, our Manager for Technical Services. Your comments or suggestions are
appreciated and welcomed. Any questions you have can be directed his way.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
F2
FOREWORD Date
Mar ‘05

HISTORY
Fleming Door Products was originally incorporated January 1st, 1959. Our founder, Sam
Fleming, started in a 1,250 square foot building in Scarborough, a suburb of Toronto and
set about
establishing his reputation as a premier custom sheet metal fabricator.

Originally Fleming manufactured a variety of sheet metal and stainless steel products,
including toilet partitions, lockers, pre-fabricated fireplaces, drafting tables, commercial
coolers and freezers, louvers, vents, polio vaccine vessels, radar equipment, storage
tanks, hoppers and nuclear fuel containers, along with steel doors and frames.

In 1963 the company moved to a larger plant which initially covered 30,000 square feet.
Over the ensuing years, this building would be expanded several times, two other
buildings were added, totaling 108,000 square feet of office, manufacturing and
warehouse space.

By the mid-60’s Fleming had reduced the product lines to include only steel doors, frames
and toilet partitions. In 1978 the toilet partition division was sold in order to concentrate
exclusively on our core business, steel doors and frames.

We began in the non-residential market as a small, custom manufacturer, providing

product only in greater Toronto. A combination of quality, product depth and service
allowed Fleming to grow into the largest supplier in the area.

In the early 1970’s, after establishing ourselves in Toronto, Fleming instituted a national
marketing program through stocking distributors, who perform final fabrication and sell
directly to General Contractors. Between 1973 and 1986 the Fleming team grew to
include distributors in every major Canadian city and today we are the largest
manufacturer of non-residential steel doors and frames in the country. As a testament to
our commitment and their success, our original group of Canadian distributors continue to
represent Fleming to this day.

In 1986 Fleming launched into the United States and overseas markets. With our team of
factory and manufacturer representatives and distributors throughout the US, we are a
serious force and significant supplier in most major cities. Fleming also has distributors in
the Middle East, Asia, the United Kingdom, the Caribbean and Mexico.

At the same time, to support and ensure continued growth, planning began for new Head
Office and manufacturing facilities. In 1987 our state-of-the-art, 140,000 square foot plant
opened in Ajax, Ontario, just east of Toronto. Sitting on 9½ acres of prime industrial
property, we have the potential to almost double our existing manufacturing space to meet
customer demands.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
F3
FOREWORD Date
Mar ‘05

Fleming’s reputation as one of North America’s fastest growing steel door and frame
manufacturers is based on our commitment to quality, service, research and development
and leading edge technology.

Our senior executives, management group, engineering, customer support and

administrative staff are all career professionals. The depth of industry specific experience
is unrivalled. Our management team averages 28+ years, engineering and customer
support are 21+ years and the shop floor is 18+ years, with over 20% having 20 years or
more with the company. For you, it means a stable, knowledgeable support network.

The use of CAD/CAM and real-time production planning affords the Fleming team the best
delivery lead-times in the industry at competitive prices. The latest production equipment
and processes, in-plant, engineering and order-entry automation, bound together under
our ISO 9001:2000 Registered Quality Management System, allows Fleming to provide
the highest quality product, support and service available.

You will be drawing on over forty-five years of manufacturing experience, an exceptional

product line, on-going research, development and quality programs, with service and
support from committed and professional in-house staff, factory and manufacturers reps.
Together with our international network of stocking distributors, we have established
ourselves as world leaders in the commercial, industrial and institutional steel door and
frame market.

As you begin your journey of learning and growth, we wish you every success and are
here to encourage and support your continued efforts.

Thank you for joining our team.

FLEMING DOOR PRODUCTS LTD

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS Date
Mar ‘05

Foreword
Introduction ........................................................................................................ F1
History ............................................................................................................... F2

Table of Contents ..................................................................................................... i

Table of Illustrations ............................................................................................... iv

Steel Door Frames

Galvanneal Steel ................................................................................................ 1
Definitions ........................................................................................................... 7
Components ....................................................................................................... 8
Profiles
Types .......................................................................................................... 11
Terminology ................................................................................................ 14
Assembly Methods
Knocked-Down .......................................................................................... 22
Knocked-Down Slip-On Drywall ................................................................. 23
Set-Up and Welded ................................................................................... 24
Walls and Anchors .............................................................................................. 25
Masonry ..................................................................................................... 27
Drywall
Steel Stud .......................................................................................... 31
Wood Stud ......................................................................................... 36
Existing ...................................................................................................... 40
Floor Anchors .................................................................................................... 42
Hardware Preparations
Standard Locations .................................................................................... 46
Reinforcings ............................................................................................... 47
Handing ............................................................................................................ 54
Fleming Frame Series
F-Series (Masonry) .................................................................................... 60
DW-Series (Drywall) .................................................................................. 62
DE-Series (Double Egress) ....................................................................... 64
A-Series (Adjustable) .................................................................................. 67
MN-Series (Miter & Notch) & ST-Series (Sticks) ....................................... 69
Fire Rated Frame Product ................................................................................. 71
Installation
Welded and Knocked-Down Frames ......................................................... 75
DW-Series Knocked-Down Drywall Frames .............................................. 82
A-Series Knocked-Down Frames .............................................................. 86
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS Date
Mar ‘05

Hollow Metal Doors

Construction ....................................................................................................... 91
Terminology ....................................................................................................... 92
Features ............................................................................................................ 94
Heads ........................................................................................................ 94
Sills ............................................................................................................ 95
Lock and Hinge Edges .............................................................................. 96
Door Types ....................................................................................................... 100
Hardware Preparations
Standard Locations ................................................................................... 105
Typical Applications .................................................................................. 109
Reinforcings and Preparations ................................................................. 114
Fleming Door Series
D-Series (Lock Seam) .............................................................................. 120
E-Series (6 Panel Embossed Lock Seam) ............................................... 122
H-Series (Vertically Stiffened) ................................................................... 124
Product Selection and Applications .................................................................. 126
SDI 100 Comparisons ...................................................................................... 128
Hollow Metal Fire Doors ................................................................................... 129

Builders’ Hardware
Introduction ....................................................................................................... 131
Hinges and Pivots ............................................................................................. 132
Full Mortise ....................................................................................... 132
Half Mortise ...................................................................................... 133
Full Surface ...................................................................................... 133
Half Surface ...................................................................................... 133
Swing Clear ...................................................................................... 134
Sizing ........................................................................................................ 134
Special Purpose Products
Spring Hinges ................................................................................... 136
Electric Hinges ................................................................................. 136
Continuous Hinges ........................................................................... 137
Anchor Hinges .................................................................................. 138
Pivots ................................................................................................ 138
Locks and Latches
Terminology .............................................................................................. 141
Cylindrical Locks ....................................................................................... 142
Mortise Locks ........................................................................................... 144
Cylindrical Deadlocks ............................................................................... 145
Mortise Deadlocks .................................................................................... 146
Interconnected Locks ............................................................................... 147
Flush and Surface Bolts ........................................................................... 147
Applications .............................................................................................. 149
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS Date
Mar ‘05

Exit Devices ...................................................................................................... 151

Panic Exit Devices .................................................................................... 152
Fire Exit Devices ....................................................................................... 152
Types
Rim ................................................................................................... 153
Mortise .............................................................................................. 153
Surface Vertical Rod ......................................................................... 154
Concealed Vertical Rod .................................................................... 155
Applications .............................................................................................. 156
Closers
Surface ..................................................................................................... 159
Regular Arm ..................................................................................... 160
Parallel Arm ...................................................................................... 161
Top Jamb Mounted ........................................................................... 162
Concealed ................................................................................................ 163
Concealed in Frame ......................................................................... 163
Concealed in Door ............................................................................ 164
Floor ................................................................................................. 165
Holders and Stops ............................................................................................ 166
Overhead Holders .................................................................................... 167
Surface ............................................................................................. 167
Concealed ........................................................................................ 168
Combination Closer/Holder/Detectors .............................................................. 168
Co-Ordinators ................................................................................................... 169
Surface Applied Accessories ............................................................................ 169
Door Pulls and Push Plates ...................................................................... 170
Protective Plates ....................................................................................... 170

Estimating and Ordering

Take-Off ........................................................................................................... 172
Summarize ....................................................................................................... 175
Pricing .............................................................................................................. 175
Ordering
Frames ..................................................................................................... 175
Transom, Sidelight and Window Frames .................................................. 180
Doors ........................................................................................................ 181

Glossary ................................................................................................................. 186

Abbreviations ........................................................................................................ 213

Index ................................................................................................................... 217

Catalogues
PRINTED IN CANADA

Fleming Steel Doors & Frames

Fleming Fire Labeling Specifications
 Page

TABLE OF iv
Date
ILLUSTRATIONS Mar ‘05

Figure
No Description Page

1 Hot Strip Mill Process ............................................................................... 1

2 Cold Strip Mill Process ............................................................................. 1
3 Galvanizing Mill Process .......................................................................... 2
4 Galvanneal, Galvanized and CRS Cross-Sections .................................. 3
5 Typical Frame Elevations ......................................................................... 7
6 Typical Transom Frame Elevations .......................................................... 7
7 Typical Sidelight Frame Elevations .......................................................... 7
8 Typical Borrowed Light and Window Elevations ...................................... 8
9 Single Frame Components ...................................................................... 8
10 Frame Components for Pairs ................................................................... 9
11 4-Sided Frame Components .................................................................... 9
12 Closed Sections ...................................................................................... 10
13 Typical Sidelight Frame Components ..................................................... 10
14 Double Rabbet Masonry Profile .............................................................. 11
15 Double Rabbet Mullion ............................................................................ 11
16 Single Rabbet Profiles ............................................................................ 12
17 Drywall Profiles ....................................................................................... 12
18 Cased Open Sections ............................................................................. 13
19 Double Egress Sections .......................................................................... 13
20 Mullion Profiles ....................................................................................... 14
21 Jamb Depth ............................................................................................ 14
22 Face ........................................................................................................ 15
23 Opposite Face ........................................................................................ 15
24 Returns ................................................................................................... 16
25 Drywall Returns ...................................................................................... 16
26 Throat Opening ....................................................................................... 17
27 Door Rabbet ........................................................................................... 17
28 Opposite Rabbet ..................................................................................... 18
29 Soffit ........................................................................................................ 18
30 Stop ........................................................................................................ 19
31 Reveal ..................................................................................................... 19
32 Reveal Rabbet ........................................................................................ 20
33 Backset ................................................................................................... 20
34 Gage ....................................................................................................... 20
35 Profile Terminology Summary ................................................................. 21
36 F-Series Knocked-Down Frames ............................................................ 22
37 DW-Series Slip-On Knocked-Down Drywall Frames ............................... 23
38 Set-Up and Welded Frames ................................................................... 24
39 Typical Floor Plan ................................................................................... 25
40 Typical Wall Details ................................................................................. 26
41 Wrap Around Masonry Application ......................................................... 27
PRINTED IN CANADA

42 Butted Masonry Application .................................................................... 28

43 Masonry Wire Anchor ............................................................................. 29
 Page

TABLE OF v
Date
ILLUSTRATIONS Mar ‘05

Figure
No Description Page

44 Bridge and Strap Masonry Fire Anchor ................................................... 30

45 Recommended Installation - Steel Studs at Jamb/Head Intersection ..... 32
46 Typical Steel Stud and Drywall Partitions ............................................... 32
47 Combination Stud Anchors ..................................................................... 33
48 Z Anchor ................................................................................................. 34
49 DW-Series Compression Anchor Assembly ............................................ 35
50 A-Series Frame Face Dimpled Anchors – Steel Studs ........................... 35
51 Typical Wood Stud Framed Opening ...................................................... 36
52 Typical Wood Stud and Drywall Partitions .............................................. 37
53 Combination Stud Anchors in Wood Stud Walls ..................................... 38
54 Wood Stud Anchors ................................................................................ 39
55 Wood Stud Installations .......................................................................... 39
56 Typical Pre-Cast or Concrete Walls ........................................................ 40
57 Butterfly Existing Wall Anchor Guide ...................................................... 41
58 Strap and Channel Existing Wall Anchor Guide ...................................... 41
59 A-Series Frame Face Dimpled Anchors – Existing Walls ....................... 42
60 Floor Anchor Straps ................................................................................ 43
61 KD-DW Series Face Dimpled Base Anchors .......................................... 44
62 A-Series Face Dimpled Base Anchor ..................................................... 44
63 Mullion Floor Anchors ............................................................................. 45
64 Standard Hardware Locations ................................................................ 46
65 High Frequency Hinge Reinforcing ......................................................... 47
66 ASA Strike Reinforcing ........................................................................... 48
67 Small ASA/NL Strike Reinforcing ............................................................ 49
68 Surface Strike Reinforcing ...................................................................... 50
69 Surface Closer Reinforcing ..................................................................... 51
70 Parallel Arm Closer Reinforcing .............................................................. 52
71 Reversible Flush Bolt Strike and Reinforcing .......................................... 53
72 Right or Left Hand ................................................................................... 54
73 Reverse Hand ......................................................................................... 54
74 Handing - Singles (Single Acting) ........................................................... 55
75 Handing – Pairs ...................................................................................... 56
76 Handing - Double Egress ........................................................................ 56
77 Handing – R/L, R/R, L/L .......................................................................... 57
78 Handing - Contra-Swing .......................................................................... 57
79 Handing - Double Acting ......................................................................... 58
80 Handing - Communicating Frames ......................................................... 59
81 Handing - Multi-Opening Units ................................................................ 59
82 F-Series Standard Profiles and Sizes ..................................................... 61
83 DW-Series Jamb, Head, Corner Details ................................................. 62
84 DW-Series Standard Profiles and Sizes ................................................. 63
PRINTED IN CANADA

85 DE-Series Frame Plan ............................................................................ 64

86 DE-Series Frame Details ........................................................................ 65
 Page

TABLE OF vi
Date
ILLUSTRATIONS Mar ‘05

Figure
No Description Page

87 DE-Series Standard Profiles and Sizes .................................................. 66

88 A-Series Standard Profiles and Sizes ..................................................... 68
89 MN and ST-Series Standard Profiles ...................................................... 70
90 Typical Sidelight Components ................................................................ 70
91-104 Welded and KD Frame Installation Instructions .................................... 75-81
105-114 DW-Series Frame Installation Instructions ............................................ 82-86
115-123 A-Series Frame Installation Instructions ............................................... 86-90
124 Lock Seam Door Construction ................................................................ 91
125 Vertically Stiffened Door Construction .................................................... 91
126 Door Front and Back ............................................................................... 92
127 Door Terminology ................................................................................... 93
128 Standard Head Detail .............................................................................. 94
129 Optional Exterior Door Head Details ....................................................... 94
130 Optional Tack-Welded Top Cap .............................................................. 95
131 Optional Rabbetted Top Cap .................................................................. 95
132 Standard Sill Detail ................................................................................. 95
133 Optional Welded Bottom Cap ................................................................. 95
134 Standard D and E-Series Door Edge ...................................................... 96
135 Standard H-Series Door Edge ................................................................ 96
136 Standard Meeting Edge: Non-Labeled Pairs ........................................... 97
137 Flat Bar Astragal ..................................................................................... 97
138 Z Astragal on Pair ................................................................................... 97
139 Z Astragal with Integral Hardware Reinforcings ...................................... 98
140 Z Astragal for Door Mounted Hardware .................................................. 98
141 Tack-Welded Lock Edge Seam .............................................................. 99
142 Snap-In Glazing Trim ............................................................................. 100
143 Standard Door Types : M and P ............................................................. 101
144 Standard Door Types : L, V and NL1 ..................................................... 102
145 Standard Door Types : NL2 and G ........................................................ 103
146 Standard Door Types : 2G and FG ........................................................ 104
147 Standard Hinge Locations – Doors ........................................................ 105
148 Cylindrical Lock Location – Singles ....................................................... 106
149 Mortise Lock Location – Singles ............................................................ 106
150 Cylindrical (Tubular) Deadlock Location - Singles .................................. 107
151 Cylindrical Lock x Cylindrical Deadlock Location - Singles ..................... 107
152 Cylindrical Lock x ASA Strike & Flush Bolts – Pair ................................ 108
153 Mortise Lock x ASA Strike & Flush Bolts – Pair ..................................... 108
154 Cylindrical Lock (161) Door .................................................................... 109
155 Mortise Lock (86ED) Door ..................................................................... 110
156 Blank Door ............................................................................................. 111
157 ASA Strike Door ..................................................................................... 112
PRINTED IN CANADA

158 ASA Strike x Flush Bolts Door ............................................................... 113

159 High Frequency Hinge Reinforcing and Prep ......................................... 114
 Page

TABLE OF vii
Date
ILLUSTRATIONS Mar ‘05

Figure
No Description Page

160 End Channel and Integral Closer Reinforcing ........................................ 115

161 Cylindrical and Cylindrical (Tubular) Deadlock Reinforcings .................. 116
162 Mortise Lock Reinforcing and Prep ........................................................ 117
163 ASA and ASANL Strike Reinforcings and Preps .................................... 118
164 Flush Bolt Reinforcing and Prep ............................................................ 119
165 D-Series Door Details and Sizes ........................................................... 121
166 E-Series Door Details and Sizes ............................................................ 123
167 H-Series Door Details and Sizes ........................................................... 125
168 Full Mortise Hinge .................................................................................. 132
169 Half Mortise Hinge ................................................................................. 133
170 Full Surface Hinge ................................................................................. 133
171 Half Surface Hinge ................................................................................. 133
172 Swing Clear Hinge ................................................................................. 134
173 Hinge Sizing ........................................................................................... 135
174 Standard Hinge Swaging ....................................................................... 135
175 Electric Hinge ......................................................................................... 136
176 Piano Style Continuous Hinge ............................................................... 137
177 Geared Style Continuous Hinge ............................................................ 137
178 Anchor Hinge ......................................................................................... 138
179 Off-Set Pivot .......................................................................................... 139
180 Center Hung Pivot ................................................................................. 140
181 Pocket Pivot ........................................................................................... 141
182 Lock Terminology .................................................................................. 142
183 Cylindrical Lock and ASA Strike ............................................................ 143
184 160 Cylindrical Lock and Small ASA Strike ............................................ 144
185 Mortise Locks ......................................................................................... 144
186 Cylindrical Deadlock and Small ASANL Strike ....................................... 146
187 Mortise Deadlock and Strike .................................................................. 146
188 Interconnected Lock and Strikes ............................................................ 147
189 Flush Bolts ............................................................................................. 148
190 Applications for Locks - Singles ............................................................. 149
191 Applications for Locks - Pairs ................................................................. 150
192 Exit Device Bars .................................................................................... 151
193 Rim Exit Device ..................................................................................... 153
194 Mortise Exit Device ................................................................................ 153
195 Surface Vertical Rod Device .................................................................. 154
196 Concealed Vertical Rod Device ............................................................. 155
197 Applications for Exit Devices - Singles ................................................... 156
198 Applications for Exit Devices - Pairs ...................................................... 157
199 Applications for Exit Devices - Double Egress ....................................... 158
200 Applications for Exit Devices - Left/Right ............................................... 158
PRINTED IN CANADA

201 Applications for Exit Devices - Contra-Swing ......................................... 158

202 Surface Mounted Closer Arm Styles ...................................................... 160
 Page

TABLE OF viii
Date
ILLUSTRATIONS Mar ‘05

Figure
No Description Page

203 Regular Arm Closers .............................................................................. 160

204 Parallel Arm Closers .............................................................................. 161
205 Parallel Arm Closer Brackets ................................................................. 161
206 Top Jamb Mounted Closers ................................................................... 162
207 Top Jamb Mounted Closer Brackets ...................................................... 162
208 Concealed in the Frame Closers ........................................................... 163
209 Concealed in the Door Closers .............................................................. 164
210 Concealed in the Floor Closers - Mortise Track Type for Hinges ............ 165
211 Concealed in the Floor Closers - Off-set Pivot Type .............................. 165
212 Concealed in the Floor Closers - Center Hung Pivot Type .................... 166
213 Floor and Wall Stops .............................................................................. 166
214 Surface Holder ....................................................................................... 167
215 Concealed Holder .................................................................................. 168
216 Surface Co-Ordinator ............................................................................. 169
217 Mortised Co-Ordinator ........................................................................... 169
218 Door Pull and Push Plate ....................................................................... 170
219 Protective Plates .................................................................................... 170
220 Typical Sidelight Frame Ordering Information ........................................ 180

Table 1 Galvanneal Steel Thickness and Weights ................................................ 4

Table 2 Galvanneal and Galvanized Coatings ...................................................... 4
Table 3 Wall Anchors for Masonry Partitions ....................................................... 29
Table 4 Wall Anchors for Steel Stud Partitions .................................................... 34
Table 5 Rough Opening Sizes in Wood Stud Partitions ....................................... 36
Table 6 Wall Anchors for Wood Stud Partitions ................................................... 39
Table 7 Fire Ratings – Walls, Doors and Frames ................................................ 72
Table 8 Maximum Rabbet Opening Sizes for Fire Rated Frame Product ............ 73
Table 9 Maximum Over-All Unit Size for Fire Rated Frame Product .................... 74
Table 10 Maximum Transom opening Sizes for Fire Rated Frame Product .......... 74
Table 11 Maximum Glazed Openings for Fire Rated Sidelights and Windows ...... 74
Table 12 Fleming Door Series-Gage Classifications ............................................ 126
Table 13 Building-Opening Type Classifications ................................................... 127
Table 14 SDI-100 versus Fleming Doors .............................................................. 128
Table 15 Fleming Fire Door Summary .................................................................. 129
Table 16 Glazing Materials for Fire Doors ............................................................ 130
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
1
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

GALVANNEAL STEEL
All hollow metal doors and frames manufactured in North America are produced from the
identical base cold rolled steel, which conforms to ASTM A1008.

The galvanneal process begins in the Hot Strip Mill where a billet is reduced in thickness to
a coil of steel.

Figure 1 : Hot Strip Mill Process

The hot rolled steel, meeting ASTM A1011, is then moved to a Cold Strip Mill where it is
uncoiled, pickled, cleaned and rinsed. The steel is heated, passed through dimensioning
rolls to reduce it to the exact thickness required, the edges are trimmed for tension leveling
and the product is oiled to prevent rusting of the now Cold Rolled Steel, meeting ASTM
A1008. It is then recoiled or slit into sheets.

It is how the cold-rolled steel is further processed that creates galvanized and paintable
galvanneal.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 2 : Cold Strip Mill Process

 Page
2
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

For galvanneal and galvanized steel, the cold-rolled coil is processed through a
Galvanizing Mill. It is uncoiled, degreased and run into a continuous hot-dip zinc coating
bath. For galvanized steel the free zinc is removed by a series of mechanical wipers. For
galvanneal, the excess molten zinc is removed using air knives. The galvanneal coil enters
an annealing furnace and heat converts the zinc coating to a zinc-iron alloy. Next the
galvanneal goes through a passivation wash to retard storage stain. Finally both
galvanized and galvanneal steels are recoiled or slit into sheet stock.

COOLING TOWER

DECOILER RECOILER

ANNEALING
FURNACE

CLEANER
OILER
(Shut Off)

ASTM A1008
Cold Rolled Steel OILER
(Shut Off)

ASTM A924/A653
Galvanneal Steel
To
DEGREASER HOT DIP ZINC BATH PASSIVATION TANK
Steel Service Center
(Zinc, Nickle, Chromium &
Copper)

Figure 3 : Galvanizing Mill Process

A relative comparison of the coatings and protection provided by them can be easily see in
Figure 4, below.

Figure 4 : CRS vs Galvanneal vs Galvanized Steel

ASTM STANDARDS FOR STEEL

The process of steel making is a highly sophisticated one, relying on leading edge
technology and is covered by a multitude of ASTM Standards. ASTM Standards for steel
have evolved drastically over the past few years. The changes reflect the availability of
steels with improved base metal characteristics, as well as terminology revisions that are
intended to provide a better understanding of steel sheet formability for hot-dip products.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
3
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

In the late eighties hot-dip steel products were covered by the following ASTM Standards :
ASTM A366 for the base cold-rolled steel, ASTM A525 for the general requirements of zinc
coated hot-dip steels and ASTM A526 through A528 for the specific forming qualities of
zinc coated steels.

In 1994 A525, together with a number of associated standards, were withdrawn and
replaced by A924-94 which covers all hot-dip coated steels. At the same time A526
through A528 were discontinued and amalgamated under A653.

In 1996 and 1997 ASTM made further changes to A653 where the description of steels with
the "Quality" designations have been made obsolete and a new system of designations
has been developed. Future uses of the "Quality" term are intended for reference to levels
of surface and shape parameters.

ASTM A653-97 designations are for the "Type" of steel, with categories ranging from
Commercial Steel (CS) through to High Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS). Several
"Types" have further designations, the letters "A", "B", and "C".

The ASTM Standards currently applicable to all Fleming paintable Galvanneal are as
follows :

ASTM A1008-03 : Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High Strength Low-Alloy and High Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability.

This standard describes the general chemical and mechanical properties of cold-rolled
steel.

ASTM A924-99 : Specification for General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Metallic-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

This standard describes the permitted tolerances for chemical composition, mechanical
properties, coating thickness, widths, lengths, camber, square and flatness of sheet steels
which are metallic-coated by a hot-dip process. The metallic coatings referenced in this
standard include zinc, zinc-iron alloy, aluminum, aluminum-zinc alloy, and lead-tin alloy
(terne).

ASTM A653-03 : Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A653 specifically covers zinc and zinc-iron alloy coated steel. Zinc coated steel,
known as "galvanized", is a full spangled finish product. Zinc-iron alloy coated or
"galvannealed" steel is a spangle-free, matte-gray, uniform finish. This standard describes
six (6) types of steel based on formability. A653 details the nominal and minimum weight of
PRINTED IN CANADA

each type of coating by recognized designations. Galvanized steel coating designations

 Page
4
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

are prefixed with "G" and galvanneal coating designations are prefixed with "A". Chemical
and mechanical property requirements for both the base steel and the coating are also
included in this standard.

SPECIFICATIONS

The material specifications for Fleming Commercial Steel Door and Frame product is :

Door and frame product shall be manufactured from tension leveled steel to ASTM A924-99,
galvanized to ASTM A653-03, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, coating designation A40, known
commercially as paintable galvanneal.

PROPERTIES
2
Gage Nominal Thickness Nominal Weight (lbs/ft )
22 0.030” 1.225
20 0.036” 1.470
18 0.048” 1.960
16 0.060” 2.450
14 0.075” 3.063
12 0.105” 4.288
10 0.138” 5.636

Table 1 : Galvanneal Steel Thickness and Weights

Coating Weight (Total Both Sides)

Coating 2 Coating Thickness Per Side
Minimum Check Limit (oz/ft )
Designation
Triple Spot Test Single Spot Test µm (microns) Mils
A40 .40 .3 8.9 .36
G90 .90 .8 20 .8

Table 2 : Galvanized and Galvanneal Coatings

Chemical Analysis : Carbon = 0.15% max, Manganese = 0.60% max,

Phosphorus = 0.035% max and Sulphur = 0.040% max

Mechanical Properties : Yield Strength = 43ksi, Ultimate Tensile Strength = 53ksi,

Percentage Elongation in 2” = 36%
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
5
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

GALVANNEAL ADVANTAGES

When specifying materials for hollow metal doors and frames what are the characteristics
you are looking for?

• A smooth, consistent paint surface

• A minimum of surface preparation in the field
• Maximum paint adhesion
• Complete corrosion protection, inside and out
• Maximum compatibility with and flexibility in the selection of finish paints
• Resilience to job site exposure from humidity and water
• Maximum product performance and warranty

Galvanneal has been developed to specifically address these characteristics. In addition,

galvanneal will not fracture when formed and provides maximum arc, spot and projection
weld performance when compared to cold rolled or electro-galvanized steels.

Galvanneal is passivated with a phosphate wash. It presents a dull gray matte surface
which is almost mirror smooth the touch. The surface however, provides microscopic
keying for finish paint at the zinc-iron alloy surface.

Primed painted cold rolled steel on the other hand yields one of two extremes.
Cementisious type factory applied proprietary primers are inherently uneven and rough.
Baked-on electrostatically or conventional spray applied, flow-coat or dip types provide a
glazed egg shell affect which must be fully sanded before finish painting. Flow-coat or dip
process systems can result in uneven coverage, runs and drips.

Galvanneal’s zinc-iron alloy is an integral part of the steel surface. It is on the front, the
back and the edges of the material. Fleming manufactures all door and frame components
and reinforcings from galvanneal steel. There are no unprotected surfaces.

With cold rolled product, the factory primers are added after the product is completely
assembled. The consistency and coverage will vary. The inside of frame profiles generally
do not receive the same coverage as the surfaces which will be exposed after installation.
There will be areas on the mortised hardware reinforcings which will receive limited, if any
primer protection. The inside faces of a cold rolled steel door or mullion and the cold rolled
steel internal components and reinforcings receive no primer.

All steel doors and frames need to be cleaned prior to finish painting to remove the dirt,
dust, tar and other foreign matter which end up on the products during shipping, handling
and installation. Scratches in the surface need to be remedied before painting as well.

For galvanneal doors and frames, cleaning is a simple matter of wiping down the surface to
be painted with a cleaner compatible with the finish paint. If latex or alkyd paints are
PRINTED IN CANADA

specified, then detergent and clean water will do the job. For some of the more exotic
 Page
6
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

finishes such a epoxies and the like, the paint manufacturer will recommend appropriate
materials. The zinc-iron coating will not wash off.

With cold rolled and primed steel there can problems with cleaners removing the primer or
the primer absorbing and trapping foreign materials.

Scratches inflicted on galvanneal doors and frames are repaired with the application of any
off the shelf, zinc-rich galvanized primer, either brush or spray applied after the surface has
been cleaned. You are applying the same material as is already part of the steel surface.
There is never a compatibility problem. The steel surface will not appear different in the
primed areas after finish painting.

With cold-rolled and primed product, the scratches must be sanded out, feathered and a
touch-up primer, compatible with the factory proprietary primer, is applied.

There can be compatibility problems between the proprietary factory primers and standard
commercial primers used by the finish painters. Adhesion of standard commercial primers,
used by the finish painter, may be compromised between his primer and the factory’s.

Paint adhesion and corrosion resistance can be measured using several methods. The
most widely specified test standard for steel door and frame products is ANSI A250.10 .
This standard requires that separate sets of prepared samples are subjected to salt spray
and water fog exposures together with a series of unexposed sample tests.

This standard, although useful, does not provide a thorough evaluation. The salt spray
exposed samples are only evaluated for corrosion resistance (rust). The water fog
exposed samples only for paint blistering. The unexposed samples are evaluated only for
tape test paint adhesion after impacting and lattice style scribing of the painted surface.
The exposures do not address severe acid rain, industrial environments.

Through a nationally recognized independent lab, extensive testing and evaluations

comparing Fleming galvanneal and cold rolled steels, each with or without primers and
finish paints, were done. These tests went well beyond the requirements of the ANSI
A250.10 standard, all the way to simulating the demands of an acid rain, industrial
environment. For each type of exposure the samples were evaluated to ASTM standards
for rust, film adhesion, paint blistering and paint creepage.

The results consistently confirm galvanneal’s superior performance prior to and after the
application of finish paint under all tested conditions.

In the last section of the manual you will find our publication “Effective Rust Protection”. It
provides more answers to many of the myths and realities on paintable galvanneal steel.

These are the reasons that Fleming paintable galvanneal comes with a 10 year rust
perforation and paint adhesion warranty.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
7
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

FRAME PRODUCT DEFINITIONS

Frame products fall into 4 categories: frames, transom frames, sidelight frames and
windows.

Frames are defined as units that contain single or multiple door openings without horizontal
transom members. Frames may be 3 or 4 sided. They may contain flush or rabbetted
panels immediately above the doors. They are available in set-up and welded, knocked-
down or knocked-down slip-on drywall construction. Typical frame elevations are shown in
Figure 5.

Figure 5 : Typical Frame Elevations

Transom Frames are units that contain single or multiple door openings with single or
multiple openings above, separated from the doors with a horizontal mullion. The openings
above the doors are called ‘transoms’. The transoms may be filled with glazing materials,
panels or louvers. Transom frames are generally available only in set-up and welded
construction. Typical transom frame elevations are shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6 : Typical Transom Frame Elevations

Sidelight Frames contain single or multiple door openings with adjacent openings for
glazing materials, panels or louvers, separated with vertical mullions. The openings
adjacent to the doors are called ‘sidelights’. Sidelight frames may also incorporate single or
multiple transom openings. They are available only in set-up and welded construction.
Typical sidelight frames are shown in Figure 7.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 7 : Typical Sidelight Frame Elevations

 Page
8
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Windows are frame product which contain single or multiple openings for glazing materials
only. They do not have any provision for mounting doors. A window which contains only
one opening is also called a ‘borrowed light’ or ‘view window’. Borrowed lights are
available in set-up and welded, knocked-down or knocked-down drywall construction. All
other configurations are available only as set-up and welded. Figure 8 illustrates some
typical elevations of borrowed lights and window assemblies.

Figure 8 : Typical Borrowed Light and Window Elevations

FRAME COMPONENTS
Fleming frame products, from the simplest frame to the most complicated window, are
constructed of formed steel components. Each component can be identified by its
placement in the finished assembly and the builders’ hardware it is prepared to receive.

Three-sided frames for single doors are the most basic units. As shown in Figure 9, they
are constructed from 3 components: a hinge jamb, a strike jamb and a head. The jambs
are handed to suit the swing of the door.

Head

Hinge Jamb Strike Jamb

Figure 9 : Single Frame Components

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
9
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Three-sided frames for pairs of doors also contain 3 components: 2 hinge jambs and a
head as shown in Figure 10. The hinge jambs, as indicated, are handed for the swing of
each door.

Head

Right Hand Left Hand

Hinge Jamb Hinge Jamb

Figure 10 : Frame Components for Pairs

When a four-sided frame for singles or pairs is required, a bottom member, called a sill, is
added to connect the 2 jambs. Figure 11 illustrates this condition.

Head

Hinge Jamb Strike Jamb

Sill

Figure 11 : 4 Sided Frame Components

All the components in frames for simple singles or pairs are constructed with “open
sections”. An open section is one that contains a throat opening into which a wall can be
inserted. These occur at the perimeter of the frame.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
10
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Transom, sidelight and window frames are built with open sections (jambs, head and sills)
at the perimeter and “closed sections”, creating the individual door and/or glass openings
required.

There are a number of closed sections available which include mullions, center rails and
corner posts. Figure 12 shows the general profile details for each of these components.

Mullion Center Rail Corner Post

Figure 12 : Closed Sections

Figure 13 shows various open and closed sections assembled into a finished sidelight
frame.

Head
(Open Section)
Transom Mullion
(Closed Section)

Hinge Mullion Strike Mullion

(Closed Section) (Closed Section)

Blank Jamb
(Open Section)
Center Rail
(Closed Section)

Blank Mullion
(Closed Section)
Sill
(Open Section)
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 13 : Typical Sidelight Frame Components

 Page
11
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

FRAME PROFILES
On the previous pages we covered the 4 categories of frame product and the terminology
used to describe each of the components needed to build them.

The components also have a set of terms to describe their basic shape or profile.

PROFILE TYPES

Masonry Profile components are the most common open sections. Illustrated in Figure
10, as the term suggests, they are utilized mostly in unit masonry or concrete walls. The
contractor generally requires them as soon as the foundations are complete as they are
installed with the wall.

Masonry profile frames are available as set-up and welded or knocked-down (for field
assembly) construction. They can also be used in drywall or plaster and stud partitions and
should be available to the contractor before the walls are constructed. Masonry profiles can
include a number of variations as discussed below.

Figure 14 : Double Rabbet Masonry Profile

Double Rabbet masonry profiles are standard for Fleming F, Miter and Notch and Stick-
Series welded or knocked-down product. They are designed to accommodate a door or
glazing materials on either side of the profile. Double rabbet profiles are available in both
open sections (Figure 14) and closed sections as illustrated in Figure 15.

Figure 15 : Double Rabbet Mullion

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
12
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Single Rabbet profiles are the first variation in custom product and have provision for a
door or glazing materials on one side of the frame only. Figure 16 shows an open section
profile and a typical single rabbet mullion.

Open Section Mullion

Figure 16 : Single Rabbet Profiles

Drywall Profile open sections, shown in Figure 17, can be used when drywall is the final
layer of material on the wall. This is the second most common profile in commercial steel
frame product. This profile adds legs, called “drywall returns”, formed parallel to the wall
inside the profile which protect the drywall.

Drywall profile frames are available as set-up and welded or knocked-down slip-on drywall
construction. Welded drywall profile frames should be on site to be installed with the walls.
Knocked-down slip-on drywall frames are installed after the steel or wood studs and drywall
partitions are finished. Double rabbet knocked-down slip-on drywall frames, the DW-Series,
are also a standard profile for Fleming.

Double Rabbet Single Rabbet

Figure 17 : Drywall Profiles

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
13
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Cased Open profiles are another custom variation shown in Figure 18. This profile is
generally used simply as a finishing element over an opening in a wall. Cased open frames
are not normally prepared for doors. With certain types of hinges or pivots these sections
can be used as double acting frames. Cased open knocked-down slip-on drywall profile is
standard for Fleming’s CODW-Series.

Masonry Profile Drywall Profile

Figure 18 : Cased Open Sections

Double Egress profiles are used in frames designed to permit each leaf in a pair to swing
in the opposite direction. A plan view of the frame and typical double egress masonry and
drywall profile jambs are shown in Figure 19. The application of this frame design will be
discussed later in greater detail.

Frame Plan View Masonry Profile Jamb Drywall Profile Jamb

Figure 19 : Double Egress

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
14
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Mullions and center rails also come in standard and optional profiles. Figure 20 illustrates
a standard double rabbet mullion and a custom single rabbet mullion. For center rails, both
single and double rabbet profiles are available. Double rabbet is a standard for Fleming’s
Miter and Notch and Stick Series product.

Double Rabbet Single Rabbet

Figure 20 : Mullion Profiles

PROFILE TERMINOLOGY

Over the years terminology has evolved to describe each of the formed elements of open
and closed sections. Industry has adopted a number of different terms. The most widely
accepted and those used by Fleming, are shown on the following pages.

Jamb Depth : The distance on a frame section measured from face to face,
perpendicular to the face of the door.

Fleming masonry profile frame components are available in standard

jamb depths of 4-3/4”, 5-3/4”, 6-3/4”, 7-3/4” and 8-3/4”. Knocked-
down drywall frame standards include 4-1/2”, 4-3/4”, 5-5/8”, 5-7/8”,
6-1/4”, 6-5/8”, 7-1/8”, 7-3/4”, 8-1/4” and 9-1/2” jamb depths to suit
most steel or wood stud and drywall installations. Non-standard jamb
depths are available to suit special conditions.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 21 : Jamb Depth

 Page
15
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Face : The portion of the exposed frame section which runs parallel to the
wall on the door side of the section.

The industry and Fleming’s standard is 2” for jambs, heads and

mullions. Masonry profile heads are also available standard with a 4”
face. For center rails 6”, 8” and 12” are the standards. Sill standard
sizes include 6-13/16”, 8” and 8-13/16” faces. Fleming Trimwall
Series jamb and mullion sections have 5/8” faces.

Typical non-standard face widths include 1-1/4”, 1-1/2” and 1-3/4”.

Figure 22 : Face

Opposite Face : The portion of the exposed frame section which runs parallel to the
wall on the non-door side.

On standard masonry and drywall, double rabbet profile components

the opposite face matches the face on the door side. To meet specific
architectural requirements, non-standard profiles can be provided
where the faces are not equal.

Figure 23 : Opposite Face

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
16
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Return : The portion of an open frame section extending back from the faces,
perpendicular to the wall surface.

Except for 5-3/4” jamb depth masonry profile product, the standard
return dimension is 1/2”. The 5-3/4” product has 7/16” returns which
creates a 4-7/8” throat opening to wrap walls constructed with a single
layer of 5/8” drywall on each side of 2” x 4” wood studs or 3-1/2” steel
studs. These are two of the most common walls in commercial
construction.

Non-standard returns from 1/4” to 3/4” on either side are available.

Figure 24 : Returns

Drywall Return : The portion of an open section formed inside the profile, parallel to the wall.

In set-up and welded frames the drywall is secured to the studs after
the frame has been installed. The drywall returns allow the boards to
be slid into position without tearing or marring the board.

For knocked-down slip-on drywall frames the drywall is attached to the

studs before the frame is installed. The drywall returns in this application
permit the frame to be pushed over the partition without damaging the
board.

Fleming’s standard drywall return measures 3/8”. Non-standard

drywall returns from 1/4” to 3/4” are available.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 25 : Drywall Returns

 Page
17
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Throat Opening : The area in the back of an open section which wraps a wall.

The size of the throat opening is dependent on the actual wall

thickness, the type of frame and installation method required.

For masonry, concrete or drywall partitions where a welded or

knocked down frame wraps the wall, the throat opening should be 1/8”
larger than the actual wall thickness. The gap between the frame and
the partition is sealed with caulking materials.

Where drywall partitions and knocked-down slip on frames are

specified, the throat opening should be equal to the actual wall
thickness.

Figure 26 : Throat Opening

Door Rabbet : The portion of the frame section in which the hinge or strike are
mortised or where glazing materials or panels are located.

There are two standard door rabbet sizes. For 1-3/4” thick doors the
door rabbet is 1-15/16” or 1-9/16” for 1-3/8” doors. On double egress
profiles, 1-3/4” thick doors require a door rabbet of 2”.
t
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 27 : Door Rabbet

 Page
18
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Opposite Rabbet : In a double rabbet section, the recess in the profile which is not
prepared for hardware, glazing materials or panels.

For Fleming product the opposite rabbet in frames for 1-3/4” thick
doors is 1-9/16”. Where 1-3/8” thick doors are required, the Fleming
opposite rabbet is 1-15/16”. These are called “unequal rabbet”
profiles.

A communicating frame (a double rabbet frame prepared to receive a

door in each rabbet) with doors of the same thickness is called an
“equal rabbet” frame.

Figure 28 : Opposite Rabbet

Soffit : The portion of the section which connects the stops on a double
rabbet profile or connects the stop and the opposite face on a single
rabbet section.

For Fleming standard product, door and opposite rabbets are fixed
dimensions and the soffit size varies with jamb depth.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 29 : Soffit
 Page
19
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Stop : The portion of the section which connects the door or opposite rabbet
to the soffit. On the door side of the profile, the part against which the
door closes. Also called the “Stop Height”.

The standard stop for Fleming commercial product is 5/8”.

Figure 30 : Stop

Reveal : The portion of a double egress hinge jamb profile which connects the door
rabbet to the door reveal. For Fleming product this dimension is 5/8”.

Figure 31 : Reveal
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
20
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Reveal Rabbet : The portion of a double egress hinge jamb profile which connects the
reveal to the face. Because double egress doors are centered on the
jamb depth, the reveal rabbet and the soffit are equal in size.

Figure 32 : Reveal Rabbet

Backset : The distance in the door rabbet from a cutout, for a hardware
preparation, to the stop. For Fleming, 4-1/2” hinges and ASA (4-7/8” x
1-1/4” lipped) strikes have a standard backset of 3/8”.

Figure 33 : Backset

Gage : A numeric designation used to define the nominal thickness of steel.

Fleming standard F, Miter and Notch, Stick, KD-DW and A-Series
frames are manufactured from 16 gage galvanneal steel. Non-
standard frames are available in 12, 14, 16 and 18 gage galvanneal.
The lower the number, the thicker the steel.

Figure 34 : Gage
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
21
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

The illustrations in Figures 35 bring together the terms from the previous pages with
various standard and non-standard profiles.

Double Rabbet Open Section Double Rabbet Mullion

Single Rabbet Open Section Single Rabbet Mullion

Double Egress Jambs Double Egress Heads

PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 35 : Profile Terminology Summary

 Page
22
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

FRAME ASSEMBLY METHODS

There are 3 basic methods of assembling frame product : knocked-down, knocked-down
slip-on drywall or set-up and welded.

Knocked-Down (abbreviated as KD) jambs and heads are provided to the contractor
unassembled. The contractor assembles the components together, stands the completed
frame in position, anchors it to the floor and builds the adjacent partition around it.

Knocked-down frames are suitable for new unit masonry, drywall or plaster partitions in
either wrap-around or butted applications. They can also be used in existing partitions.

Knocked-down frames are masonry profile components and are generally used only for
simple 3 or 4 sided frames.

As shown in Figure 36 below, Fleming knocked-down jambs are machine mitered at the top
and provided with a 2 corner clip / 4 tab system for alignment and assembly with the head.
Heads are also machine mitered with 4 slots at each end. Once the frame components
have been assembled, the jamb corner clip tabs protruding through the head slots are bent
over to hold the frame together. The jamb/head corner presents a hairline miter joint.

Knocked-down frames can easily be converted to set-up and welded product.

Fleming F-Series frames are knocked-down units.

Corner Clip

Head

Assembled
Jamb/Head
Hinge Jamb Intersection
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 36 : F-Series Knocked-Down Frames

 Page
23
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Knocked-Down Slip-On Drywall, (abbreviated as KD-DW) units are also provided to the
contractor unassembled. This type of frame is installed after the rough stud opening is
constructed and the drywall is applied. The contractor “slips” the individual components
over the finished wall.

These units are always drywall profile components. Fleming DW-Series units, as shown in
Figure 37, have machine mitered jambs and heads. Jambs are provided with 2 corner
clips, 3 tabs, a compression anchor at the top and each face is punched and dimpled at the
bottom for securing with drywall screws. Heads are provided with 3 slots at each end.

Once the frame components are assembled in the opening, the tabs on each jamb corner
clip are bend over to align and hold the head in place. The frame is squared and secured
at the top with the jamb compression anchors and the base secured with drywall screws
through the faces into the floor runners. The jamb/head corner presents a hairline miter
joint.

Knocked-down slip-on drywall frames are used for 3 and 4-sided frames and borrowed
lights only.

Fleming A-Series are also considered knocked-down slip-on frames because of their
installation method. A-Series jambs use a 4-tab corner clip system, have the jamb and
head faces dimpled for screw fixing to the partition but do not have compression anchors.

Corner Clip

Compression
Anchor

Head

Assembled
Jamb/Head
Hinge Jamb Intersection
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 37 : DW-Series Knocked-Down Slip-On Drywall Frames

 Page
24
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Set-Up and Welded frames (abbreviated as SUW) are assembled at the factory or the
distributor’s shop. The contractor places the assembled frame in position, anchors it to the
floor and constructs the required partition around it.

They can be used in new unit masonry or drywall partitions in either wrap-around or butted
applications. For existing walls, set-up and welded frames are used in a butted application
only.

Set-up and welded frames can be masonry or drywall profile.

Knocked-down components can be converted to a set-up and welded frame. As shown in

Figure 38, the top portion of the jamb corner clips are removed and the jambs and head are
assembled in the usual manner. The remaining jamb rabbet clip tabs, inserted through the
head slots, are bent over. The intersecting face miter joints are continuously welded on the
inside of the profile.

When transom, sidelight or window frames are required, this is the assembly method
employed. Intersecting face miters and sill butt face joints are continuously welded on the
inside of the profile, where as mullion and center rail faces are butted and continuously
welded on the outside and ground smooth.

All exposed face miters and butted face joints are body filled, ground to a smooth, uniform
finish and touched up with a zinc-rich primer.

Fleming F, A, Miter and Notch and Stick Series product can be assembled using the set-up
and welded method.

Seamless Exposed
Face Miter

Welded Inside Face

Figure 34 : Set-Up and Welded Frames

Figure 38 : Set-Up and Welded Frames

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
25
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

WALLS AND ANCHORS

As discussed earlier, certain frame profiles and assembly methods are intended for specific
types of walls and they can be installed in several different ways. In this section we will
cover basic wall construction, frame recommendations and anchoring methods.

Figure 39 below shows a stripped down plan view of a small commercial building that uses
the 3 basic types of wall : unit masonry, drywall partitions and poured concrete. It also
shows combinations of brick and block and brick, block and drywall together.

The architect will use specific types of line work and/or symbols to indicate which type of
wall is required in each location. Figure 39 is fairly typical for most architectural firms
today. It is important that you determine the type of wall so that you can provide the
appropriate frame and anchorage needed.

Brick & Block

Poured
Concrete

Unit Masonry
(Block)

Drywall
Partitions

Brick, Block
& Drywall

Figure 39 : Typical Floor Plan

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
26
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

The illustrations below detail the most common types of wall construction. We have
provided both isometric and plan views of each. The plan views are generally what shows
up on the large scale architectural details.

Masonry Concrete Block

Poured Concrete

Channel Type Steel Stud and Drywall

Wood Stud and Drywall

PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 40 : Typical Wall Details

 Page
27
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

Brick or block are manufactured in various standard sizes, the most common of which are
4”, 6”, 8”, 10” and 12” nominal thickness. Blocks are actually 3/8” thinner than their nominal
size (ie : 3-5/8”, 5-5/8”, 7-5/8”, 9-5/8” or 11-5/8”).

There are two masonry installation methods: wrap around or butted applications.

Wrap Around application is where the masonry wall is placed inside the throat opening.
The throat opening should be 1/8” greater than the actual wall thickness. The remaining
gap between the wall and the frame is sealed with caulking materials. Figure 41 illustrates
typical wrap around applications and the standard F, Miter and Notch and Stick-Series
jamb depths used with each. The wrap around application is not generally used for 10” or
12” block.

6" Block
4" Block

3"
55"
35"

3"

64
8
8

44

8" Block
75"

3"
8

84

Figure 41 : Wrap Around Masonry Applications

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
28
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Butted application is the other installation method for masonry walls. In this situation the
jamb depth of the frame is equal to or less than the actual wall thickness. Figure 42 shows
typical butted applications and the different standard F, Miter and Notch and Stick-Series
jambs depths which can be used with each. The butted application is not generally used
for 4” block.

55"
8 785"

3"
44 3" 53" or 63"
44, 4 4

6" Block 8" Block

95"
8 11 5"
8

3" 53" 63" 73" or 83" 3" 53" 63" 73" or 83"
44,
44, 4, 4, 4 4 4, 4, 4 4

10" Block 12" Block

Figure 42 : Butted Masonry Application

Wrap around and butt application masonry frames, whether knocked-down or set-up and
welded, are stood in place, anchored to the floor and the wall is constructed around them.
As the block work progresses up each jamb, wall anchors, positioned above or below the
hinge reinforcings and directly opposite on the strike jamb, are embedded in the mortar
joints between the block courses. The space inside the frame is filled with mortar, which is
referred to as a “fully grouted frame”. The gap between the frame and the wall is sealed
PRINTED IN CANADA

with caulking materials.

 Page
29
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

MASONRY WALL ANCHORS

Two types of anchors are used to secure frame product in new unit masonry walls : wire or
bridge and strap fire anchors.

These anchors are embedded into the horizontal mortar joints between courses, as the wall
is built-up around the frame.

The number of anchors per jamb is dependent on the frame height not the anchor type.
Industry and Fleming standards are as shown in Table 3, below.

Maximum Frame Quantity of

Rabbet Height Anchors per Jamb
5’0” (60”) 2
7’6” (90”) 3
10’0” (120”) 4
12’0” (144”) 5

Table 3 : Anchors in Masonry Partitions

Wire anchors, shown in Figure 43, are the most versatile and commonly used. These
anchors are manufactured from malleable steel, drawn into a loop. The open ends can be
bent to suit any jamb depth. Wire anchors are shipped loose to the job site and installed by
the contractor.

Wire anchors can be used in all non-rated fire door frame product, frames up to 96” x 96”
with up to 1-1/2 hour fire ratings and 3/4 hour fire rated sidelight and window assemblies up
to 96” width or 98” height.

Butted Application Wrap Application

Brick & Block

Wrap Application
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 43 : Masonry Wire Anchor

 Page
30
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Bridge and strap fire anchors are used exclusively in fire rated frame product. This type
of anchor is used only for fire rated : 3 hour frames, frames over 96” x 96”, transom frames
or sidelight or window units exceeding 96” width or 98” height.

As shown in Figure 44, the bridge of the anchor is welded inside the soffit of the jamb either
at the factory or the listed distributor’s shop. The strap slides up and down the bridge to
allow for placement within the horizontal mortar joints.

This type of anchor can be used with all jamb depths and profiles of frame product.

Bridge

Strap

Butted Application Wrap Application

Figure 44 : Bridge and Strap Masonry Fire Anchor

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
31
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION

With these types of walls, single or multiple layers of drywall, gypsum, sheet rock or plaster
and lath are affixed to wood or steel studs. Drywall, gypsum and sheet rock are basically
the same thing, a board of gypsum, plaster or cement composition faced with paper,
available in 1/2” or 5/8” thickness.

Plaster and lath are not used very often but can be applied from 3/8” to 1/2” thickness.

STEEL STUD WALLS

There are 3 basic designs of steel stud : truss, nailable and channel. By far the most
common is the channel type. Channel studs are available in 6 different sizes : 1-5/8”,
2-1/2”, 3-1/2”, 3-5/8”, 4” and 6”. With steel studs, the nominal size is the actual size. Not
all sizes are available in all areas of the country.

Frames in drywall, in most situations, are installed in a wrap around application. When
welded or knocked-down frames are used, the throat opening should be 1/8” larger than
the wall. For knocked-down slip-on drywall frames the throat should be same as the wall
thickness.

Double steel studs should be used at all jambs and back-to-back runners at all heads.
Figure 45 shows the recommended practice at head and jamb stud intersections.

Upper head runner

notched, bent up
and screw fixed to
inner stud

Upper and lower

head runners
Screw fixed
together

Figure 45 : Recommended Installation

PRINTED IN CANADA

Steel Studs at Jamb/Head Intersection

 Page
32
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Typical steel stud and drywall partitions, together with the standard jamb depths used with
each, are shown in Figure 46.

2-1/2” Steel Stud 2-1/2” Steel Stud

+ 1/2” Drywall Each Side + 5/8” Drywall Each Side

3-1/2” Steel Stud 3-5/8” Steel Stud 3-5/8” Steel Stud

+ 5/8” Drywall Each Side + 1/2” Drywall Each Side + 5/8” Drywall Each Side

3-5/8” Steel Stud 3-5/8” Steel Stud 4” Steel Stud

+ 2 Layers of 1/2” + 2 Layers of 5/8” + 5/8” Drywall Each Side
Drywall Each Side Drywall Each Side

6” Steel Stud 6” Steel Stud

+ 5/8” Drywall Each Side + 2 Layers of 5/8”
Drywall Each Side
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 46 : Typical Steel Stud and Drywall Partitions

 Page
33
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

STEEL STUD WALL ANCHORS

Four types of anchors are used to secure frame product in steel stud and drywall partitions:
combination stud anchors, ‘Z’ anchors, compression anchors and face dimpled anchors.
The selection of anchor type is dependent upon the frame assembly method and the profile
of the jambs.

Combination stud anchors (CSA) are used for standard profile, welded or knocked-down
F, Miter and Notch or Stick-Series frame product where the wall is constructed after the
frame is in place.

The 2 piece CSA, in Figure 47, is available in 2 sizes. One is suitable for all standard
drywall profiles from 4-1/2” to 6-5/8” jamb depth, plus 4-3/4” and 5-3/4” F, Miter and Notch
or Stick-Series masonry profiles. The other size covers standard drywall profile jamb
depths from 7-1/8” to 9-1/2” plus 6-3/4” and 7-3/4” masonry profiles. This anchor is made
of 2 identical size parts which interlock to form the completed anchors. They can easily be
put together to form various sizes to fit multiple standard jamb depths.

The one-piece CSA, also illustrated in Figure 47, is used only in standard masonry profile
frames. It is available in sizes to suit F, Miter and Notch or Stick-Series 4-3/4”, 5-3/4”,
6-3/4”, 7-3/4” and 8-3/4” jamb depths.

2-Piece Combination 1-Piece Combination CSA Installation

Stud Anchor Stud Anchor

Figure 47 : Combination Stud Anchors

Both the 1 and 2-piece designs are manufactured from 20 gage galvanneal steel and are
friction fitted inside the profile before the studs are erected.

For all non-fire rated frame product or frames up to 1-1/2 hour rating, either anchor design
may be shipped loose to the site for installation by the contractor.

For 3 hour rated frames and all rated transom, sidelight and window frames, these anchors
PRINTED IN CANADA

must be tack welded into the jambs at the factory or the listed distributor’s shop.
 Page
34
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Both designs of CSA are secured through the inner most steel stud with 2 standard 1/2”
long pan head sheet metal screws per anchor. Figure 47 provides a typical completed
installation detail.

‘Z’ anchors, the second type of steel stud anchor, are used for non-standard jamb depth
double rabbet profiles in welded or knocked-down frames. Shown in Figure 48, they are
available in widths of 2”, 3”, 5” and 7” to suit jamb depths up to 9-3/4” and are
manufactured from 16 gage galvanneal steel.

These anchors are tack welded in two places to the inside of the profile at the factory or
distributor’s shop directly above or below the hinge reinforcings and directly opposite on
strike jambs. As with the CSA designs, ‘Z’ anchors are secured through the inner most
stud with 2 standard 1/2” long pan head sheet metal screws per anchor.

Typical Installation

Figure 48 : ‘Z’ Anchor

Like masonry wall anchors, the number of anchors per jamb, when using CSA or ‘Z’
anchors is based on the height of the frame. Table 4 below details the requirements.

Maximum Frame Quantity of CSA or

Rabbet Height ‘Z’ Anchors per Jamb
5’0” (60”) 2
7’6” (90”) 3
10’0” (120”) 4
12’0” (144”) 5

Table 4: Anchors in Steel Stud Partitions

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
35
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Compression anchors are the third type used in steel stud partitions. They are provided
as part of an anchoring system in Fleming DW-Series knocked-down slip-on drywall frames
only, where the frame is installed after the wall is completed.

These anchors are factory welded into the upper portion of each jamb. By turning an
adjusting screw located in the jamb soffit, the internal portion of the anchors press snugly
against the steel studs, plumbing and squaring the frame in the opening. Figure 49
illustrates the 18 gage galvanneal compression anchor assembly.

Adjusting
Screw

Typical Installation

Figure 49 : DW-Series Compression Anchor Assembly

Faced dimpled anchors is the remaining type for steel stud partitions. The method is
used only on Fleming’s A-Series adjustable frames.

The faces of A-Series jambs and heads are factory punched and dimpled for # 8 drywall
screws. After the frame is in place, plumbed and squared, it is anchored to the partition
with 2-1/2” drywall screws. Jambs up to 86” rabbet height receive 3 dimples per face and
jambs up to 96” have 4. Head faces are dimpled at each end, with pairs having an
additional set at the center of the rabbet width. Figure 50 illustrates typical corner
intersection and installation details.

Face
Dimples
PRINTED IN CANADA

Typical Installation

Figure 50 : A-Series Frame

Face Dimpled Anchors
 Page
36
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

WOOD STUD WALLS

Wood studs are nominally 2” x 3”, 2” x 4”, 2” x 6” or 2” x 8”. Unlike steel studs, they are
actually 1/2” smaller than their nominal size (ie : a 2” x 4” is really measures 1-1/2” x
3-1/2”).

Frames in wood stud and drywall partitions are installed in a wrap around application. As in
most wrap applications, with welded or knocked-down frames, the throat opening should be
1/8” larger than the actual wall thickness. Knocked-down slip-on drywall frames, Fleming’s
DW-Series, should be sized so that the throat opening is the same as the actual wall
thickness.

Wood stud partitions are built prior to the installation of the frame in a method called ‘tilt-up
construction’. The wall, complete with rough openings for frames, is built flat on the floor
and then stood or tilted-up into position. Double studs should be used at all jambs with
solid blocking at either side of a framed opening. Figure 51 shows a typical wood stud
partition framed for a single door opening.

Double
Studs

Solid
Blocking

Figure 51 : Typical Wood Stud Framed Opening

Table 5 below provides the minimum rough stud opening sizes for Fleming F, Miter and
Notch, Stick, DW and A-Series frame product.

F, M&N or Stick- DW-Series A-Series

Series Frames Frames Frames
Rough Stud Over-All Frame Frame Rabbet Frame Rabbet
Opening Width Width + 1/2” Width + 1-7/8” Width + 1-5/8”
Rough Stud Over-All Frame Frame Rabbet Frame Rabbet
Opening Height Height + 1/4” Height + 3/4” Height + 13/16”
PRINTED IN CANADA

Table 5 : Rough Stud Opening Sizes

 Page
37
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Typical wood stud and drywall partitions, together with the standard jamb depths used with
each, are shown in Figure 52.

2” x 3” Wood Stud
2” x 3” Wood Stud
+ 2 Layers of 1/2” Drywall + 1/2” Drywall Each Side
Each Side

2” x 3” Wood Stud 2” x 4” Wood Stud

+ 5/8” Drywall Each Side + 5/8” Drywall Each Side

2” x 6” Wood Stud 2” x 8” Wood Stud

+ 5/8” Drywall Each Side + 1/2” Drywall Each Side
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 52 : Typical Wood Stud and Drywall Partitions

 Page
38
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

WOOD STUD WALL ANCHORS

Four types of anchors are also used to secure frame product in wood stud and drywall
partitions. Three of them are also used with steel studs : combination stud anchors,
compression anchors and face dimpled anchors. The fourth, wood stud anchors, are used
only in wood stud partitions. Again, as with steel stud construction, the selection of the
appropriate wood stud anchor is dependent on the frame assembly method and profile of
the jambs.

Combination stud anchors (CSA), previously described on Page 33, are used for
standard profile, welded or knocked-down F, Miter and Notch or Stick-Series frame product
where the drywall is applied after the frame is in place.

When used in wood stud partitions, the ‘legs’ on the CSA are bent away from the throat
opening, parallel to the wall and the anchor is secured to the faces of the adjacent jamb
studs with 4 nails per anchor. Figure 53 illustrates these anchors and provides a typical
installation detail.

2-Piece Combination 1-Piece Combination CSA Installation

Stud Anchor Stud Anchor Wood Stud Wall

Figure 53 : Combination Stud Anchors in Wood Stud Walls

Wood stud anchors (WSA) are used specifically in 2” x 4” partitions with welded or
knocked-down F, Miter and Notch or Stick-Series frames where the drywall is installed after
the frame. These 20 gage galvanneal steel anchors are tack welded inside the jamb profile
at the factory or the distributor’s shop directly above or below the hinge reinforcings and
directly opposite on strike jambs.

Wood stud anchors can be used on all non-fire rated and all fire rated frame product. They
PRINTED IN CANADA

are secured to the face of the stud wall with 4 nails per anchor as shown in Figure 54.
 Page
39
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Wood Stud Anchor WSA Installation

Figure 54 : Wood Stud Anchors

The number of anchors recommended for CSA and WSA in wood stud and drywall
partitions is shown in Table 6, below.

Maximum Frame Quantity of CSA or

Rabbet Height WSA per Jamb
5’0” (60”) 2
7’6” (90”) 3
10’0” (120”) 4
12’0” (144”) 5

Table 6 : Anchors in Wood Stud Partitions

Compression and face dimpled anchors were covered on Page 35 and shown in Figures
49 and 50. They are used in the same fashion whether installed in steel or wood stud
partitions. Figure 54 illustrates the installation details of both anchors in wood stud walls.

Compression Anchor Face Dimpled Anchors

Figure 55 : Wood Stud Installations

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
40
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION

Existing construction is any wall that has been built prior to the installation of the frame. It
occurs in new buildings or those being renovated where frame product is to be installed
against pre-cast, poured concrete or structural steel.

Existing construction is also found in renovation work where masonry or stud and drywall
partitions are to ‘punched-out’ for new openings or where an old frame is to be replaced
with a new one.

Knocked-down and welded frame product, the F, Miter and Notch and Stick-Series, must
utilize a butted application when installed in existing walls. In this application, the jamb
depth is equal to or less than the actual wall thickness.

Knocked-down slip-on frames, either Fleming’s KD-DW or A-Series, are used in a wrap
around application in existing walls and the throat opening should be equal to the wall
thickness.

EXISTING PRE-CAST, CONCRETE OR MASONRY WALLS

Figure 56 illustrates typical pre-cast or poured concrete walls and the standard F, Miter and
Notch or Stick-Series jamb depths used with each.

6” Concrete 8” Concrete 10” or 12” Concrete

Figure 56 : Typical Pre-Cast or Poured Concrete Walls

On Page 28, Figure 42, details of butted frames in 6”, 8”, 10” and 12” masonry were
provided and these apply whether the wall is newly constructed or existing.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
41
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

EXISTING PRE-CAST, CONCRETE OR MASONRY WALL ANCHORS

As with new partitions, the selection of anchor types in existing walls is governed by the
frame assembly method and profile of the frame.

Existing pre-cast, poured concrete or masonry partitions, with knocked-down or welded

frames, have two styles of existing wall anchor (EWA) available : butterfly or strap and
spacer.

In both cases, the soffit of the jamb is punched and dimpled for 1/4” diameter expansion
shell anchor bolts or Tapcon concrete screws. The anchor preparations are located in the
soffit, 6” from the top and bottom of each jamb, adjacent to the center hinge and directly
opposite on strike or blank jambs. EWA guides are tack-welded inside the jamb profile at
the factory or the distributor’s shop. The frame is placed in the opening, squared and
plumbed. For expansion shell type anchors, holes to suit the expansion shell anchor are
drilled in the partition. The expansion shell anchors are placed into the holes and
tightened, securing the frame in place. For Tapcon concrete screws, after the frame is
squared and plumbed in the openig, pilot holes are drilled and the Tapcons are screwed in
place. Expansion bolt anchors and Tapcons are supplied by the contractor.

Butterfly type existing wall anchor guides, shown in Figure 57, are manufactured from 18
gage galvanneal steel. This style is used in 2” face, double rabbet, masonry profile
sections.

Figure 57 : Butterfly Existing Wall Anchor Guide

Strap and spacer type existing wall anchor guides, illustrated in Figure 58, are 16 gage
galvanneal steel. There are 5 standard strap widths to suit jamb depths from 4-3/8” to
9-5/16”. This style is used in single or double rabbet masonry profiles where the butterfly
type is not suitable.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 58 : Strap and Spacer Existing Wall Anchor Guide

 Page
42
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Face dimpled anchors, standard with Fleming’s A-Series frame, as detailed in Figure 59,
are the only option when a wrap application in existing pre-cast, concrete or masonry is
needed. The frame is secured with 2-1/2” long 3/16” diameter flat head Tapcon screws in
the jambs and head.

Pre-Cast or Concrete Partitions Masonry Partitions

Figure 59 : A-Series Frame

Face Dimpled Anchors

EXISTING DRYWALL PARTITIONS

In renovation work, openings are sometimes ‘punched-out’ of an existing drywall partition

for a new frame. In this type of work only KD-DW or A-Series, knocked-down slip-on
frames in a wrap application will work.

The installation of either series of frame and its anchorage is identical to new construction
in drywall. Compression and face dimpled anchors in steel stud walls are detailed on Page
35 and for wood stud partitions on Page 39.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
43
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

FLOOR ANCHORS

As well as being secured to the wall, most frames are fixed to the floor. There are 3 basic
types: floor anchor straps, face-dimpled drywall base anchors and mullion floor anchors.

Floor anchor straps are available in 3 designs : one for standard double rabbet and cased
open profiles, another for non-standard single rabbet sections and the third for double
egress hinge jambs. As shown in Figure 60, each type is welded to the inside of the frame
profile and is ram set or bolted to the floor through the 2 holes provided.

These 16 gage galvanneal steel anchors are used in welded or knocked-down frames
installed in new masonry or stud and drywall partitions.

Standard Single Rabbet Double Egress

Figure 60 : Floor Anchor Straps

Welded or knocked-down frames in existing pre-cast, concrete or masonry frames cannot

be anchored to the floor. The EWA preparations and guide located 6” from the bottom of
each jamb act as the floor anchor.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
44
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Face-dimpled base anchors are used in knock-down drywall KD-DW Series frames.
Each jamb face is punched and dimpled 3/4” from the bottom for standard # 8 drywall
screws which secure the base of the frame to the steel floor runner or wood sill plate.

Face dimpled
base anchor

Figure 61 : KD-DW Series

Face Dimpled Base Anchor

A similar base anchor is used in Fleming A-Series frames. As illustrated in Figure 62, each
jamb face is punched and dimpled 4” from the bottom and screws secure the base of the
frame to the partition.

Face dimpled
base anchor
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 62 : A-Series
Face Dimpled Base Anchor
 Page
45
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Mullion floor anchors are used to secure mullions which terminate at the floor. These
anchors are manufactured from 12 gage galvanneal steel and are provided with 2 holes
through which they are ram set or bolted to the floor.

There are 5 standard sizes to suit 4-3/4”, 5-3/4”, 6-3/4”, 7-3/4” and 8-3/4” standard jamb
depth, 2” face mullions. Non-standard sizes are also available.

As shown in Figure 63, the mullion is placed over the installed anchor and holes are drilled
through the mullion face and the anchor. The mullion is then secured to the anchor with
# 12 x 1/2” long pan head sheet metal screws.

Non-fire rated mullions receive 1 screw per face. Mullions in fire rated frames require 2 per
face.

Non-Rated Fire Rated

Figure 63 : Mullion Floor Anchors

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
46
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

HARDWARE
LOCATIONS

All Fleming frame products utilize standard locations for hinge and strike jamb preparations.
Hinge jambs for frames 6’8” through 7’2” height are prepared for three 4-1/2” standard
weight (.134” leaf thickness) hinges with a 3/8” backset. All strike jambs are prepared for
an ASA (1-1/4” x 4-7/8”) strike with a 3/8” backset and 3 silencers.

Figure 64 illustrates the standard hardware locations for Fleming frame product, 6’8” to 7’2”
rabbet height.

Figure 64 : Standard Hardware Locations

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
47
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

REINFORCINGS

Fleming frame products utilize common components beyond their floor and wall anchors.
Hinge, strike and closer reinforcings, both standard and optional, are typical through the
product lines.

The following section provides you with basic information on the most common
preparations and reinforcements.

High frequency hinge reinforcings, shown in Figure 65, are provided at all hinge cutouts
as a standard with Fleming. This unique 10 gage galvanneal steel angle design is far
superior to traditional 3/16” thick flat bar hinge reinforcings. Each reinforcing is secured in
the section with 6 projection welds. All hinge cutouts (except on A-Series frames) are
protected with 20 gage galvanneal steel mortar guard boxes.

The hinge reinforcings supplied standard are off-set, drilled and tapped for 4-1/2” standard
weight hinges. A standard weight hinge has a leaf thickness of .134” . Each reinforcing bar
is provided with 4 raised 'donuts' which may be ground off by the distributor to convert from
standard weight to heavy weight (.180” thick leaf) hinges.

Fleming can also provide reinforcing for non-standard hinge leaf thickness, 5” hinges,
anchor hinges, pivots, continuous and other specialized type hinges.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 65 : High Frequency Hinge Reinforcing

 Page
48
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

ASA strike reinforcings are provided standard in all Fleming strike jambs and mullions.
An ASA strike is 4-7/8” tall, 1-1/4” wide and has a lip 3-3/8” tall which allows the latch bolt to
retract without marring the frame.

In addition, all strike jambs are provided with 3 bumper holes, factory punched in the stop.
One is centered at the strike height, the other two, 10” from the top and bottom of the frame
rabbet opening.

Two designs of reinforcing are utilized : one for open sections, the other for mullions and
A-Series strike jambs. Both designs are secured to the frame with 6 projection welds per
reinforcing.

In Figure 66, the left unit is the design used in open sections. This 16 gage galvanneal
component has an integral mortar guard box sized to take up to 1” long latch or dead bolts.
The strike mounting holes are extruded and tapped to an effective 12 gage material
thickness to ensure a high performance product.

The right side illustrates the 12 gage galvanneal steel strike reinforcing for mullions and
A-Series strike jambs.

Strike Jambs Mullions and A-Series

Strike Jambs
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 66 : ASA Strike Reinforcings

 Page
49
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

SMALL ASA/NL strike reinforcing is an optional preparation on all Fleming product.

Shown in Figure 67, they can be used as a stand alone prep or in conjunction with an ASA
strike.

These 14 gage galvanneal steel reinforcings are coined, drilled and tapped to suit standard
2-3/4” x 1-1/8” no lip strikes provided with most cylindrical and mortise deadlocks.

Small ASA/NL strike reinforcings are secured to the inside of the profile with 3 tack welds
each and for all open sections (except A-Series frames) are protected with 22 gage
galvanneal steel mortar guard boxes.

Figure 67 : Small ASA/NL (Deadlock) Strike Reinforcing

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
50
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Surface strike reinforcing is another option available on all Fleming frame product. This
type of strike is used on openings equipped with rim exit devices. Shown in Figure 68, this
12 gage galvanneal steel reinforcing plate is secured to the inside of the strike jamb soffit
with 3 tack welds.

The flat bar reinforcing is 11-7/8” long and from 3/4” to 2” wide in 1/4” increments. The
reinforcing is generally 1/4” narrower than the soffit width and is installed tight against the
door stop.

Figure 68 : Surface Strike Reinforcing

In addition to the 3 presented, Fleming can provide frame product prepared for non-
standard strike sizes or locations and specialized units such as electric strikes.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
51
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Surface closer reinforcing in heads is another option available. Abbreviated as CRW, for
closer reinforcing – welded, this option provides the necessary material thickness and
strength required to mount surface closers.

As shown in Figure 69, the standard 12 gage galvanneal steel flat bar reinforcings,
measuring 11-7/8” long and 1-1/2” wide, are secured to the inside of the head or transom
mullion face with 3 tack welds at the factory or distributor’s shop.

Figure 69 : Surface Closer Reinforcing

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
52
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Parallel arm closer reinforcing is a second type available on all Fleming heads and
transom mullions. Abbreviated as P/A, it also uses 12 gage galvanneal steel flat bar
reinforcings 11-7/8” long.

Parallel arm closers are soffit mounted. When the soffit is less than 2” in width an
additional reinforcing is provided in the opposite rabbet. Soffit reinforcings are available
from 3/4” to 1-3/4” widths, in 1/4” increments. Opposite rabbet reinforcings are from 3/4” to
1-1/2” width. When the opposite rabbet reinforcings are required, the total width of the 2
reinforcings is 2-1/4”.

Figure 70 : Parallel Arm Closer Reinforcing

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
53
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Reversible flush bolt strikes and reinforcings are also available for all Fleming frame
product heads and transom mullions. Used in pairs only, this combination head cut-out,
strike reinforcing and flush both strike are illustrated in Figure 71.

The cut-out is made in the door rabbet, centered over the meeting edges of the two doors.
The 16 gage chromated galvanneal steel reinforcing is spot welded into place inside the
head or transom mullion in two places.

The strike itself, also 16 gage chromated galvanneal steel, has a rectangular hole punched
at one end. The strike is screw fixed to the reinforcing with the hole on the left side when
the inactive leaf, the one with the flush bolt, is left hand swing. Reverse the strike and it is
ready for a right hand door.

Figure 71 : Reversible Flush Bolt Strike and Reinforcing

Fleming can also provide a number of non-standard head preparations including : mortise
closers and holders, door position switches, surface maglocks and mortise vertical rod
strikes.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
54
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

HANDING
Frame product is manufactured to suit the handing of the doors hung in them.

Although the terms “hand” and “swing” are used interchangeably, technically “swing”
describes the direction of egress for the frame and “hand” defines the operating direction of
a door.

The hand of every door can be defined using one of the following terms: Left Hand, Right
Hand, Left Hand Reverse or Right Hand Reverse.

Left or Right Hand doors are those where the key for the latching device is located on the
push side (or back) of the door. In other words, when you are locking or unlocking the
door, you will push the door away from you to operate it.

Figure 72 : Right or Left Hand

Reverse Hand doors (also referred to as reverse bevel doors) are those where the key is
located on the pull side (or front) of the door. When you are locking or unlocking the door,
you will pull the door towards you to operate it.

Figure 73 : Reverse Hand or Reverse Beveled

There are 6 types of frame swing configurations with variations of each recognized in
industry. The illustrations on the following pages detail the various door and hardware
handings and frame swings available.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
55
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Singles are the simplest type of frame available. Single frames are either left or right-hand
swing. Figure 74 illustrates “single acting” doors, those which operate in one direction only.
A left hand swing frame will use either a left hand or a right hand reverse door. Conversely,
a right hand swing frame uses either right hand or left hand reverse doors.

Figure 74 : Singles (Single Acting)

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
56
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Pairs are frames with two doors hung in the same rabbet opening without a vertical center
mullion between them. In a pair, one or both doors may contain a latching device. A door
with a latching device is called an “active” leaf. The door in a pair prepared for a strike is
called the “inactive” leaf. Figure 75 details the 6 variations of pairs available based on door
handing.

Figure 75 : Pairs

Double Egress is a specialized type of frame with a pair of doors operating in opposite
directions. The doors in double egress frames are always reverse handed and both leafs
are active.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 76 : Double Egress

 Page
57
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

R/L, L/L and R/R units are similar to pairs, but have a fixed or removable mullion between
the doors. They are in fact two single doors, each with its own rabbet opening. They can
be reverse handed, but both leafs are active.

Figure 77 : R/L, L/L and R/R

Contra-Swing is similar in function to a double egress unit. The two doors swing in the
opposite direction but latch into a vertical mullion placed between them. Either door can be
reverse handed, but both leafs are active.

Figure 78 : Contra-Swing
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
58
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Double Acting frames permit doors to operate in both directions, towards or away from
their closed position. They are available in singles or pairs. Double acting frames are
usually fabricated from cased open components.

Figure 79 : Double Acting

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
59
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Communicating frames are double rabbet units prepared to accept a door in each rabbet.
They typically facilitate access and control between individual hotel or motel rooms.

Figure 80 : Communicating Frames

Multi-Opening frames, transom and sidelight frames are also available. These units
contain 3 or more doors in combinations of singles, pairs, double egress, contra-swing or
double acting configurations. In Figure 81 a few straight forward units are detailed.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 81 : Multi-Opening Units

 Page
60
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

FRAME SERIES

Now that you have an understanding of frame profiles, assembly methods, anchoring,
hardware reinforcing, handing and terminology in general terms, the following pages will
cover Fleming’s five basic series of frame product.

This section is intended to provide you with a working knowledge and over-view of our
varied standard frame series and how they can apply to the projects you are supplying.

F-SERIES

The F-Series is our standard knocked-down masonry frame product with applications
in block, concrete and drywall partitions.

This series can utilize wire or bridge and strap fire anchors, one or two-piece
combination stud anchors, wood stud anchors or the butterfly existing wall anchor
guides.

The F-Series is eligible for fire ratings up to an including 4’0” x 10’0” singles and 8’0” x
10’0” pairs at 3 hours.

The standard features of this series are :

• 16 gage punch-mitered, double rabbet, masonry profile, commercial frame for

1-3/4" thick doors
• Jambs, heads and all components fabricated from paintable galvanneal steel
• All components projection welded
• All hinge locations provided with Fleming 10 gage high frequency hinge reinforcing
(see Figure 65, Page 47)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• All hinge reinforcings protected with dust boxes
• 16 gage ASA strike reinforcing with 1" deep integral dust box (see Figure 66, Page
48)
• Strike jambs and double heads machine punched for door silencers
• Knocked-down, convertible to set-up and welded construction. Each jamb provided
with 2 projection welded KD corner clips and head machine slotted for corner clip tabs
• Floor anchor projection welded into all jambs (see Figure 60, Page 43)
• 2" face x 5/8" stop profile with unequal rabbets
• Available in standard widths, heights and jamb depths
• All hinge jambs provided with embossed (die stamped) UL fire label

Figure 82 on the next page will provide you with illustrations of typical heads, jambs and
the standard jamb head intersection after assembly along with profile and standard size
PRINTED IN CANADA

information.
 Page
61
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Typical Head

Assembled Knocked
Typical Hinge Jamb Down Corner
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 82 : F-Series Standard Profiles and Sizes

 Page
62
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

DW-SERIES

The DW-Series is a knocked-down drywall profile product installed in steel or wood stud
partitions after the application of the drywall.

DW-Series is eligible for fire ratings up to and including 1-1/2 hours at 3’6” x 7’2” or 3’0” x
8’0” singles and 7’0” x 7’2” pairs.

Standard Features
• 16 or 18 gage punch-mitered, double rabbet, drywall profile, commercial frame for
1-3/4" doors
• 18 gage punch-mitered, double rabbet, drywall profile, commercial frame for 1-3/8" doors
• 16 gage punch-mitered, cased open drywall profile commercial frame
• Jambs, heads and all components fabricated from paintable galvanneal steel
• All components projection welded
• All hinge locations provided with Fleming 10 gage high frequency hinge reinforcing
(see Figure 65, Page 47)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• 16 gage ASA strike reinforcing with 1" deep integral dust box (see Figure 66, Page 48)
• Strike jambs and double heads machine punched for door silencers
• Knocked-down (slip-on) construction. Each jamb provided with 2 projection welded
KD corner clips and head machine slotted for corner clip tabs
• Adjustable compression anchor projection welded into top of each jamb (see Figure 49,
Page 35)
• Each jamb face punched and dimpled for drywall screw attachment to floor studs (see
Figure 61, Page 44)
• 2" face x 5/8" stop profile with unequal rabbets.
• Available in standard widths and heights and jamb depths
• All hinge jambs for 1-3/4" doors are provided with an embossed (die stamped) UL fire label

Figure 83, below, details typical jambs, heads and the standard DW-Series knocked-down
drywall corner intersection. Figure 84 on the next page provides the profile and standard
sizes available.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Assembled Knocked Down

Typical Head Typical Hinge Jamb Drywall Series Corner

Figure 83 : Standard DW-Series Frame Details

 Page
63
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 84 : Standard DW-Series Profiles and Sizes

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
64
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

DE-SERIES (DOUBLE EGRESS) FRAMES

Double egress is a set-up and welded, masonry profile frame installed in block, concrete
or drywall partitions.

It contains a pair of doors operating in opposite directions, generally installed in a cross-

corridor situation. Figure 85 shows typical plan views of double egress assemblies, both
right and left hand swinging.

Right Hand Swing Left Hand Swing

Figure 85 : Double Egress Units

These frames can utilize wire or bridge and strap fire anchors, special “Z” stud anchors or
the strap and spacer type existing wall anchor guides.

DE-Series frames are eligible for fire ratings up to 8’0” x 10’0” at 3 hours.

The standard features are :

• 16 gage, masonry profile, commercial frame for 1-3/4" thick doors

• 2" face, double 5/8" stopped jambs, factory notched at top to suit wrap around applications
• 2" face, single rabbet heads factory assembled, exposed stop ends at center completely
finished and heads factory notched at each end for set-up and welded butt joint at jambs
• Welded-in inverted channel provided at the center of each head
• Jambs, heads and all components fabricated from paintable galvanneal steel
• All components projection welded
• All hinge locations provided with Fleming 10 gage high frequency hinge reinforcing (see
Figure 65, Page 47)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• All hinge reinforcings protected with dust boxes
• Floor anchor projection welded into all jambs (see Figure 60, Page 43)
• Available in standard widths, heights and jamb depths
• All hinge jambs are provided with an embossed (die stamped) UL fire label

Figure 86, on the next page, illustrates typical hinge jamb, head, set-up and welded corner
details.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
65
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Factory notched at each

end to suit jamb butt joint

Factory notched for wrap-

around applications

Inverted Channel

Typical Hinge Jamb

Typical Factory Assembled Head

Welded Inside Face

Inverted Channel

Seamless Face
Butt Joint

Typical Section through Head

Typical Assembled Hinge Jamb and Head

PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 86 : Standard Double Egress Frame Details

 Page
66
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Because the doors in double egress frames are centered on the jamb depth, the door
rabbet is 2” instead of 1-15/16” and the soffit and reveal rabbets on the hinge jambs are
equal. As shown in Figure 87 below, the jambs are ‘double stopped’ and the heads are
single rabbet profiles.

Figure 87 : Standard Double Egress Series Profiles and Sizes

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
67
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

A-SERIES (ADJUSTABLE) FRAMES

The A-Series is our adjustable jamb depth frame product. It is a knocked-down slip-on
drywall profile which can be used in stud and drywall, existing block and concrete
partitions.

This series is available in 3 sizes : 4-1/2”, 5-1/16” and 7-7/8” to suit walls from 3-1/2” to
12-1/2” thickness, designated as "S" (small for 4-1/2"), "M" (medium for 5-1/16") and "L"
(large for 7-7/8").

The hinge and strike jambs and the heads of this series are face dimpled for either # 8
drywall screws or 3/16” diameter Tapcon screws which anchor the frame securely to the
wall.

A-Series frames are eligible for fire ratings up to 4’0” x 8’0” singles, 8’0” x 8’0” pairs, to
1-1/2 hour rating.

The standard features of this frame series are :

• 16 gage punch-mitered, adjustable jamb depth, drywall profile, commercial frame

for 1-3/4" doors
• Jambs, heads and all components fabricated from paintable galvanneal steel
• Standard jamb depths; 4-1/2” (to wrap 3-1/2" through 5-5/8" walls); 5-1/16” (to
wrap 4-1/16" through 6-7/8" walls) and; 7-7/8” (to wrap 6-7/8" through 12-1/2"
walls)
• All components projection welded
• All hinge locations provided with Fleming 10 gage high frequency hinge
reinforcing (see Figure 65, Page 47)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• 12 gage ASA strike reinforcing (see Figure 66, Page 48)
• Strike jambs and double heads machine punched for door silencers
• Knocked-down, convertible to set-up and welded construction. Each jamb
provided with 2 projection welded KD corner clips and head machine slotted for
corner clip tabs
• Jamb and head components connected with 2-piece, 14 gage sliding angle
bracket assemblies
• Jambs and heads punched and face dimpled for #8 drywall or 3/16” diameter
Tapcon screw anchors (see Figure 50, Page 35)
• 2" face x 5/8" stop profile
• Available in standard widths and heights
• All hinge jambs are provided with an embossed (die stamped) UL fire label

Figure 88 on the next page, provides you with standard profile and jamb/head intersection
details.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
68
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Typical Head

Standard Knocked-Down
Slip-On A-Series
Assembled Corner

Typical Hinge Jamb

PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 88 : Standard A-Series Profiles and Sizes

 Page
69
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

MN-SERIES (MITER AND NOTCH) AND ST-SERIES (STICKS)

These two Series are used for multi-opening frames, transom, sidelight and window
assemblies. Both are 16 gage galvanneal steel, masonry profile, distributor assembled
product.

With the MN-Series, jambs, heads, mullions, sills, center rails, corner posts and filler
pieces are ordered from the factory as machine mitered or notched to length components,
to suit the specific requirements of the unit to be built.

ST-Series components are ordered and inventoried by the distributor in standard 10’
length “sticks”. The distributor does the miters, notches and assembles them into the final
unit.

Both MN and ST-Series products are constructed as set-up and welded units for
installation in block, concrete or drywall partitions.

The standard features common to both Series are:

• 16 gage double rabbet, masonry profile, paintable galvanneal steel, commercial frame
components for 1-3/4" doors
• All hardware reinforcings projection welded
• All hinge locations provided with Fleming 10 gage high frequency hinge reinforcing
(see Figure 65, Page 47)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• In open hinge sections, reinforcings protected with dust boxes
• In open strike sections, 16 gage ASA strike reinforcing with 1" deep integral dust box
(see Figure 66, Page 48)
• In strike mullions, 12 gage ASA strike reinforcing (see Figure 66, Page 48)
• Floor anchor projection welded into all open section hinge and strike jambs (see Figure
60, Page 43)
• Full compliment of standard hinge/strike prep combinations in open and mullion
sections
• 2” face hinge, strike and blank open sections
• Mullions - 2" face
• Heads and sills – 2”, 4”, 6-13/16", 8", 8-13/16" and 12" face
• Center rails - 6", 8" and 12" face
• Cased open sections - 2" face
• Stopped and cased open filler pieces
• Corner posts - 2 and 3 way
• Available in standard widths, heights and jamb depths
• All hinge sections are provided with an embossed (die stamped) UL fire label

Figure 89, on the next page, provides profile details for the various standard MN and ST-
PRINTED IN CANADA

Series components available.

 Page
70
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 89 : MN and ST-Series Components

The illustration below in Figure 90 shows an exploded version of the components for a
typical sidelight frame with the various miters and notches and the finished set-up and
welded assembly.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 90 : MN or ST-Series Components for a Typical Sidelight Frame

 Page
71
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

FIRE RATED FRAME PRODUCT

Steel door and frame assemblies play a crucial role in providing the fire and life safety
protection required in most buildings today. Fire protection requirements are established
by the building code governing the area in which the building is to be erected and the uses
to which the building will be put.

The fire protection of a wall opening requires a complete assembly which includes the door,
frame, glazing materials, builders’ hardware and the installation.

The basic requirements relating to doors and frames are included in this manual. For
information on installation the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard, NFPA
80, “Fire Doors and Windows” should be consulted. This standard is specified as a
governing document in most North American Building Codes.

The manufacturers of builders’ hardware and the Door and Hardware Institute publish
documents which cover that facet of the industry.

Another good reference guide is the National Association of Architectural Metal

Manufacturers, Hollow Metal Manufacturers division (NAAMM-HMMA) publication entitled
“Fire-Rated Hollow Metal Fire Doors and Frames”, manual number HMMA-850. This
document brings together information from various sources into one booklet.

Our manual, the “Basic Hollow Metal Training Manual”, provides a general over-view only
of our capabilities for fire rated product. Fleming publishes a stand-alone, comprehensive
guide to the subject, entitled the “Fleming Fire Labeling Specifications” catalogue which has
been included in the last section of the manual. When you need specific, detailed
information on the requirements and limitations which apply to Fleming fire labeled
products, you will find this an invaluable source.

Fire doors and frames, since the early 1900’s, have been run to what has evolved into the
UL10b standard, published by Underwriters Laboratories. Other standards, which mirror
the UL one, include NFPA 252. These standards have been historically known as ‘negative
or neutral pressure’ tests. The neutral plane for these has been located at the top of the
frame assembly.

In 1997 the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) adopted and published an
alternate test method to be run under ‘positive pressure’, called UBC 7-2 (1997) for the
Uniform Building Code. UL has developed UL10c which addresses all the requirements of
the UBC standard. UL10c and UBC 7-2 (1997) require the neutral plane to be located 40”
from the bottom of the assembly.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
72
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Other changes, such as the development of positive pressure standards by NFPA and
ASTM and the International Building Code (IBC), a single model code for the United States,
will evolve and be adopted over the next few years.
From a fire rating stand point, there are three basic levels of performance or endurance,
each tied to the rating of the wall. The basic rule of thumb is : door, frame and hardware
fire protection ratings equal three-quarters of the wall's fire resistance rating. Table 7
outlines the relationship between opening location, wall rating and door and frame rating. It
is the responsibility of the architect to determine and schedule the requirements of all
openings in the building based on the local building code.
Wall Fire
Door and Frame
Opening Description Resistance
Fire Protection Rating
Rating
Openings in walls which separate buildings or
4 Hour 3 Hour
divide a single building into fire areas
Openings in; enclosures of ‘vertical communication’ such as stairwells
and elevator shafts or; exterior walls subject to severe fire exposure 2 Hour 1-1/2 Hour
from outside the building
Openings between occupancies 1 Hour 1 Hour
Openings in; corridors and room partitions or; exterior walls subject to
1 Hour 3/4 Hour
light to moderate fire exposure from outside the building
Openings where smoke control is the primary consideration or; 1/3 Hour
between a habitable room and a corridor when the wall has a fire (No Hose Stream - US)
1 Hour
resistance rating not more than 1 Hour or; across corridors (With Hose Stream -
where a smoke partition is required Canada)
Table 7 : Fire Ratings – Walls, Doors and Frames
Our products are available with labels from the most recognized certification agencies and
laboratories in North America: Underwriters Laboratories (UL), and Warnock Hersey /
Intertek Testing Services (WHI/ITS).
Fire door and frame product are identified as such only by the presence of a label issued by
the certification angency. Labels are available in a number of materials which include
metal drive riveted, adhesive-backed mylar or for frames, labels embossed (stamped)
directly into the product. Facsimiles of the various labels available from Fleming are
provided on Pages 32 and 33 of the Fire Labeling Specification brochure.
Fire labels are applied only at the factory or a ‘listed’ distributor shop. Distributors eligible
to apply fire labels have been approved by the certification agency under an In-Plant
Labeling Program. These programs have been developed to ensure that the distributor has
the facilities and expertise to assemble and / or modify product in accordance with the
requirements of the agency. Approved distributors are subject to on-going, unannounced
inspections by agency personnel to ensure compliance with the program.
The field application of fire labels, except under the direct supervision of lab inspection
services, is strictly forbidden. A separate program, called a Special Field Inspection (SFI),
is available to rectify problems related to the field labeling of Fleming fire door and frame
product. Please contact the factory for additional information.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
73
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Fleming has been testing fire doors and frame product for over 35 years and has some of
the most extensive and comprehensive listings in North America. The Tables below
provide an over-view summary of our capabilities for fire door frame product.

Assy 3 Hour 1-1/2 Hour 3/4 Hour

Construction Product Gage
Method Singles Pairs Singles Pairs Singles Pairs
12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 SUW 4 x 10 8 x 10 5 x 12 10 x 12 5 x 12 10 x 12
16
14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
KD 4 x 10 8 x 10 4 x 10 8 x 10 4 x 10 8 x 10
Frames 16
6 2 0 2 6 2 0 2 6 2 0 2
SUW 3 x7 6 x7 3 x7 6 x7 3 x7 6 x7
18 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2
KD 3 x7 6 x7 3 x7 6 x7 3 x7 6 x7
6 2 6 2
16 3 x7 0 2 3 x7 0 2
Standard KD-DW - - 0 0 7 x7 0 0 7 x7
18 3 x8 3 x8
Fr – Panel 16 0 0 0 0
SUW - - 4 x8 - 4 x8 -
Above Door 18
12
Transom 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 SUW 4 x 10 8 x 10 5 x 12 10 x 12 5 x 12 10 x 12
Frames
16
Sidelight 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SUW - - 4 x 10 8 x 10 4 x 10 8 x 10
Frames 16
14 SUW 0 0 0 0 0 0
Frames - 8 x 10 - 8 x 10 - 8 x 10
16 KD
Double Transom 14 0 0 0 0
SUW - - - 8 x 10 - 8 x 10
Egress Frames 16
Sidelight 14 0 0
SUW - - - - - 8 x 10
Frames 16
14 SUW 0 0 0 0
Frames - - 2x4 x8 - 2x4 x8 -
16 KD
Contra- Transom 14 0 0 0 0
SUW - - 2x4 x8 - 2x4 x8 -
Swing Frames 16
Sidelight 14 0 0
SUW - - - - 2x4 x8 -
Frames 16
12
0 0 0 0 0 0
14 SUW 4 x 10 - 4 x 10 - 4 x 10 -
Frames 16
Dutch 14 0 0 0 0 0 0
KD 4 x8 - 4 x8 - 4 x8 -
Door 16
12
Transom 0 0 0 0 0 0
14 SUW 4 x 10 - 4 x 10 - 4 x 10 -
Frames
16
14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Frames SUW - - 4x8 8 x8 4 x8 8 x8
Multi- 16
Opening Transom 14 0 0 0 0
SUW - - - - 4 x8 8 x8
Frames 16
14 SUW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A-Series Frames - - 4 x8 8 x8 4 x8 8 x8
16 KD
PRINTED IN CANADA

Table 8 : Maximum Rabbet Opening Sizes for Frame Product

 Page
74
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

(c)
1/3 , 1/2 &
Product Partition Type 2 & 3 Hour 1 & 1-1/2 Hour
3/4 Hour
0 0 0
Transom Drywall 10 ht 12 ht 12 ht
(a) (b) 0 0 0
Frames Other 10 ht 12 ht 12 ht
2
96 ft area 10 4
Drywall - 0 0 12 w x 11 ht
Sidelight 10 w or 10 ht
2
Frames (b) 120 ft area 6 0
Other - 0 0 13 w x 12 ht
12 w or 12 ht
2
96 ft area 10 4
Drywall - 0 0 12 w x 11 ht
Window 10 w or 10 ht
2
Assemblies (b) 120 ft area 6 0
Other - 0 0 13 w x 12 ht
12 w or 12 ht
(a) : Maximum combined door/transom opening height
(b) : “Other” includes masonry, existing masonry, concrete or structural steel
(c) : With or without hose stream test

Table 9 : Maximum Over-All Unit Size for Frame Products

Another area presently under going major changes is the glazing materials industry. Many
new materials have been introduced over the past few years and are available for use in
fire rated transom, sidelight and window assemblies. Table 10 provides a summary of
maximum individual exposed light sizes available. Please refer to Pages 28 to 31 of the
Fire Labeling Specifications for more detailed information.

1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour 1/3 Hour

Listed
2 & 3 Hour 1 & 1-1/2 Hour (With Hose Stream (No Hose Stream
Glazing Material - Canada Only) - US Only)
2
2 5268 in area
1/4” Georgian 1296 in area
- - 110-3/8" w
Wired Glass 54” w or 54” ht
110-3/8" ht
2
2 5268 in area
Specialized 4608 in area
- - 110-3/8" w
Wired Glass 48” w x 96” ht
110-3/8" ht
(c) 2 2
3288 in area 2 2 6272 in area
Laminated or 4990 in area 5605 in area
(b) 94-5/8" w 106-1/2” w
Ceramic Glazing 126" w or 126" ht 96” w or 96” ht
94-5/8" ht 106-1/2” ht
2 (a) 2 2 2
3/8" Thick Cement 3456 in area 3456 in area 3456 in area 3456 in area
Board Panels 96” w x 54” ht 96” w x 54” ht 96” w x 54” ht 96” w x 54” ht
2 2
1/2" Thick Gypsum - 1296 in area 1296 in area
-
Board Panels 54" w or 54" ht 54" w or 54" ht
1-3/4" Honeycomb or 2 2 2 2
5760 in area 5760 in area 5760 in area 5760 in area
Vertically Stiffened
48” w x 120” ht 48” w x 120” ht 48” w x 120” ht 48” w x 120” ht
Panels
(a) : Available in Transom Frames only
(b) : Maximum sizes for each rating, not the same material for each
(c) : 2 Hour rating maximum

Table 10 : Maximum Individual Exposed Light Sizes – Transoms, Sidelight and Window Frames
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
75
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

INSTALLATION
The final area to be covered in this section is that of frame installation. Fleming, as you
have seen from the previous pages, manufactures 6 basic series of frame product : F, DE,
MN, ST, DW and A-Series. The F-Series are available as knocked-down or welded
product. DE, MN and ST-Series frames are all set-up and welded. Our DW-Series is a
knocked-down slip-on drywall application. The A-Series is a special knocked-down slip-on
drywall application which can be converted to welded construction.

Installation methods and sequence varies with the construction of the frame and wall type.

F, DE, MN AND ST-SERIES WELDED AND F-SERIES KNOCKED-DOWN FRAMES

Welded and knocked-down frames are set in place with the wall being constructed around
them.

For knocked-down frames start at Step 1, welded frames at Step 2.

1. Assemble Frame
a) Insert jamb corner clip tabs into 4 slots at each end of head
b) Ensure that face miters on jambs and heads are tight and corners are square
c) Bend the tabs at each head rabbet slot downwards away from the door opening and
the tabs at each head return slot downwards towards the throat opening

Figure 91 : KD Corner Assembly

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
76
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

2. Remove Temporary Spreaders

a) Welded frames are provided with temporary steel spreaders to maintain alignment and
minimize other damage during shipping and handling. They are not intended to be
used during the installation and must be removed.

Figure 92 : Temporary Shipping Spreaders

For new unit masonry or steel stud partitions proceed to Step 3.

For wood stud partitions go to Step 7.
For existing unit masonry or poured concrete walls proceed to Step 8.

3. Place and Anchor to Floor

a) Stand frame in position
b) Place a wooden spreader between the jambs at the floor. The spreader must be
square, at least 1” thick, almost as wide as the frame jamb depth with clearance
notches at each end for the frame stops/soffits

Figure 93 : Wooden Spreaders

c) Level the frame head, placing shims under the jamb floor anchors as necessary
d) Adjust frame for alignment and twist. Rabbets must be parallel
e) Fasten jambs to the floor through the floor anchors

Figure 94 : Floor Anchor

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
77
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

4. Set Frame
a) Brace the frame as shown. Do not brace in the direction of the adjacent wall
b) Install a second wooden spreader at the mid-height of the frame to maintain correct
frame rabbet width and to prevent bowing of the jambs

Figure 95 : Braced Frame

5. New Unit Masonry Wall Anchorage

a) As the wall is laid up, embed wire or masonry fire anchors in mortar coursing
immediately above or below each hinge and directly opposite on the strike jambs
b) Although not mandatory, even for fire-rated frames, grouting of the jambs is
recommended in all units to ensure a more secure and stable installation

Figure 96 : Masonry Wire Anchor Installation

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
78
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

6. Steel Stud Partition Anchorage

a) Where loose combination stud anchors are provided, install in frame throat opening
directly above or below each hinge reinforcing and immediately opposite on the strike
jamb
b) Remove or bend legs of combination stud anchors back inside the frame profile

Figure 97 : Combination Stud Anchor

c) Place and secure floor and ceiling steel runners

d) Place, plumb and secure the first vertical steel studs inside the floor and ceiling runners
with stud fitting snug against the wall anchors in each jamb. The open webs of the first
studs should be facing away from the frame
e) With standard 1/2” long pan head sheet metal screws, secure studs to each anchor
f) Check plumb and square of frame, alignment and twist of jambs
g) Place and secure a second vertical steel stud inside the floor and ceiling runners with
stud returns abutting the first steel stud returns
h) Install and secure steel lintel runners at the head of the frame

Figure 98 : Securing Steel Studs and Anchors

PRINTED IN CANADA

7. Wood Stud Partition Anchorage

 Page
79
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

Wood stud partitions are constructed prior to the installation of the frame in a method
called ‘tilt-up construction’. The wall, complete with rough openings for frames, is built
flat on the floor and then stood or tilted-up into position. Double studs should be used
at all jambs with solid blocking at both sides of the framed opening.
a) The rough stud opening width should be 1/2” greater than the over-all frame width
b) The rough stud opening height should be 1/4” greater than the over-all frame height

Figure 99 : Wood Rough Stud Opening

c) Install and secure optional adjustable floor anchors to the floor anchor straps with the
floor legs extending into the frame rabbet opening

Figure 100 : Adjustable Floor Anchor

d) Where loose combination stud anchors are provided, install in frame throat opening,
directly above or below each hinge reinforcing and immediately opposite on the strike
jamb, with the anchor legs bent outwards, parallel to the finished wall

Figure 101 : Combination Stud Anchor

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
80
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

e) Set the assembled frame, centered in the rough stud opening width, with the wall
anchors wrapping the faces of the jamb studs
f) Place a wooden spreader between the jambs at the bottom of the frame. See Step 3b
for additional information on the wooden spreaders
g) Level the frame head, placing shims under the floor anchors as necessary
h) Adjust the frame for alignment and twist. Rabbets must be parallel

Figure 102 : Frame in Wood Stud Partition

i) Fasten jamb to floor through the floor anchors

j) Install a second wooden spreader at the mid-height of the frame to maintain correct
rabbet width and to prevent the bowing of the jambs
k) Plumb and square frame
l) Secure frame to studs with 4 nails per anchor
m) Check plumb and square of frame, alignment and twist of jambs

Figure 103 : Anchors for Wood Stud Partitions

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
81
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

8. Existing Masonry or Poured Concrete Wall Anchorage

a) Set the assembled frame centered in the completed opening
b) Place wooden spreaders between the jambs at the floor and at mid-height of the frame
c) Level the head by placing shims under the jambs as necessary
d) Adjust the frame for plumb, square, alignment and twist. Rabbets must be parallel
e) Mark the wall through the dimpled holes in each jamb soffit to locate the anchor points
f) Drill the wall for 1/4” diameter anchor bolts in non-rated frames or 3/8” diameter anchor
bolts for rated product, at the marks
g) Install sleeve or expansion shell anchors in the wall holes
h) Insert anchor bolts through the dimpled holes into the wall sleeve anchors
i) Place shims snugly between the frame and the wall above each anchor bolt
j) Tighten bolts, checking plumb, square, alignment and twist

Figure 104 : Existing Wall Anchors

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
82
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

DW-SERIES KNOCKED-DOWN SLIP-ON DRYWALL FRAMES

These frames, our DW-Series, are installed by slipping the components over the completed
partition.

1. Size Opening
a) Install double steel or wood studs at all jambs. See Figure 105 for recommended
practice at head and jamb stud intersections.

Figure 105 : Head and Jamb Stud Intersection

It is important to ensure that the rough stud openings for double rabbet profiles are
sized as follows:
Rough stud opening width (RSOW) = rabbet width + 1-7/8”
Rough stud opening height (RSOH) = rabbet height + 3/4”
b) For cased open drywall profiles (CODW), RSOW = rabbet width + 2-3/4” and RSOH =
rabbet height + 1-3/8”
c) The tolerances are + 1/4”/ - 0” on RSOW and RSOH for all DW and CODW-Series
frames

Figure 106 : Rough Stud Openings

PRINTED IN CANADA

2. Install Head
 Page
83
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

a) For fire rated pairs only, install snap-in anchors in each face at the center line of the
head. See Figure 108 for installation of anchors
b) Slide head into position in the center of the rough stud opening. Wedges may be used
to temporarily hold the head in position

Figure 107 : Head Installation

3. Install Hinge Jamb

a) If optional snap-in anchors are to be used to secure the base of the frame to the stud
sill plates / runners, install in each face at the bottom of the jamb. The drywall does not
need to be notched.

Figure 108 : Snap-In Anchor Installation

b) Retract the tension anchor at the top of the jamb by turning the screw clock-wise

Figure 109 : Adjusting Tension Anchor

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
84
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

c) Insert the integral soffit tab on the jamb and tabs on the corner clip into the slots in the
head. Pivot the jamb into place over the wall

Figure 110 : Install Hinge Jamb

4. Install Strike (or 2nd Hinge) Jamb

a) For fire rated singles only, install a snap-in anchor in each face of the strike jamb
immediately above the strike reinforcing
b) Repeat Steps 3a through 3c

Figure 111 : Install Strike Jamb

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
85
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

5. Anchor Frame
a) Place a temporary wooden spreader between the jambs at the floor to ensure the
correct frame rabbet width at the base of the frame. The spreader must be square, at
least 1” thick, almost as wide as the frame jamb depth with clearance notches at each
end for the stop/soffits.
b) Shim the bottom of the jambs to the same elevation so that the head is level
c) Secure the bottom of the frame through the dimpled holes at the base of each jamb
with standard drywall screws into the sill plate / runner. If the optional snap-in anchors
are used, secure to the sill plate / runner with 2 standard # 8 x 1-1/4” drywall screws
per anchor. Both jambs rabbets must be parallel

Figure 112 : Anchor Frame

6. Set Frame
a) Plumb and square-up the frame by adjusting the tension anchors at the top of each
jamb, ensuring that they press tightly against the studs

Figure 113 : Plumb and Square Frame

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
86
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

b) On fire rated frames, secure the snap-in anchors at the strike jamb or head to studs
with 2 standard drywall screws per anchor
c) Bend over the corner clip tabs at the head slots, over towards the wall
d) Remove the temporary wooden spreader

Figure 114 : Bend Tabs at Head

A-SERIES ADJUSTABLE KNOCKED-DOWN DRYWALL FRAMES

Our A-Series (adjustable jamb depth) frames are designed for wrap applications in existing
partitions. They can be used in unit masonry, concrete and steel or wood stud and drywall
locations. A-Series frames, like our DW-Series, slip over the completed wall.

1. Size Opening
a) It is imperative that the rough opening sizes are as follows:
Rough opening width (ROW) = rabbet width + 1-5/8”
Rough opening height (ROH) = rabbet height + 13/16”
b) The tolerances are + 1/4” / - 0 for both ROW and ROH

Figure 115 : Rough Opening Sizing

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
87
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

2. Set Frame Throat Opening

a) Adjust each jamb and head to suit the measured wall thickness
b) Tighten all adjustable sliding assembly screws. Failure to do so may create installation
and operational problems and will void the warranty

Figure 116 : Adjustable Sliding Assembly

3. Install Head
a) Slide the head into position in the center of the rough opening width. Wedges may be
used to temporarily hold the head in position

Figure 117 : Head Installation

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
88
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

4. Install Hinge Jamb

a) Insert the tabs on the jamb corner clips into the slots in the head
b) Pivot the jamb into place over the wall

Figure 118 : Install Hinge Jamb

c) Jamb corner clip tabs should protrude through the slots in the head rabbets and returns

Figure 119 : Corner Clips at Head

5. Install Strike (or 2nd Hinge) Jamb

a) Repeat Steps 4a through 4c
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 120 : Install Strike Jamb

 Page
89
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

6. Set Frame
a) Center the head in the rough opening width
b) Bend the corner clip tabs extending through the head returns down towards the throat
opening to tighten the miters

Figure 121 : Securing Miter

c) Place a temporary wooden spreader between the jambs at the floor to ensure the
correct frame rabbet width at the base of the frame. The spreader must be square, at
least 1” thick, almost as wide as the frame jamb depth with clearance notches at each
end for the stop/soffits.
d) Shim the bottom of the jambs to the same elevation so that the head will be level
e) Plumb and square the frame in the opening. Adjust for alignment and twist
f) Install a second wooden spreader at the mid-height of the frame to maintain the correct
frame rabbet width and to prevent bowing of the jambs

Figure 122 : Temporary Wooden Spreaders

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
90
STEEL DOOR FRAMES Date
Mar ‘05

7. Anchor Frame
a) Screw fix the head to the wall through the dimpled holes in each face. (4 per single, 6
per double)
b) Anchor each jamb to the wall through the dimpled holes in each face. For drywall
partitions use #8 x 2-1/4” drywall screws. For masonry or concrete walls use 3/16”
diameter x 2-1/4” flat head Tapcon screws
c) Remove the temporary wooden spreaders and re-check plumb, square, alignment and
twist

Figure 123 : Wall Anchors

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
91
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

CONSTRUCTION
Hollow metal doors fall into two basic design categories : vertically stiffened and lock seam
construction. Both types are considered as “full flush doors”, that is they have no seams
on their faces. They are available in various gauges and with numerous options to suit
specific design requirements.

Lock seam doors are designed for most commercial applications. They can be
manufactured with 16, 18 or 20 gage steel face sheets and utilize a core of kraft paper
honeycomb. As an option for exterior doors, polystyrene or polyisocyanurate cores are
also available. The vertical edge seams on lock seam doors are exposed, adhesive
reinforced, sealed and mechanically interlocked. Fleming D and E-Series are both lock
seam construction doors.
16, 18 or 20 Gage Honeycomb, Polystyrene or
Steel Face Sheets Polyisocyanurate Core

Adhesive Reinforced,
Sealed, Mechanically
Interlocked Exposed
Edge Seams

Figure 124 : Lock Seam Door Construction

Vertically stiffened doors are designed specifically for openings subjected to extremes in
abuse, frequency of use or for commercial security applications. They are generally
manufactured with 16 gage steel face sheets and have fully welded vertical edge seams.
The cores are constructed from 20 gage interlocking steel vertical stiffeners spaced 6”
apart and welded to each face sheet at 6” on center. The spaces between the stiffeners
are filled with fiberglass batt insulation. Fleming H-Series are vertically stiffened doors.
1½ lb Density Adhesive
Fiberglass Batt Reinforced
Insulation

Fully Welded Vertical

Edge Seams Stiffeners

Figure 125 : Vertically Stiffened Door Construction

PRINTED IN CANADA

The specifics of our H, D and E-Series doors will covered in more detail later on.
 Page
92
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

TERMINOLOGY
As with frame product, terminology has evolved over the years to describe different
elements and components of doors and their construction.

All hollow metal doors are fabricated from two sheets of steel formed to create the faces
and edges of the finished product. The most basic terms are the door front and the door
back Fleming uses the terms “front” and “back” which relate to the direction that the door
operates and is not dependent on the egdes, swing of the door or handing of the builders
hardware. Using the definitions and Figure 126 below, there is never any confusion.

Front The pull side of a door.

Back The push side of a door.

Door Back

Door Front

Figure 126 : Door Front and Back

Figure 127 on the following page and the terms listed below, define the other elements of
the door.

Hinge Edge The vertical portion of a door in which the hinges are usually mortised.

Lock Edge The vertical portion of a door in which the lock or latching device is
mortised or mounted.

Head The top edge of a door.

Sill The bottom edge of a door.

Hinge Stile The vertical faces of a door at the hinged side.

Lock Stile The vertical faces of the door at the latching side.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
93
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Top Rail The horizontal face of a door above a glass light.

Bottom Rail The horizontal face of a door below the lowest glass light, panel or
louver.

Center Rail The horizontal face of a door between two glass lights, panels or a glass
light and a louver.

Head

Top Rail

Hinge Stile

Lock Stile

Hinge Edge

Center Rail

Lock Edge

Bottom Rail

Sill
Figure 127 : Door Terminology
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
94
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

FEATURES

Fleming doors, regardless of construction, utilize common features, componentry and

have available, for the most part, the same options.

The Figures on the next few pages illustrate the standard door head, sill, edge
configurations, along with several of the more common options available.

Heads of doors can be treated in several ways. Interior doors are typically provided as
Fleming’s standard, shown in Figure 128. For exterior doors, the top of the door can be
closed with either a galvanneal or vinyl snap-in top cap as illustrated in Figure 129.

Figure 128 : Standard Head Detail

Figure 129 : Optional Exterior Head Details

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
95
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

In certain instances the top must be closed off with an inverted channel, recessed inside
and tack-welded to the end channel as shown in Figure 130. When rabbetted panels are
used, the top of the door is provided with a mating top cap as shown in Figure 131.

Figure 130 : Optional Tack-Welded Top Cap Figure 131 : Optional Rabbetted Top Cap

Sills of hollow metal doors are supplied standard with 16 gage galvanneal, extra deep end
channels as shown in Figure 132. For exterior applications, a 16 gage galvanneal inverted
channel, as shown in Figure 133 can be tack-welded inside the end channel.

Figure 132 : Standard Door Sill Figure 133 : Optional Welded Bottom Cap
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
96
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Lock and hinge edge conditions are dependent on the door Series.

D and E-Series are both lock-seam construction products with deep pocket, adhesive
reinforced and sealed, exposed mechanically interlocked edge seams.

Figure 134 : Standard D and E-Series Door Hinge and Lock Edge

The H-Series utilizes a continuously welded construction which yeilds a door with no
visible edge seams as shown in Figure 135.

Figure 135 : Standard H-Series Door Hinge and Lock Edge

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
97
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

In pairs of doors where the lock edges come together is called the meeting edge. Meeting
edges can be handled in several ways.

The standard for non-labelled pairs is to provide two beveled doors, which presents a 1/8”
(nominal) gap between them as illustrated in Figure 136 for D and E-Series doors.
H-Series are similar.

Figure 136 : Standard Meeting Edge : Non-Labeled Pairs

For fire rated pairs, three options are available. The most common option for D and
E-Series doors, is a flat bar astragal screw fixed to the front of the active leaf, as shown in
Figure 137. With certain hardware the astragal is screw fixed to the back of the inactive
leaf.

Figure 137 : Flat Bar Astragal

The second option for labelled pairs of D and E-Series doors is a “Z” astragal which is
screw fixed to the edge of the inactive leaf. Two types of “Z” astragals are available; one
with cutouts to clear door mounted lock or strike reinforcings, the other with integral lock or
strike reinforcings. Figure 138 provides a detail of an installed “Z” astragal.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 138 : Z Astragal

 Page
98
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 139 illustrates a “Z” astragal with integral ASA strike and flush bolt reinforcings and
Figure 140 the “Z” astragal with cut-outs to clear door mounted hardware.

Figure 139 Figure 140

Z Astragal with Z Astragal for
Integral Hardware Reinforcings Door Mounted Hardware

All astragals are shipped loose to the job site for installation by the contractor, after the
doors are hung.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
99
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

The third option is used when it is necessary to have no astragal at all. This option is
available only for pairs of fire doors up to 8’0” height and to 1-1/2 hour rating maximum. In
this situation, the astragal may be ommitted when the lock edge seams of each door are
tack-welded immediately above and below each hardware cutout and at 6” on center
maximum. Because H-Series doors are already a fully welded edge seam door, this can
be used as the standard for them. For D and E-Series doors, Figure 141 illustrates the
requirements.

Figure 141 : Tack-Welded Lock Edge Seam for

Fire Rated Pair Without Astragal
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
100
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

DOOR TYPES
Hollow metal doors manufactured by Fleming are all considered “flush doors”. That is,
they are fabricated without any seams in the faces of the door.

Another construction utilized by some door manufacturers is called “stile and rail”. The
hinge and lock stiles, top, bottom and center rails are fabricated from 16 gage steel tubing
and the openings created are filled with 18 gage steel panels or glazing materials. Butt
joints on the faces at the vertical stiles and horizontal rails are left exposed.

For Fleming doors with glass lites (or louvers), there are 4 options available to the
distributor.

Lited doors can be order as finished product. The required cut-outs, trim and snap-in
glazing stops are all done at the factory.

They can also be ordered as “cut-out only”. The factory provides only the cut-out in the
door skins. The trim and snap-in stops are added at the distributor’s shop.

A variation on the “cut-out only” option is “bridged cut-out”. In this case the skins are
factory pre-punched for the lite except for 1/2” tabs at 4 sides. The distributor cuts the
tabs and installs the trim and stops in their shop.

The final option, available on lock seam doors only, is for the distributor to order a non-
lited or slab door. The cut-out operation and the trim and stop installation are done
entirely at their facilities.

Fleming’s snap-in glazing stops and trim are available for all standard door types detailed
on the following pages. Figure 142 illustrates a section through our standard trim. Non-
standard door types, lite sizes and glazing trims to suit single and double glazed units are
available.

Figure 142 : Snap-In Steel Glazing Trim

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
101
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Fleming manufactures standard door types to suit most commercial applications. The
illustrations below detail the various light sizes and locations for standard door types.
Except for those specifically noted for the E-Series, all door types are available for all
Fleming door series.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 143 : Standard Door Types

 Page
102
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 144 : Standard Door Types Continued

 Page
103
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 145 : Standard Door Types Contrinued

 Page
104
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 146 : Standard Door Types Continued

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
105
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

HARDWARE
LOCATIONS

Fleming utilizes industry recognized standard hardware locations for all door series. The
illustration below in Figure 147 details the locations for hinges in Fleming doors up to 7’2”
nominal height. These doors are prepared for 1-1/2 pairs of 4-1/2” standard weight hinges
with the top and bottom hinges located equally from the top and bottom of the door. This
feature permits “blank” doors to be used as either left or right hand swing by simply turning
the door upside-down. Doors over 7’2” and up to 10’0” nominal height are prepared for 2
pairs of 4-1/2” standard weight hinges. The locations of the top and bottom hinge cutouts
are standard for all door heights.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 147 : Standard Hinge Locations

 Page
106
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

The locations of hardware preparations on the lock edge of the door are shown in Figures
148 through 153. These details provide the relationship between preparation in the strike
jamb or the opposing door in pairs and the lock in the door.

Figure 148 : Cylindrical Lock (161)

Figure 149 : Mortise Lock (86ED)

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
107
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 150 : Cylindrical (Tubular) Deadlock

Figure 151 : Cylindrical Lock (161) X Cylindrical (Tubular) Deadlock

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
108
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 152 : Cylindrical Lock (161) X ASA Strike x Flush Bolt Pair

Figure 153 : Mortise Lock (86ED) x ASA Strike x Flush Bolt Pair
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
109
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

Doors must be provided to the job site with reinforcings appropriate to the hardware
specified for them. The details in Figures 154 through 158 illustrate Fleming standards for
typically specified finished doors. These standards apply to all Fleming door series.

Cylindrical lock doors are prepared and reinforced for the ANSI 161 lock and face
cutouts, surface closers and 4-1/2” hinges.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 154 : Cylindrical Lock Door

 Page
110
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

86ED or mortise lock doors are provided with an 8” x 1-1/4” lock edge cutout and are
reinforced for mortise locks at the lock edge. In addition, a plate reinforcing is provided in
the hinge stile in the back or push side of the door for mortise panic or fire exit hardware.
Surface closer reinforcing and 4-1/2” hinge reinforcings are provided standard in these
doors.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 155 : 86ED (Mortise Lock) Door

 Page
111
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Blank doors are probably the most versitile standard door available. A 16 gage channel
in the lock stile provides reinforcing for distributor prepared mortise locks. The 16 gage
plate reinfocing in the door back, at the hinge stile, allows for the mounting of mortise or
rim exit hardware. The 16 gage reinforcings provided in the door back (push side) at the
top and bottom of the lock stile, are utilized for surface vertical rod exit devices. The blank
door can also be used in a simple “push/pull” application.

Blank doors are prepared for 4-1/2” hinges and have closer reinforcings in both the top
and bottom of the door.

Because the lock stile reinforcing channel and hinge stile reinforcing plate are centered on
the actual door height and the hinge cutouts are located at the same distance from the top
and bottom, blank doors are reversible. They can be used for both right and left hand
applications.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 156 : Blank Door

 Page
112
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

ASA strike doors are used as the inactive leaf in a pair of doors. They are prepared and
reinforced to the ANSI standard for 1-1/4” x 4-7/8” lipped strikes to suit cylindrical and
mortise locks. The strike is centered at 39-9/16” from the bottom of the door, which for
6’8” doors is the mid height location. This makes 6’8” doors with the ASA prep reversible
and these doors are provided with closer reinforcing in the top and bottom of the door. All
other height doors receive closer reinfrocing at the top only.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 157 : ASA Strike Door

 Page
113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

ASA x flush bolt doors are also used as the inactive leaf in a pair application. The ASA
strike prep and reinforings are identical to those in the ASA door. The flush bolt edge
preparations and reinforcings comply with the ANSI standards for 6-3/4” x 1” mortise bolts.
Only 6’8” doors are reversible and they receive closer reinforcing channels in the top and
bottom. All other height doors are provided with top closer reinforcings.

Figure 158 : ASA Strike x Flush Bolt Door

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
114
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

REINFORCINGS AND PREPARATIONS

Figures 159 to 164 provide details of the specific hardware reinforcements and their
preparations indicated on the previous pages. They are typical for all Fleming door series.

High frequency hinge reinforcings, shown in Figure 159, are provided at all hinge
cutouts as a Fleming standard. The 4-1/2” standard weight hinge reinforcing provided on
all Fleming door product contains 4 raised donuts which can be drilled out by the
distributor to convert to a heavy weight application.

Fleming can also provide reinforcings for non-standard hinge leaf thickness, 5” hinges,
anchor hinges, pivots, continuous and other specialized type hinges.

The detail below depicts lock-seam D or E-Series doors and the vertically stiffened H-
Series preparations and reinforcings are identical.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 159 : High Frequency Hinge Reinforcing

 Page
115
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

End channels and integral closer reinforcing channels are provided standard at the
top of all Fleming doors. All standard reversible doors are also provided with the integral
closer reinforcing channel in the bottom of the door.

Figure 160 illustrates these components for our D and H-Series non-lited and lited doors,
as well as for the 6 panel, embossed face sheet E-Series.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 160 : Standard End Channel and Integral Closer Reinforcing

 Page
116
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Cylindrical lock (161) preparations and reinforcings are the most common lock stile/edge
option provided for commercial hollow metal doors.

The illustration in Figure 161 shows the standard ANSI preparation and our 1-piece
reinforcing unit provided when either a 161 or cylindrical (tubular) deadlock are specified
together or seperately.

D and E-Series Doors H-Series Doors

Figure 161 : Cylindrical (161) Locks and Cylindrical (Tubular) Deadlocks

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
117
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Mortise locks, also called the “86ED” preparation, is also available on all Fleming door
series as a lock edge option. This 16 gage galvanneal box reinforcing is provided with
intergal lock centering clips and is ready for the distributor or site preparation of the
required lock function holes.

Figure 162 details the standard prepartion and reinforcing unit provided. As an additional
option the factory can pre-punch door skins and reinforcing for the specified lock function.

Figure 162 : Mortise (86ED) Lock

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
118
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

ASA and ASANL strikes are provided on the inactive leaf of pairs of doors. The ASA
strike is used with cylindrical and mortise locks where as the ASANL (no lip) strike is
supplied for cylindrical deadlocks. In both instances the identical reinforcings are
provided. The preparation in the door and the height off the floor are different.

Figure 163 illustrates the differences for the two strikes.

Figure 163 : ASA and ASANL Strikes

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
119
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Flush bolt preparations and reinforcings are also provided for the inactive leaf in pairs of
doors. Used in conjunction with ASA strikes they provide a latching mechanism into the
head of the frame and floor. The edge reinforcings are 12 gage galvanneal and the
top/bottom of door reinforcings are 10 gage. The preparations and reinforcings are
provided at both the top and bottom of the door.

Figure 164 shows the component parts and cutouts provided as an option from the factory
and the requirements if added by the distributor shop.

Figure 164 : ASA Flush Bolts

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
120
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

FLEMING DOOR SERIES

Having reviewed the terminology, door types, hardware locations, applications,
preparations and reinfrocings provided in Fleming doors, we can look at the details of the
three basic door series offered. As was discussed at the start of this section, there are two
basic constructions of doors: lock seam and vertically stiffened.

D-SERIES

The Fleming D-Series door is a lock seam construction product designed for all but the
most extreme commercial applications. It provides the most versitile construction and the
widest variety of options.

Three gages of face sheet are available : 16, 18 and 20 all with a kraft paper honeycomb
core standard. Available as an option for exterior applications are polystrene or
polyisocyanurate insulated cores. The D-Series are available in singles, pairs, double
egress and contra-swing configurations. From a fire rating standpoint, singles up to 4’0” x
10’0”, simple pairs and double egress units up to 8’0” x 10’0” at 3 hours are available.

With a specialized core, fire doors with temperature rise ratings up to 250ºF at 1/2 hour for
3 hour fire protection ratings are available in our TRR-Series doors.

The standard features of this Series are :

• 16, 18 or 20 gage galvanneal face sheets, 1¾" thick

• Face sheets and all components fabricated from galvanneal steel
• All hinge locations provided with projection welded Fleming 10 gage high
frequency 4½" hinge reinforcings (see Figure 159, Page 114)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• Projection welded, 1½" extra deep, 16 gage end channels with integral 14 gage,
4½" deep closer reinforcing channel (see Figure 160, Page 115)
• Integral closer reinforcing provided in top and bottom of all reversible doors
• Small cell kraft paper honey comb core laminated to face sheets under pressure
with PUR contact adhesive
• Longitudinal edges interlocked with deep pocket mechanical seam, sealed and
reinforced with resin reinforced polyvinyl chloride (RRPC) adhesive (see Figure
134, Page 96)
• Edges beveled 1/8" in 2"
• Cylindrical lock (161) reinforcing, face and edge cutouts for 2¾" back set (see
Figure 161, Page 116)
• Available in standard widths and heights.

On the following page, Figure 165 details the D-Series door, its’ features and the standard
sizes available.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
121
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 165 : Standard D-Series Door Details and Sizes

 Page
122
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

E-SERIES

The E-Series is a 6 panel, embossed face sheet, lock-seam, commercial quality door.
Utilizing the identical construction and componentry as the D-Series, this door is also
appropriate to most commercial applications.

The E-Series is available in either 18 or 20 gage galvanneal face sheets and has a solid
slab of polystyrene as its’ core.

This series is eligible for fire rating up to 3’8” x 7’0” singles and 7’4” x 7’0” pairs to 1-1/2
hour.

Lite cutouts are limited to type ‘G’ (half lite) and a ‘NL1’ at 9-1/4” width x 37-1/4” height
because of the face sheet embossing.

E-Series doors have the same features as our D-Series :

• 18 or 20 gage galvanneal face sheets, 1¾" thick, 6 panel embossed commercial

door
• Face sheets and all components fabricated from galvanneal steel
• All hinge locations provided with projection welded Fleming 10 gage high
frequency 4½" hinge reinforcings (see Figure 159, Page 114)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• Projection welded, 1½" extra deep, 16 gage end channels with integral 14 gage,
4½" deep closer reinforcing channel (see Figure 160, Page 115)
• Integral closer reinforcing provided in top of all doors
• Solid slab of polystyrene (R 6.0) core laminated to face sheets under pressure with
PUR contact adhesive
• Longitudinal edges interlocked with deep pocket mechanical seam, sealed and
reinforced with resin reinforced polyvinyl chloride (RRPC) adhesive (see Figure
134, Page 96)
• Edges beveled 1/8" in 2"
• Cylindrical lock (161) reinforcing, face and edge cutouts for 2¾" back set (see
Figure 161, Page 116)
• Available in standard widths and heights

Figure 166 on the next page, details the standard and dimensional features together with
the sizes available for the E-Series door.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
123
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 166: Standard E-Series Door Details and Sizes

 Page
124
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

H-SERIES

The H-Series is our vertically stiffened door. It is designed specifically for openings
subjected to extremes in abuse and frequency and where security applications in
commercial construction are required.

The H-Series door is eligible for fire ratings up to and including 4’0” x 10’0” singles, 8’0” x
10’0” pairs and double egress pairs to 3 hour, with all listed hardware, 5'0" x 12'0" singles
and 10'0" x 12'0" pairs to 1-1/2 hour with listed 3/4" throw mortise locks.

The standard fetures of the H-Series door are:

• 14 or 16 gage galvanneal face sheets, 1¾" thick

• Face sheets and all components fabricated from galvanneal steel
• All hinge locations provided with projection welded Fleming 10 gage high
frequency 4½" hinge reinforcings (see Figure 159, Page 114)
• All hinge reinforcings dimpled to convert from standard to heavy weight
• Projection welded, 1½" extra deep, 16 gage end channels with integral 14 gage,
4½" deep closer reinforcing channel (see Figure 160, Page 115)
• Integral closer reinforcing provided in top and bottom of all reversible doors
• 20 gage galvanneal vertical interlocking stiffeners at 6" on center, spot welded to
each face sheet at 6" on center with voids between stiffeners filled with loose batt
type fiberglass insulation
• Longitudinal edges continuously welded the full height of the door, filled and
ground smooth with no visible seams (see Figure 135, Page 96)
• Edges beveled 1/8" in 2"
• Cylindrical lock (161) reinforcing, face and edge cutouts for 2¾" back set (see
Figure 161, Page 116)
• Available in standard widths and heights.

Figure 167 on the next page will provide you with illustrations of the standard H-Series
door together with standard size information.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
125
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 167 : Standard H-Series Door Details and Sizes

 Page
126
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

The previous pages in this section have covered our three basic doors : H, D and E-
Series. Fleming also manufactures several specialized constructions for stainless steel,
acoustic and detention security applications which are beyond the scope of this
publication. For information on these products, please contact the factory directly.

PRODUCT SELECTION AND APPLICATION

To assist in the selection of the appropriate Series and Gage of door product for various
openings in different types of buildings, the two charts below, in Tables 12 and 13, are
provided. Table 12 outlines Fleming’s Series-Gage combinations by size, door type and
classifies them in categories ranging from standard to extra-heavy duty. Table 13
classifies building types and their openings by their expected exposure to abuse and
frequency of use for the same categories.

S = Standard Duty
Flush (M), View (V) Multi-Narrow (2NL)
M = Medium Duty Narrow (NL) or Half (G) Multi-Half (2G) or
H = Heavy Duty Lite Doors Full (FG) Lite Doors
X = Extra Heavy Duty
0 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0
SWF Series-Gage 3 x7 4 x8 4 x 10 3 x7 4 x8 4 x 10
(1)
E20 M - - - - -
(1)
E18 H - - - - -
D20 M - - S - -
D18 H H M H M S
D16 X H H X H M
H16 X X X X H M
H14 X X X X H M
(1) : 7’0” maximum door height

Table 12: Fleming Door Series-Gage Classifications

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
127
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

Table 13: Building / Opening Type Classifications

LEGEND Opening Types
S = Standard Duty
M = Medium Duty
H = Heavy Duty
X = Extra Heavy Duty

Building Types
Arena H M H H H M M M M M M
Art Gallery H S M M S S S M M M
Bank H M M M S S S S
Club M S M M S S S M S M M M
Convalescent Home M S M M M S S H M M M S
Department Store H S M M S M S M S S
Home for the Aged M S M M M S S H M M M M S
Hotel H S M M S S S H S M M M
Motel M S M M S S S M
Office M S M M S S S M S S
Restaurant H S M M M S H S S
Studio (TV, Radio) M S M M S S S S S S
Theater H M M M S S S S
Factory M S M M M S M M S M M
Filtration Plant H M H H M M H M M
Generating Station M M M M M M M M M
Laboratory M S M M S S M M S S S
Parking Garage H M M S S
Sewage Treatment Plant H M H H M M H M M
Warehouse M S M M S S M S M
Workshop/Hanger M S M M M S M M S M
Community College X H H H H M H M M M H H H
Hospital H M H M M M M H H M M M M M M
Jail H H H H H H
Library H S M M S S S S M M
Military H H H H M M S H M H H H H
Museum H S M M S S S M M M
Penitentiary X X X X X X H H H X X
Police Station H H X X X H H H H H H H
Reformatory X X X X X X H H H X X
PRINTED IN CANADA

School X H H H H M H M M M H H H
University X H H H H M H M M M H H H
 Page
128
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

From a specification standpoint, an Architect may require compliance with SDI-100 for
doors on their projects. SDI-100 is a ‘standard specification’ published by the Steel Door
Institute. The current edition, released as SDI-100/ANSI A250.8-03, is a Level and Model
type specification, versus a Level and Design one. For the Table below, from the '03 to the
'98 edition, nothing has changed. We have summarized ANSI A250.8-03 / A250.8-98, and
their predecessor, ANSI/SDI A250.8-91 below in Table 14, together with the Fleming
equivalents.

There have been changes made with each edition of SDI-100 since 1985, and earlier ones
do not line up with the current requirements. Please contact Technical Services for
assistance when SDI-100-91 or earlier is specified.

In addition to the “Level" and "Model”, when utilizing SDI-100/ANSI A250.8-03 /' A250.8-98,
users must also specify which core is to be included for a complete project specification.

Project specifications may contradict the requirements indicated below. Always refer to
Part 2 - Products, in the project specification for clarification.

SDI FLEMING
ANSI A250.8-03 Add for
ANSI/SDI-100-91 Edge
and ANSI A250.8-98 Cycles Seam
Gage Seam Thickness Series
(*1) Filled
Level Model Duty Grade Model Duty (*2)
Req’d
1-3/8” D20-8
1 1 Flush No
1-3/4” D20-4
1 Standard I Standard 250,000 20
1-3/8” D20-8
2 2 Seamless Yes
1-3/4” D20-4
1 1 Flush No
2 Heavy II Heavy 500,000 18 1-3/4” D18-4
2 2 Seamless Yes
1 1 Flush No
Extra 16 D16-4
3 2 2 Yes
Heavy Extra Seamless
3 III 3 1,000,000 18 1-3/4” H16-4
Heavy
1 1A Flush No (*3)
4 Maximum 14 H14-4
2 2A Seamless

Notes:
*1 : Test procedure in accordance with ANSI A250.4 (formerly ANSI A151.1)
*2 : Flush refers to exposed edge seams
Seamless refers to unexposed edge seams, either body filled only, tack-welded and body filled or
continuously welded
*3 : Continuously welded edge seam included standard in Fleming H-Series construction

Table 14: ANSI A250.8 (SDI-100) versus Fleming Doors

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
129
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

HOLLOW METAL FIRE DOORS

A general over-view of fire doors, frames, their testing and governing standards has already
been provided starting on Page 71 of the Frame Section.
The Tables which appear on the next few pages serve to provide you with a summary of
our capabilities for hollow metal fire doors. As with the Frame Product, this is not an in-
depth covering of the subject and when additional detail and specifics are required, refer to
the Fleming Fire Labeling Specifications brochure included in the last section of the
manual.
Series 2 & 3 Hour 1 &1-1/2 Hour 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour
Construction Cores
-Gage Singles Pairs Singles Pairs Singles Pairs
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(a) 3 x 10 6 x 10 3 x 10 6 x 10 3 x 10 6 x 10
D16 HC or
(a) or or or or or or
D18 PolyS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 x9 8 x9 4 x9 8 x9 4 x9 8 x9
HC or 6 2 0 2 6 2 0 2
D20 - - 3 x7 6 x7 3 x7 6 x7
Poly S
Standard (b)
E18 8 0 4 0 8 0 4 0
PolyS - - 3 x7 7 x7 3 x7 7 x7
E20
H12
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
H14 SSFF 4 x 10 8 x 10 5 x 12 10 x 12 5 x 12 10 x 12
H16
0 0 0 0 0 0
(a) 6 x 10 6 x 10 6 x 10
D16 HC or
(a) - or - or - or
Double D18 PolyS 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 x9 8 x9 8 x9
Egress
H14 0 0 0 0 0 0
SSFF - 8 x 10 - 8 x 10 - 8 x 10
H16
Dutch D16 HC or 6 2 6 2
- - 3 x7 - 3 x7 -
Doors D18 PolyS
Rabbetted HC or 0 4 0 4
D18 - - 4 x9 - 4 x9 -
Top Cap PolyS
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 x 10 6 x 10 3 x 10 6 x 10
(a) HC or
D18 - - or or or or
PolyS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 x9 8 x9 4 x9 8 x9
Louvered
HC or 6 2 0 2 6 2 0 2
Doors D20 3 x7 6 x7 3 x7 6 x7
PolyS
H14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SSFF - - 4 x 10 8 x 10 4 x 10 8 x 10
H16
TRR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TRR 4 x8 8 x8 4 x8 8 x8 4 x8 8 x8
Temperature 18
Rise Rated TRR 8 0 4 0 8 0 4 0 8 0 4 0
(b) TRR 3 x7 7 x7 3 x7 7 x7 3 x7 7 x7
E18
(a): D16 and D18 Series doors are eligible for fire labeling up to 4' x 10' nominal leaf size. From an application stand-point however, the
maximum recommended sizes are shown.
(b): Due to material availability, E-Series doors are limited to the sizes shown above.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Table 15 : Maximum Rabbet Sizes for Fleming Hollow Metal Fire Doors
 Page
130
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Date
Mar ‘05

As with frame product, there are limits on the types and sizes of glazing materials provided
for hollow metal fire doors. Table 16 summarizes the maximum areas, widths and heights
of commercially available glazing materials labeled for use with hollow metal fire doors.
You are encouraged to consult the UL “Building Materials Directory” or the WHI / ITS
“Listed Products Directory” to determine the size limitations of specific glazing materials
and the requirements relating to glazing compounds. Also refer to the Fleming Fire
Labeling Specifications brochure, Pages 12 to 15 for more detailed information.
(c) (c)
1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour 1/3 Hour
Listed (a) (b)
2 & 3 Hour 1 & 1-1/2 Hour (With Hose Stream (No Hose Stream
Glazing Material
- Canada Only) - US Only)
2 2 2
1/4” Georgian 100 in area 1296 in area 3289 in area
Not Permitted
Wired Glass 12” w or 33” ht 54” w or 54” ht 35-3/4" w or 92” ht
Up to 4 Lights 2
Specialized 2 2856 in2 area 3289 in area
Not Permitted each 552 in area
Wired Glass 34" w or 84" ht 35-3/4" w or 92” ht
12” w or 46” ht
2 2 2 2
Laminated or 100 in area 4990 in area 4990 in area 4990 in area
Ceramic Glazing 12” w or 33 ht 126” w or 126” ht 126” w or 126” ht 126” w or 126” ht
3/8" Thick 2 2 2 2
3072 in area 3072 in area 3072 in area 3072 in area
Cement Board
Panels 36" w or 96" ht 36" w or 96" ht 36" w or 96" ht 36" w or 96" ht
1/2" Thick 2 2
1296 in area 1296 in area
Gypsum Board - -
Panels 54” w or 54” ht 54” w or 54” ht
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(b) : Maximum area per leaf
(c) : Maximum area per light

Table 16 : Listed Glazing Materials for Hollow Metal Fire Doors

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
131
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

INTRODUCTION
Builders’ hardware is probably one of the most intricate aspects of the openings industry.
With hundreds of manufacturers marketing thousands of unique products, the variations on
a theme can be mind numbing.

The purpose of this section is to provide you with an over-view of the hardware typically
specified for steel doors and frames and how they relate to Flemings’ products.

Hardware manufacturers have developed many standards through their manufacturing

association, the Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA), which have been
adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

There are two Series of ANSI Standards : A156 and A115.

The A156 Standards define the different types of builders’ hardware such as : hinges,
locks, exit devices, closers, architectural door trim or overhead holders. A separate
standard exists for each of these, along with a number of other product groups.

Within each Standard, products are further refined, test procedures, performance criteria
and grading systems are outlined and materials, finishes and functions are specified.

The A115 Standards cover the preparation requirements in door and frame product for
builders’ hardware. They provide us with cutout, reinforcing and mounting screw sizes,
locations, clearances and tolerances to suit specific types of hardware.

A115 generally covers the preparations for bored, cylindrical, mortise, pre-assembled,
interconnected, roller or auxiliary lock, latches and deadlocks, flush bolts, certain floor
closers, off-set pivots, open back or electric strikes, along with specific butt hinges. Some
of the A115 Series also define the locations of related products such as strikes and
cylindrical locks.

These standards do not generally define the location of hardware off the floor. Nor do they
prescribe specific locations for function holes required for mortise locks or exit devices.

The process of standardization is a well-evolved, recognized and integral part of the steel
door and frame industry, but within certain areas of builders’ hardware it continues to elude
us.

As an example, each of 5 manufacturers may have 3 or 4 different mortise lock lines, each
with upwards of 30 different functions, with levers or knobs, with our without escutcheon
trim, all of which are handed. This alone could provide 4800 variations or possible door
preparations. Even within a manufacturers own offerings, the location of a lever spindle, in
relation to the lock face or cylinder cutout can vary.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
132
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Working with the ANSI A115 Series, steel door and frame manufacturers have been able to
offer standardized preparations and reinforcings for most commonly specified hardware
products.

To understand the hardware requirements of an opening, there are 4 simple criteria which
need to be reviewed. Not every opening requires each element. The basic rule of thumb is
swing it, latch it, close it and protect it.

The final determination must be based on an informed knowledge of such factors as door
size, door weight, door and frame material and construction, frequency of use, level of
abuse, security, regulatory requirements, budgetary and aesthetic considerations.

The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), an organization representing all facets of the
openings industry, produces a number of publications which delve into the intricacies of
hardware selection and specification and go far beyond the scope of this manual. For our
purposes, we are only going to scratch the surface and review the basics.

HINGES AND PIVOTS

Every swinging hollow metal door must be provided with hinges or pivots. There are a
number of hinge features affecting door and/or frame preparations which include
application type, hinge size, swaging and barrel location.

APPLICATIONS

There are 4 basic applications of hinges, defined by how they are mounted on the door.
These applications are full mortise, half mortise, half surface and full surface. The
application type is determined by the material of the door and frame.

Full mortise hinges are the most commonly specified. The edge of the door and the
rabbet of the frame are both provided with mortises (cutouts) in which the hinge is screw
fixed. The leafs of the hinge are flush with the door edge and frame rabbet when installed.
Full mortise hinges are used for wood or hollow metal doors hung in steel frames.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 168 : Full Mortise Hinge

 Page
133
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Half mortise hinges are provided typically for hollow metal doors hung in channel iron
frames. The edge of the door is provided with mortises, the hinge is screw fixed flush with
the edge of the door and either screw fixed or welded to the surface of the face of the
frame.

Figure 169 : Half Mortise Hinge

Full surface hinges are available where the hinge is screw fixed or welded to the face of a
channel iron frame and through bolt mounted on the face of the door. This application is
generally used with mineral core doors and occasionally specified for hollow metal doors.

Figure 170 : Full Surface Hinge

Half surface hinges are typically used for mineral core doors in steel frames or for wood
doors and frames. The frames are provided with mortises for flush screw fixing in the
rabbet. The other leaf is through bolted mounted on the face of the door.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 171 : Half Surface Hinge

 Page
134
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Swing clear hinges are an option available for all the above applications. Typical hinges
opened to their 95º position cause the door to intrude into the frame rabbet opening as
shown below. In hospitals and other applications where the clear opening width may be
critical, swing clear hinges are specified. These hinges are designed to locate the door so
that the back (or push side) is in line with or back from the frame soffit, in the 95º open
position.

Figure 172 : Traditional vs Swing Clear Hinges

SIZING

There are 3 elements relating to hinge size which must be specified : hinge height, hinge
width and hinge weight or thickness. These are shown on Figure 173, with a full mortise
hinge illustrated.

Hinge height, the dimension from top to bottom on the hinge leaf (not including the tip) is
based on the thickness and width of the door. Fleming 1-3/8” thick doors and their frames
are prepared for 3-1/2” height hinges. Our 1-3/4” doors and frames are prepared for 4-1/2”
height hinges as shown in Figure 66 on Page 47 for frames and Figure 159 on Page 114
for doors. Other hinge heights are available ranging from 3-1/2” to 8” to suit unusual
conditions.

Hinge width is the over-all dimension taken with the hinge in the open position. For full
mortise hinges the width of the hinge varies independent of its height and must be
specified. This means that 4-1/2” height hinges are available in widths of 4”, 4-1/2”, 5”, 6”,
7” and 8”. Typically, 4” or 4-1/2” width hinges are specified. The reason for wider hinges is
to permit a door to clear frame or wall applied trim or for doors thicker than 1-3/4”.

On half mortise, full surface and half surface hinges the hinge width is determined by the
hinge height. In other words, a 4-1/2” full surface hinge may only be available in a 4” width
and the 6” height version may only be available only in a 4-3/4” width.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
135
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Hinge weight or thickness is determined by the weight of the door and the frequency of
use the door is expected to receive. There are 2 typical weights of hinge available;
standard (.134”) and heavy (.180“). Other hinge weights are available for specialized
applications such as lead-lined or over-sized doors.

The hinge cutouts or mortises in Fleming 1-3/4” door and frame products are manufactured
to suit heavy weight hinges. Hinge reinforcings take standard weight hinges and have 4
raised donuts which can be drilled out by the distributor to convert the reinforcing to a
heavy weight application. Refer to Figure 66 on Page 47 for reinforcing details.

Figure 173 : Hinge Sizing

Swaging is the off-set formed in a hinge leaf at the barrel which permits the leafs to come
closer together when the door is closed. Standard swaging leaves a gap of 1/16” between
the hinge leafs when they are parallel in the closed position as shown in Figure 174, below.
Without swaging, closed hinges would have a space of approximately 5/32” which would
yield an unsightly gap between the door and frame.

Figure 174 : Standard Swaging on Hinges

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
136
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

SPECIAL PURPOSE PRODUCTS

Spring hinges contain one or more internal springs used to move a door to its closed
position. They can be used as a less expensive alternative to the door closer. Adjustable
spring tension permits power and speed tuning, but they do not have the control or back
check features provided by a closer. Spring hinges are available for both single and double
acting applications in sizes ranging from 3” to 12” heights. Some spring hinges are
designed to fit into traditional 4-1/2” hinge preparations. When used in fire rated
assemblies to replace a closer, a minimum of 2 spring hinges per door leaf are required.

Electric hinges are used to monitor door position or to transfer low voltage current from
the frame to the door in order to power electric locks, strikes or exit devices. Some electric
hinges can provide both functions. Electric hinges are modified versions of their traditional
counter-parts. The electrical features can be either exposed on the surface of the hinge
leafs or concealed within them. They are generally specified only in a full mortise
application, however they can be provided for half surface applications as well. Hinge
reinforcings must be provided with additional drilled-out holes (in accordance with the hinge
templates) to allow clearance for wiring, switches or magnets. Hinge manufacturers
recommend electric hinges be placed in the middle hinge location.

Contacts

Switch

Figure 175 : Electric Hinge

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
137
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Continuous hinges are, as the name suggests, a hinge which run full length, from top to
bottom of the door and frame. These hinges distribute the load of the door over the entire
length of the hinge. Continuous hinges are always surface mounted and are available in 2
styles. The first is called a “piano” hinge, the other is a “geared” hinge.

Figure 176 : Piano Style Figure 177 : Geared Style

The piano style is constructed with two hinge leafs held together with a continuous pin.
They are available in half surface (mounted on the door rabbet and door face), full surface
(either on the door rabbet and door edge or on the door and frame faces) and half mortise
(surface mounted on the frame face and the door edge) applications. The full surface
(mounted on the frame and door faces) and the half mortise units are available with the
swing-clear option.

The geared style is made up of 2 continuous geared leafs and a connecting cover. This
style is available in full surface (either on the door rabbet and door edge or on the door and
frame faces) or half surface (mounted on the door rabbet and door face) applications. Only
the full surface (mounted on the frame and door faces) is available with the swing-clear
option. Most manufacturers of geared continuous hinges indicate that steel hinge jambs
and hollow metal door edges or faces do not require reinforcing in their literature.

One draw back of both styles is that, for the most part, doors must be under-sized from
their traditional widths to accommodate the mounting clearances required. The hinge
manufacturers’ literature and templates must be reviewed carefully to determine the
specifics for each application.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
138
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Anchor hinges are a specialized type of 5” full mortise heavy weight hinge which contain
an additional bent flange at the top of one or both leafs. They are mortised into the hinge
jamb and head of the frame, the edge of the door and optionally in the top of the door.
Anchor hinges can be used in heavy, high frequency hollow metal doors or where door
closers or holders may cause excessive strain or abuse to the door, frame or hinges. This
design prevents the hinge from being distorted or pulled out of position under extreme
loads. They are used with 2 conventional hinges to complete the hanging of the door.

Optional Leaf in
Top of Door

DoorDoor
Leaf Leaf

Frame Leaf

Figure 178 : Anchor Hinge

PIVOTS

Pivots are another type of hanging device used in sets or individually in conjunction with
floor or over head closers. There are 3 basic types of pivots; offset, center hung and
pocket pivots. They sit on or are mortised into the floor and carry the entire weight of the
door on the floor pivot. The smaller sizes, sitting on the floor, are mortised into the bottom
of the hinge jamb. Pivots are generally used when aesthetics are a concern or for very
heavy doors.

Offset pivots are used only on single acting doors and are available in either 3/4” or 1-1/2”
offsets, as shown in Figure 179 on the next page. The offset is measured from the face of
the door out to the centerline of the pivot. Both sizes are also located 3/4” in from the edge
of the door. Pivots with the 1-1/2” offset are used to clear frame or wall mounted trim or to
increase the clearance between the door and an adjacent wall. Unlike traditional hinges,
offset bottom pivots are handed. They must also be used on beveled doors. Offset pivots
are available to suit doors weighing up to 1500 pounds. The arm of the bottom pivot is
always mortised into the bottom of the door.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
139
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Offset top pivots are available in full mortise, half surface, half mortise and full surface
applications. All offset pivots should be used with intermediate pivots. Both 3/4” and 1-1/2”
offset intermediate pivots are available for full mortise applications. Half surface, half
mortise and full surface intermediate pivots are available generally only for the 3/4” offset
size.

Top Pivot

Intermediate
Pivot

Jamb Mortised
Bottom Pivot

Alternate
Floor Mortised
Bottom Pivot

Figure 179 : Full Mortise Off-Set Pivot Set

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
140
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Center hung pivots can be used on single and double acting doors which are not fire
rated. Center hung pivot sets are completely concealed inside the door. They are
available for doors weighing up to 1000 pounds. The hinge edge of the door is typically
bullnosed to clear the frame which is generally a cased open profile. Center hung sets do
not use intermediate pivots.

Top Pivot

Jamb Mortised
Bottom Pivot

Alternate
Floor Mortised
Bottom Pivot

Figure 180 : Center Hung Pivot Set

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
141
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Pocket pivots are a specialized type of hinge with their pivot point within the frame profile,
locating the push side of the door in line with the door rabbet similar to a swing clear hinge.
The name is derived from the ability to construct a ‘pocket’ or recess in the adjacent
partition where the open door will fit completely. Standard lock seam or vertically stiffened
door edge construction cannot be used for the hinge stile of pocket pivot doors. As well,
the preparations and reinforcings in the frame and door are highly specialized. Figure 181
illustrates typical details of the wall pocket, door and frame requirements.

Figure 181 : Pocket Pivot

The next step in the selection of hardware is latching. There are two major product groups
to be discussed. The first is locks, the second is exit devices.

Although they perform the same basic function, that of providing a mechanism to secure
the door in the closed position, each must be considered separately because of the
differences in preparation, reinforcing, function and end use requirements, particularly
those dictated by building, fire and life safety code regulations.

LOCKS AND LATCHES

Terminology

Most locks and latches fall into one of 6 product categories. Their names serve to identify
the lock construction or the type of installation. These categories are : cylindrical locks,
mortise locks, cylindrical deadlocks, mortise deadlocks, interconnected locks and door
bolts. There are other types which include pre-assembled, unit, roller, rim, hospital locks
and latches and cremone bolts, but these are beyond the scope of this manual.

Figure 182 on the next page, provides an over-view of the terms used to describe various
elements of most locks and latches.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
142
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Mortise Locks Cylindrical Locks

Figure 182 : Lock Terminology

Cylindrical locks are the simplest but least secure latching device. They are known by
several names: cylindrical locks, bored locks or 161 locks.

The term ‘cylindrical’ is from the cylinder-in-knob feature available on these units.

The ‘bored’ lock terminology comes from the fact that for wood doors the preparation
consists of 2 holes bored or drilled in the door. One hole, 2-1/8” in diameter, is through the
thickness of the door and the other, 1” in diameter, is centered on the lock edge, going
back to the 2-1/8” hole. A 2-1/4” x 1-1/8” mortise is provided in the door edge to receive
the latch bolt face plate. The lock body and knobs or levers are installed in the 2-1/8” hole
and the latch in the 1” hole and edge mortise.

The term ‘161’ is a reference to the US Federal Government Specification Number for
these types of locks with a 2-3/4” backset from the centerline of the bevel to the centerline
of the 2-1/8" hole in 1-3/4” thick doors.

Cylindrical locks used in commercial 1-3/4” steel doors are generally provided with a 2-3/4”
backset, however under certain circumstances 2-3/8”, 3-3/4” or 5” backsets may also be
provided.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
143
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 183 : 161 Cylindrical Lock and ASA Strike

Cylindrical locks may be supplied with either knobs or levers and are provided with ASA
strikes. The ASA (American Standards Association) strike is a 4-7/8” tall x 1-1/4” wide
strike with a 3-3/8” tall lip. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) has
developed a standard for cylindrical lock preparations, ANSI A115.2, which Fleming
follows. The centerline of the lock face and the strike are in line.

The standard location for Fleming products, unless ordered otherwise, is 40-5/16”
centerline from the bottom of the strike jamb for the ASA strike and 39-9/16” centerline for
the 161 preparation from the bottom of the door with a 3/4” undercut on doors.

Cylindrical locks may be provided with a number of ‘functions’. The term ‘function’ is used
to describe the operational features of a device. As an example, a ‘passage’ lock is
provided when a door does not require locking and either knob or lever operates the latch
bolt at all times. With a ‘bathroom’ lock either knob or lever operates the latch bolt unless
locked by the push-button on the inside. The inside button automatically releases when the
inside knob or lever is turned and an emergency release is provided on the outside. All the
functions are integrated into the knob/lever or latch and the identical preparation serves all
functions. Please refer to the hardware manufacturers’ literature for further information on
the various functions available.

Most cylindrical locks are provided with 1/2” throw latches and 5/8” or 3/4” throws are
optionally available. These latches are spring actuated. This means that they will retract
back as they pass over the strike lip and the spring pushes it back out once it is over the
strike hole.

Cylindrical locks are available with roses (sectional trim) only. Escutcheon trim is not
available. Cylindrical locks are not handed.

The standard 161 preparations and reinforcings in Fleming doors are illustrated in Figure
161 on page 116. ASA strike preparations in frames can be found in Figure 67 on page 48.
When pairs of doors are specified, the ASA strike for the inactive leaf is shown in Figure
163 on page 118.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
144
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

For 1-3/8” thick doors, cylindrical locks, designated as US Federal Government

Specification Number ‘160’, are generally provided. The 160 locks utilize 2-3/8” backsets,
2-1/4” x 1” edge mortises and small ASA strikes. These strikes are 2-3/4” tall, 1-1/8” wide
and have a 1-1/2” tall lip.

Figure 184 : 160 Cylindrical Lock and Small ASA Strike

Mortise locks are a more rugged and secure latching device. They are also called 86ED
locks, which is again a reference to the US Federal Government Specification Number for
their edge preparation. They derive the reference to ‘mortise’ locks because they are
installed in a prepared recess or mortise in the edge of a door.

Escutcheon Trim with Levers Sectional Trim with Knobs

(Knobs also Available) (Levers also Available)

Figure 185 : Mortise Locks

The working parts are contained in a rectangular case with provision for latch bolts, dead
bolts, knobs/levers, cylinders, thumb turns and indicator buttons.

The standard preparation for these locks in 1-3/4” commercial doors is an edge mortise 8”
tall and 1-1/4” wide. Fleming’s standard is shown in Figure 162 on page 117.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
145
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Mortise locks can be provided with knobs or levers, either sectional or escutcheon trim and
are shipped with ASA strikes. The industry standard for ASA strikes locates them 40-5/16”
from the bottom of the strike jamb. The standard centerline of the mortised lock edge
preparation is 3/8” lower, 39-3/16” from the bottom of the door with a 3/4” undercut.

The number of functions and options available for mortise locks is far greater than those for
the cylindrical series. The locations of function holes on door faces, relative to the center of
the door edge mortise, not only varies between manufacturers, but can also vary between
series from the same manufacturer. For this reason standard face preparations with
sectional trim have not been developed. With escutcheon trim, ANSI has a standard face
preparation, ANSI A115.1. However, there are a number of manufacturers whose locks will
not fit with the door face cutouts specified and care must be taken when using these.

Function hole backsets are standardized at 2-3/4” from centerline of bevel. They can be
factory, distributor or field prepared.

Mortise locks are available with 5/8” or 3/4” throw latches and dead bolts, when required,
are generally 1” throw to provide security. Latches are spring activated, deadbolts are not.

Another factor for mortise locks is that they are handed, not only from a latch bolt
standpoint, but also by function. These locks are available with knob/levers and/or
cylinders on one or both sides of the door. Thumb turns to activate dead bolts are always
on the “inside” of the door and indicator buttons are on the “outside”. The “inside” can be
either the front or back, depending on whether the door swings into or out of the room.

Most manufacturers provide electrified versions of their mortise locks. These are operated
with wall mounted key/toggle switches or push buttons tied to the fire alarm. The outside
knob/lever can be turned when current is introduced or interrupted, as required by the
specific situation. The inside knob/lever always operates the latch bolt.

Cylindrical deadlocks are similar to cylindrical locks. The 1” deadbolt is manually

operated by means of keys, thumb turns or both. The bolts are not spring activated.

The preparations and reinforcings are identical to those for cylindrical locks but are located
higher on the door. Cylindrical deadlocks are centered 48” from the bottom of the frame
(47-1/4” from the bottom of the door with a 3/4” undercut) to comply with ADA (Americans
with Disabilities Act) requirements.

Cylindrical deadlocks are normally provided with a small ASA no-lip strike which is 2-3/4”
tall and 1-1/8” wide. The lock edge mortise, face preparations and strike centerlines are in
line, at the same height. Small ASA strikes (2-3/4” x 1-1/8” with 1-1/2” tall lip) are also
available and are specified to protect the edge of the frame profile from the deadbolt.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
146
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Figure 186 : Cylindrical Deadlock and Small ASANL Strike

Flemings’ cylindrical deadlock door preparation is illustrated in Figure 161 on page 116 and
the small ASA no-lip strike for frame product appears in Figure 68 on page 49.

Mortise deadlocks are similar in application and with the same functions as cylindrical
deadlocks. However, like mortise locks, they are installed in a prepared recess or mortise
in the edge of the door. The face plates sizes vary from manufacturer to manufacturer but
are available only in 2-3/4” backsets.

Figure 187 : Mortise Deadlock

These 1” throw deadlocks are generally provided with 3-1/2” tall x 1-1/8” wide no lip strikes
and the centerline of the strike, door edge mortise and face preparations are off-set from
each other, again varying from manufacturer to manufacturer. Fleming locates the
centerline of the strike at 48” from the bottom of the frame as a standard practice, with the
final position of the deadlock adjusted to suit.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
147
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Interconnected locks are a hybrid of cylindrical locks and cylindrical deadlocks. These
locks combine the latch functions of cylindrical locks with a separate dead bolt and the two
are linked in an escutcheon housing on the push side of the door. For all functions, turning
the inside knob or lever retracts the both the latch and dead bolt simultaneously giving
immediate exit. Interconnected locks are available with outside grips and thumb latches.
Their latches have 1/2” throws and the dead bolts are 1”.

Figure 188 : Interconnected Lock

The door requires ‘160’ lock edge and face preparations and reinforcing centered at
40-5/16” from the bottom of the frame for the cylindrical lock portion. For the dead bolt, a
‘160’ edge preparation and reinforcing is provided and the door face holes are sized
according to the manufacturers’ templates. The dead bolt is centered 4” above the latch
bolt and both are located on a 2-3/8” centerline of bevel backset. Backsets of 2-3/4” and 5”
are also available. With these two backsets, the cylindrical lock preparation and reinforcing
is a standard ‘161’ type and the dead bolt uses a standard ‘161’ lock edge prep and
reinforcing.

Interconnected locks with 2-3/8” backsets are provided with two strikes; a small ASA lipped
strike (2-3/4” tall x 1-1/8” wide with 1-1/8” lip) for the cylindrical lock and a small ASA no lip
strike (2-3/4” x 1-1/8”) for the deadbolt. The strikes are centered on and lined up with the
door preparations.

Bolts are latching devices mounted at the top and optionally bottom of the inactive leaf of
pairs of doors and latch into a strike mounted on the frame head and floor. Bolts may also
be used with other locks to provide additional security. Most bolts are available in various
lengths ranging from 6” to 48”. There are two categories of bolts : surface or flush
mounted.

Surface bolts are screw fixed to either the front or back face of the door. They are a slide
type metal piece held in a bracket and are manually latched and unlatched. Flush bolts are
PRINTED IN CANADA

mortised with the face plates flush with the edge of the door and guide reinforcings are
 Page
148
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

provided in the end channels. They are available in three styles depending on the
operating method required.

Manual flush bolts, shown in the center of Figure 189, require hand operation of the lever
for both latching and unlatching.

Self-latching shown on the right of Figure 189, also called semi-automatic, extend
automatically when the inactive leaf is closed but must be manually unlatched.

Automatic flush bolts, on the left of Figure 189, latch and unlatch when the active leaf is
opened or closed. Flush bolts are generally used in conjunction with an ASA strike.

Automatic Type Manual Type Self-Latching Type

Figure 189 : Flush Bolts

NFPA 80, the Standard for Fire Doors and fire Windows, states that where fire doors are
not required for exit purposes, labeled top and bottom, self-latching (semi-automatic) or
automatic flush bolts are permitted. Manually operated surface or flush bolts are permitted
only where the room is not normally occupied by humans, such as transformer vaults or
storage rooms.

Most specifications require flush bolts which have 6-3/4” tall x 1” wide edge preparations
centered 12” from the top and bottom of the door. This size is called an “ASA Flush Bolt”
preparation. The door prep and reinfocings required are illustrated in Figure 164 on page
119.

Fleming frame heads for pairs are available with an optional ‘reversible’ flush bolt strike to
PRINTED IN CANADA

suit either leaf being inactive. Details are provided in Figure 72 on page 53.
 Page
149
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

APPLICATIONS

Locks, latches and bolts can be used with all handing or swing configurations except
double egress units, doors in certain means of egress and exterior exit doors in public
buildings.

Figure 190 illustrates typical single door applications and Figure 191, those for pairs.

Cylindrical Lock Mortise Lock Cylindrical

or Latch Deadlock

Mortise Cylindrical Lock Interconnected

Deadlock x Cylindrical Deadlock Lock

Figure 190 : Single Door Applications

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
150
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Cylindrical Lock or Latch Mortise Lock

x Flush or Surface Bolts x Flush or Surface Bolts

Cylindrical Deadlock Mortise Deadlock

x Flush or Surface Bolts x Flush or Surface Bolts

Cylindrical Lock Interconnected Lock

+ Cylindrical Deadlock x Flush or Surface Bolts
x Flush or Surface Bolts
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 191 : Applications for Paris of Doors

 Page
151
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

EXIT DEVICES
Exit devices are latching mechanisms which always unlatch when activated by means of a
cross or touch bar on the push side (back) of the door. Exit devices are generally
mandated by building codes for doors in a “required means of egress from an area having
an occupancy load of 100 persons or more”. As well, doors in public buildings that are
used for egress purposes, such as exterior doors from a corridor, are usually required to be
equipped with exit devices.

As indicated above, there are two basic designs of activating mechanism : the traditional
cross bar and the more recent touch bar. Both designs are used on all types of exit
devices and are illustrated below in their rim application.

Cross Bar Style Touch Bar Style

Figure : 192 : Exit Device Bars

Exit devices are available with a wide range of functions or trim, ranging from “exit only”
(latching mechanism activated by the bar on the inside only), through to latching
mechanisms activated by the bar on the inside or a thumb piece outside and capable of
being locked by cylinders on both sides. The latching mechanisms can be activated from
the outside with thumb pieces, knobs, levers or cylinders.

Some exit devices are equipped with an alarm which activates when the bar is depressed.
The alarm may be audible or may send a signal to a central monitoring station.

Not all trims or functions are available as both panic and fire exit devices nor are they all
available for all types of devices. Refer to each device manufacturers’ catalogues to
determine availability.

The bar and their carrying cases are always mounted on the back (push side) of the door
and the outside trim is mounted on the front skin. Any function holes required can be
factory, distributor or field prepared. Mounting holes for through bolting or drilling and
tapping are a field operation.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
152
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

The device backsets vary from manufacturer to manufacturer and from application to
application. A device on a single door will have a different backset than those used with a
removable hardware mullion in a pair application. Trim can also affect backsets.

The location of the device off the floor also varies manufacturer to manufacturer. The
templates provided for each device need to be reviewed for both sets of criteria. Exit
devices are handed and are always either left-hand-reverse or right-hand-reverse.

There are two distinct classes : panic exit devices and fire exit devices.

PANIC EXIT DEVICES

Panic exit devices are tested for “casualty” or panic only. There are two test standards : UL
305 and ANSI A156.3 .

For UL 305, devices are subjected to “exit” and “loaded exit” tests prior to and after 100,000
repetitions of unlatching, opening, closing and latching, without failure or wear that would
impair proper operation. The ‘exit test’ is where the cross bar is subjected to a 15 pound
load. The application of the load must depress the cross bar sufficiently to disengage the
latch and swing the door open. The ‘loaded exit test’ is a force of 250 pounds applied at
the lock stile, adjacent to the latch, in the direction of the door swing. The cross bar is then
loaded to a maximum of 50 pounds force and again the latch must disengage and the door
operate.

For ANSI A156.3, in addition to the UL 305 criteria, devices are subjected to; additional
cycles of up to 250,000 repetitions; security tests with pull side loads of 400 pounds; cross
bar loading / device operability tests (400 pounds force pulling away from and towards the
door); together with salt spray, humidity, perspiration and finish durability tests. Devices
which comply with ANSI A156.3 after 250,000 cycles are Grade 1 or after 100,000, Grade 2.

Panic exit devices are not permitted on fire doors. They do carry a physical label from the
test lab indicating that they are in fact tested and listed as panic exit devices.

FIRE EXIT DEVICES

Fire exit devices are tested and labeled for both ‘casualty’ and ‘fire protection’. The test
standards for casualty are UL 305 and ANSI A156.3, described above. They are then
subjected to fire endurance and hose stream tests such as UL10b. The only class of exit
device permitted on fire doors is the fire exit device.

One of the major differences between panic and fire exit hardware is the ‘dogging’ feature.
When activated, it keeps the latch bolts retracted for a push-pull function. Since all fire
doors must be self-latching, this feature cannot be provided on fire exit hardware.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Fire exit devices also physically have a label from the test lab indicating that they are tested
and listed as both panic and fire exit devices.
 Page
153
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

TYPES OF EXIT DEVICES

There are 4 types of panic and fire exit devices : rim, mortise, surface vertical rod and
concealed vertical rod.

Rim exit devices are surface mounted on the back (push side) of the door with the latch
extending from the side of the case. They are used on single doors, the active leaf of pairs
and both leafs of pairs with mullions between or behind the doors. They utilize surface
mounted strikes on the strike jamb/mullion soffit or an over-lapping strike, surface mounted
on the back of the inactive leaf for pairs without a mullion.

Figure 193 : Rim Exit Device

Flemings’ “Blank” door, shown in Figure 156 on page 111, details the standard reinforcings
supplied for rim exit devices. A reinforcing channel is provided in the lock stile with a
reinforcing plate in the back at the hinge stile. The channel permits the mounting of both
the device and any outside trim specified. The plate is used to mount the hinge stile end of
the device. Some device manufacturers have rim designs which can utilize a standard
‘161’ (cylindrical lock) preparation when the device is through-bolt mounted on the door.

Mortise exit devices utilize a mortise lock together with the cross or touch bar. The lock is
inter-connected with the bar and outside trim which can be provided with options including
knobs/levers, cylinders, thumb pieces or grips.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 194 : Mortise Exit Device

 Page
154
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Mortise exit devices are used in single door applications with an ASA strike in the frame or
in the active leaf for pairs. The inactive leaf is prepared for both an ASA strike and a
surface vertical rod exit device.

Mortise exit devices utilize a 2-3/4” centerline of bevel to centerline of device backset. The
preparation is the standard ANSI A115.1, detailed in Figure 162 on page 117. The 8” tall x
1-1/4” tall edge cutout is centered at 39-3/16” from the bottom of a door with a 3/4”
undercut to work with the strike at 40-5/16” centerline off the bottom of the strike jamb.

Our “86ED” door, shown in Figure 155 on page 110 is used for mortise exit devices.

Surface vertical rod devices have a rod and latch case mounted on the face of the push
side (back) of the door. They are available in single or double rod applications.

In a single rod application, the rod is mounted above the bar and latches in a surface
mounted strike on the frame head soffit. This application is referred to as “top-rod-only” or
“less-bottom-rod”. When the single rod application is specified for fire doors, an auxiliary
latch must be installed in the lower lock edge of the door. When exposed to heat the
auxiliary latch releases and extends into an edge preparation in the opposing leaf, keeping
the doors closed in a fire.

For the double-rod situation, the rods are mounted above and below the bar. The top rod
latches into the frame mounted surface strike and the bottom rod into a mortise strike in the
floor. For both applications, depressing the bar disengages the latches.

Optional Without
Bottom Rod
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 195 : Surface Vertical Rod

 Page
155
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Surface vertical rods are used for standard and double egress pairs of doors. With
standard pairs, a surface vertical rod can be mounted on each leaf or only on the inactive
leaf when a mortise exit device is used on the active door. They are rarely used in single
applications. Outside trim is available with knobs/levers, cylinders, thumb pieces and grips.

The backsets vary with application, strikes and trim. Mounting heights of surface vertical
rods also vary and care should be taken as the top rods are sometimes ordered ‘cut-to-
length’ from the manufacturer to specific sizes. This will affect the horizontal bar height and
face preparations for devices and trim. Refer to the device manufacturers’ templates for all
pertinent information.

Flemings’ “Blank” doors, shown in Figure 156 on page 111, are reinforced to accept
surface vertical rod devices and function hole preparations can be provided by the factory,
distributor or done in the field.

Concealed vertical rod devices also have a rod and latch, but these are mounted inside
the door. They are available with the “top-rod-only/less-bottom-rod” option as well.
Concealed vertical rod devices are provided with strikes mortised into the door rabbet and
floor.

When the single rod application is specified for fire doors, an auxiliary latch is installed in
the lower lock edge of the door and functions in the same way as those provided for
surface vertical rods.

The top of the back skin (push side) of doors prepared for these devices must be notched-
out for the top latch mechanism. The latch retracts inside the door when the bar is
depressed. These latches re-engage the head and floor strikes when a release pin/trigger
extending from the top latch case is depressed as it contacts the frame head stop.

Optional Without
Bottom Rod
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 196 : Concealed Vertical Rod Device

 Page
156
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Concealed vertical rod devices are used for standard and double egress pairs of doors.
For standard pairs a device can be mounted on each leaf or in the inactive leaf only when a
mortise exit device is provided for the active leaf. As with surface vertical rod devices, they
are not generally specified for single door applications.

Most concealed vertical rod devices are available with a full compliment of outside trim
including knobs/levers, cylinders, thumb pieces and grip handles. The backsets vary with
trim, strikes and application and the mounting heights also vary from manufacturer to
manufacturer. Again, top rods can be ordered cut-to-length from the factory, so templates
should be reviewed carefully when determining backsets and heights for function hole
preparations, etc.

Fleming doors for concealed vertical rod devices are custom and must be ordered from the
factory for the specific device and function required.

APPLICATIONS

Exit devices are mounted in specific applications : singles, pairs, double egress, left/right or
contra-swing. The illustrations in Figures 197 to 201 on the following pages show these
with the assumption that each leaf is required for exit purposes. There are times when a
pair of doors is specified but only one leaf is required to be an active leaf for exit purposes.
This situation usually places the exit device on the active leaf with flush or surface bolts for
the inactive door and it has not been included in the details below.

Rim Exit Device Mortise Exit Device

Figure 197 : Single Door Applications

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
157
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Surface Vertical Rod Concealed Vertical Rod Two Rim Exit Devices with
and Rim Exit Device with and Rim Exit Device with Hardware or Hollow
Overlapping Strike Overlapping Strike Metal Mullion

Surface Vertical Rod Concealed Vertical Rod

and Mortise Exit Device and Mortise Exit Device

Two Surface Vertical Two Concealed Vertical

Rod Exit Devices Rod Exit Devices

Figure 198 : Applications for Pairs of Doors

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
158
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Two Surface Vertical Two Concealed Vertical

Rod Exit Devices Rod Exit Devices

Figure 199 : Double Egress Applications

Two Rim Exit Devices with Hollow Two Mortise Exit Devices
Metal or Hardware Mullion with Hollow Metal Mullion

Figure 200 : Left-Right Applications

Two Rim Exit Devices with Hollow Two Mortise Exit Devices with
Metal or Hardware Mullion Hollow Metal Mullion
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 201 : Contra-Swing Applications

 Page
159
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

CLOSERS
A closer is a device designed to control the operation of a door. They provide the ability to
open the door easily, except at the end of the swing where ‘back-check’ is required to
cushion the door from slamming into the stop or wall. Through the closing arc, uniform and
reasonable speed are provided. In the final stages of closing, latching of the door quietly
and securely are ensured.

All of these features are provided through power generated by springs, pistons, valves and
hydraulic fluids housed in the body of the closer.

Additional features are available which include delayed action, adjustable spring power and
hold-open functions.

Closers are tested and graded to ANSI A156.4, “Door Controls - Closers”. Those in the
Grade 1 category are tested to the most severe requirements. In addition to ‘grading’,
which relates directly to durability, closers are ‘sized’ according to their closing power. The
sizing standards range from 1 through 6, with the larger value indicating greater closing
power. Selection of a closer’s size is dependent on door width and weight. Each
manufacturer provides information regarding the specific grades and sizes available in their
product literature.

Closers can also be evaluated for compliance with ANSI A117.1, “Accessible and Useable
Buildings and Facilities“ and/or the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for opening force
requirements. Non-rated interior doors are required to be capable of opening to a least 90º
with an opening force of not more than 5 pounds. Exterior doors are recommended to be
capable of being operated to at least 90º opening with a force not exceeding 8.5 pounds.

These devices can be tested to UL 228, “Door Closers, Holders and Integral Smoke
Detectors” which covers operational aspects of the device. Closers are not required to be
fire tested to UL10b or ASTM E152 like doors and frames. The rational is that the closer
gets the door shut and the latching device keeps it that way, therefore during the fire the
closer is actually redundant.

Closers can be surface mounted or concealed in the door, frame or floor. They are
mounted relative to the centerline of the hinges or pivots in accordance with the
manufacturer’s templates.

Most closer manufacturers offer electro-magnetic and/or pneumatic units which hold the
door open under normal operation, release manually and with a photo-optic or ionization
smoke detector and/or alarm system.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
160
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

SURFACE CLOSERS

Surface closers are used only on single acting doors and can be mounted in three ways:
regular arm, parallel arm or top jamb installations.

They are available in two styles. The first utilizes a two-piece hinged arm assembly to
connect the door and frame. The second style replaces one of the arms with a channel
track mounted on the door or frame.

Figure 202 : Closer Arm Styles

Closer arms, tracks and bodies are attached to steel frames with machine screws. When
mounted on hollow metal doors, the components can be secured with machine screws or
through-bolted. Drilling, tapping and through bolts holes are field work by the installer.

Regular arm closers are mounted on the front (pull side) of the door. The closer body is
attached to the door face at the top rail and the arm is fastened to the face of the frame
head. The arms extend perpendicular to the closed door. Figure 160 on Page 115 for
doors and Figure 70 on Page 51 for frames, illustrates the reinforcings and their locations
when regular arm closers are specified.

Figure 203 : Regular Arm Closer Mounting

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
161
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Parallel arm closer applications place the closer on the back (push side) of the door. The
body mounts on the face of the door top rail. The arm is affixed to the soffit of the head
with the arm running parallel to the closed door, under the frame soffit. The door
reinforcing for parallel are closers is shown in Figure 160 on Page 115. The standard
reinforcing for these closers on frames is detailed in Figure 71 on Page 52.

Figure 204 : Parallel Arm Closer

In certain applications, such as when a closer’s mounting would interfere with a holder or
stop, a drop plate can be mounted on the soffit or opposite rabbet of the head. When a
1-3/4” flush or rabbatted panel over a door is specified, a bracket is required to mount the
parallel arm closer arms. Drop plates and brackets are provided by the closer
manufacturer.

Soffit Mounted to
Clear Holder or Stop Panel Mounted

Figure 205 : Parallel Arm Closer Brackets

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
162
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Top jamb mounted closers are also located on the back (push side) of the door. The arm
is affixed to the door with the closer body on the face of the frame head. The arm, like
those with regular arm mountings, extends perpendicular to the closed door face.
Reinforcing for this type of mounting is identical to that for regular arm closers.

Figure 206 : Top Jamb Mounted Closer

Drop plates are also specified for top jamb mounted closers when the face width of the
head is too narrow to mount the closer securely. In instances where there is insufficient
clearance above the head of a frame or the jamb depth is very deep, opposite rabbet or
soffit mounted brackets can be supplied by the closer manufacturer.

Figure 207 : Top Jamb Mounted Closer Brackets

A variation on the arm style top jamb mounted closer mounting is a corner bracket
installation. The closer body is mounted on a bracket, which is in turn attached to both the
head and hinge jamb soffits. This mounting is used when the head face width is too narrow
to accommodate the closer securely.

Top jamb mounted track style closers are also available with the track mounted on the front
(pull side) of the door and the closer body on the face of the frame head. This type of
installation generally requires a plate to be mounted on the head.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
163
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

CONCEALED CLOSERS

These devices are available in three mounting configurations : concealed in the frame, the
door or the floor.

Concealed in the frame closers are mortised in the head at the door rabbet, soffit or
centered on the jamb depth. They can be used with single or double acting doors. With
single acting doors these closers can be used with off-set or center hung pivots or with
traditional hinges. Double acting doors require center hung closers, bottom pivots, cased
open profile frames and bull-nosed hinge edges on the door.

Concealed in the frame closers are available with a slide arm connected to the closer body,
running in a track mortised in the door’s top rail. They are also available with exposed
arms, surface mounted on the back (push-side) of the door or with an arm mortised in the
door top rail and connected directly to the spindle in the closer body.

Mortise Track Type Exposed Arm Type

Mortise Arm Type

Figure 208 : Concealed in the Frame Closers

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
164
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Concealed in the door closers are mortised into the top rail of the door towards the hinge
edge. This type of closer is used only on single acting doors, but can be used with hinges,
off-set or center hung pivots.

Concealed in the door closers are available with a slide arm connected to the body in a
track mortised in the frame’s head door rabbet. They are also available with two styles of
exposed arm for mounting on the front (pull-side) of the door. With the first, the frame arm
is surface mounted on the face of the head. The second style has the frame arm mortised
into the head door rabbet.

Mortise Track Type

Face Mounted Exposed Arm Type

Rabbet Mounted Exposed Arm Type

Figure 209 : Concealed in the Door Closers

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
165
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Concealed in the floor closers, also known as floor closers, are more durable than other
types of closing devices. They are more secure and can be more ascetically pleasing.
Floor closers are available for hinged, off-set or center hung pivot applications. In all
applications a case containing the closer body is sunk into the floor.

Off-set floor closers are restricted to single acting doors and can be used in conjunction
with off-set intermediate and top pivots or traditional hinges.

When traditional hinges are used a track is mortised into the bottom rail of the door with an
arm running inside it, connected back to a spindle on the floor case . The weight of the
door is supported off the hinges.

Figure 210 : Concealed in the Floor Closer – Mortise Track Type for Hinges

When off-set pivots are used the standard bottom pivot (reference Figure 179, Page 139) is
replaced by the floor closer. The door is set on top of an arm mortised in the bottom rail
and placed on the spindle of the floor case. Only the knuckle from the arm and the floor
case cover are visible.

Figure 211 : Concealed in the Floor Closer - Off-set Pivot Type

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
166
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Center-hung floor closers can be used for both single and double acting doors. They are
used in conjunction with center hung top pivots only and are generally provided as a set.
The floor closer is substituted for the traditional bottom pivot shown in Figure 180 on Page
140.

As with off-set floor closers, the door is set on top of an arm mortised in the bottom rail and
placed on the spindle of the floor case. In this application, only the floor case cover is
visible.

Figure 212 : Concealed in the Floor Closer – Center Hung Pivot Type

For both off-set and center hung applications, the entire weight of the door is carried by the
floor closer.

All concealed in the door closers require special preparations and reinforcings for their
mortised components. When surface mounted exposed arms are used, the standard
closer reinforcing in our door shown in Figure 160 on Page 115 and the surface closer
reinforcing for frames, detailed in Figure 70 on Page 51, are used.

HOLDERS AND STOPS

To control and limit the swing of a door to protect adjacent partitions, the door or its
hardware, holders or stops are provided. They can be located on the floor, wall or
overhead.

Floor and wall stops are metal bases with rubber centers or tips, available in numerous
styles.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 213 : Floor and Wall Stops

 Page
167
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

OVERHEAD HOLDERS

Overhead holders and stops are available in either surface mounted or concealed
applications. They are not permitted in fire doors unless part of a combination
electromagnetic and pneumatic closer / holder / smoke detector, which will be discussed
later.

Overhead holders and stops have a spring to cushion the stopping action and will limit the
door swing to a maximum of 110º. They are available with several options including hold-
open, built-in hold-open, non-hold-open or a friction holder which will keep a door open at
any position.

Surface mounted overhead holders are used only on single acting doors. The track is
normally mounted on the push (back-side) of the door with the arm surface mounted on the
soffit.

Frame reinforcing generally consists of a 12 gage steel flat bar welded inside the soffit,
similar to that shown in Figure 71 on Page 52. In doors our standard integral closer
reinforcing channel detailed in Figure 160 on Page 115 is used. There are jamb brackets
available from the device manufacturer which permit a pull (front-side) mounting.

Figure 214 : Surface Holder

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
168
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Concealed overhead holders are available for both single and double acting doors. The
track is normally mortised into the top of the door with the arm mortised into the head door
rabbet. Inverse mounted concealed overhead holders, where the track is mortised into the
head rabbet and the arm into the top of the door, are available. All concealed holders
require special preparations and reinforcings.

Figure 215 : Concealed Holder

COMBINATION CLOSER / HOLDER / DETECTORS

Fire doors, when required to be held in their open position under normal operating
conditions, are provided with these specialized devices. These fail-safe units allow the
door to be closed manually as well as by a smoke detector. The hold-open feature can be
provided through electric or pneumatic means and the detector will be either photo-optic or
ionization activated. These devices are usually connected to the fire alarm system but this
is not mandatory. They are most often found on cross-corridor fire and smoke barrier doors
or patient rooms in hospitals but can be installed on stair-hall openings as well.

Combination closer / holder / detectors are surface applied and available in regular, parallel
arm and top jamb mountings similar to typical surface closers.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
169
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

CO-ORDINATORS
Co-ordinators are used on pairs of doors with locks, latches, rim or mortise exit devices and
door closers. As the doors close the co-ordinator holds the active leaf open until the
inactive leaf is closed. The arm is then triggered and releases the active leaf to finish
closing.

There are two types of co-ordinator : surface mounted or mortised.

Surface co-ordinators are mounted on the face of the head on the door side of the profile.

Active Leaf

Figure 216 : Surface Co-Ordinator

Mortise co-ordinators are mortised into the head soffit.

Active Leaf

Figure 217 : Mortised Co-Ordinator

SURFACE APPLIED ACCESSORIES

The final area of basic builders’ hardware is that of surface applied accessories. These
include door pulls, push plates and protective plates.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
170
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

Door pulls and push plates are used on doors which do not latch. They are available in
hundreds of styles, sizes and finishes. Door pulls should be through bolted to the door and
push plates should beveled and be provided with counter-sunk screws to mount them.

The reinforcing channel provided in Fleming ‘blank’ doors, as shown in Figure 156 on Page
111, is typically used for this application.

Figure 218 : Door Pull and Push Plate

Protective plates, manufactured from corrosion resistant materials such as stainless steel,
are surface applied to one or both faces of hollow metal doors. They are generally 16 gage
material and have a brushed finish. They range in height from 6” to 16” when used in
typical commercial applications. Plates designed to protect door faces in hospitals from
stretchers and carts can be as tall as 42”. They should also be provided with counter-sunk
screws for mounting.

A number of hardware companies also manufacture edge guards of similar material.

These are angles or channels applied to the leading lock edge of the door to protect the
finish from being damaged.
PRINTED IN CANADA

Figure 219 : Protective Plates

 Page
171
BUILDERS HARDWARE Date
Mar ‘05

As we stated at the start of this section, builders’ hardware is probably one of the most
intricate aspects of the openings industry. Although this section does provide a fair amount
of information on the products available and their relationship to the doors and frames we
produce, we have only touched the surface.

Entire manuals and books have been written on subjects which we did not even touch,
specialized areas such as hospital hardware, electronic hardware and detention security
hardware.

The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI), offers a number of technical publications and
courses which deal in fair depth with this part of our business and readers are encouraged
to contact their local chapter for additional information.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
172
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

OVER-VIEW
The next area to be covered is that of estimating a project. This task establishes the real
requirements of a job and can be divided into four distinct, logical steps : take-off,
summarize, checking and pricing.

1. Take-Off is the process of ascertaining the quantities, types and details of the steel
doors and frames on the project. A proper take-off can assure your profit margin and
a poor one will almost always result in losses.

2. Summarize is the process of grouping and totaling like product.

3. Checking is the process of reviewing, a second time, the take-off and summary steps
to ensure that nothing has been omitted.

4. Pricing is the application of information from the Price Book against the summarized
quantities previously developed.

TAKE-OFF

The steps involved in doing a take-off are as follows:

1. Obtain a complete set of drawings, any separate detail drawing books, hollow metal
specifications, door and frame schedules, all addendums or amendments, General
Conditions and tender forms.

2. Review the General Conditions for bid closing times, separate or alternate prices,
taxes, etc.

3. Read the hollow metal door and frame specifications and highlight all important points
such as :

a) Door and frame gages

b) Door and frame materials
c) Door and frame construction
d) Door cores
e) Special reinforcing
f) Channel extensions
g) Top and bottom caps for doors
h) Door edge seam requirements

Any questions you have regarding the specifications or special details can be directed to
your authorized Fleming distributor, Fleming’s Customer Support or Technical Services
PRINTED IN CANADA

departments.
 Page
173
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

4. Review the Related Work portion of the hollow metal door specifications to determine
whether you are responsible for any of the following items:

a) Installation of hollow metal doors and frames

b) Drilling and tapping for builders’ hardware
c) Gaskets and weatherstripping
d) Louvers, vents, grilles
e) Glazing materials
f) Wiring for electronic or electric builders’ hardware
g) Insulation at exterior frames
h) Back painting of frames
i) Field measurements
j) Lead-lining of frames
k) Lintels, posts, columns or other load bearing elements adjacent to frames
l) Field welding

5. Review the specifications to determine whether special door constructions, such as

those listed below, are included or excluded from your take-off as appropriate:

a) Sound door and frame assemblies

b) Lead-lined doors and frames
c) Security doors and frames
d) Stainless steel doors and frames

6. Find and photocopy the door and frame schedules, door elevations, jamb details,
sidelight and window elevations and general notes.

7. The architect/designer may provide a door and frame schedule which lists each
frame and door on the plans. Alternately, each opening on the plans may include an
opening number, frame and door type designation. In this case, you will need to
create your own door and frame schedule.

8. Read over all addendums and amendments and make note of any changes which
may affect your work.

9. Review and familiarize yourself with the architectural drawings. As you review the
drawings, make sure that you check all of the following items:

a) Elevations
b) Sections
c) Large scale details
d) Wall types
e) Building cross sections
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
174
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

10. Review the site plans to determine whether there are any out-buildings such as
storage buildings, transformer or telephone equipment rooms, parking garages or
quiosks, stadiums or track and field facilities or mechanical equipment buildings
which may contain steel doors and frames. If there are out-buildings, locate the door
and frame schedules for them.

11. Review the exterior elevations to confirm the number of floors in the building. Some
architects will include a 13th floor, others will not. This needs to be considered if there
is a single drawing which is typical for all or specific floors.

12. Review the mechanical drawings as well as they may provide information relating to
louvers, grilles or vents in hollow metal doors and frames.

13. Make a list of the details and drawings that affect your work as you may need to copy
them at a later date for reference.

14. Starting first from the plans, confirm the information on the architect’s door and frame
schedules. Do not work from the schedules back to the plans. Run your finger over
the exterior walls of the building, checking each opening as it is encountered.

15. All large scale details, wall types, sections or elevations, included on the plans, at or
near a specific opening, should be checked for relevant information. Also check for
consistency between these details and against the door schedule.

16. Mark each opening on the plan in some unique way to designate whether it agrees or
is in conflict with the door schedule and whether it is to be supplied by you. Make
similar notations on the door schedule. Keep a separate list of your queries, with
appropriate opening or detail number cross-references.

17. Since most door schedules do not include interior or exterior windows, it may be
necessary for you to create one.

18. Repeat steps 14 through 16 for all the interior walls, starting in one corner of the
building and working towards to opposite corner.

19. On a note pad, make a list of all the different frame types encountered in one
direction and the different sizes in the other. Add a rows (or columns) to indicate fire
ratings and each additional special condition or item you are aware of on the project.
Do the same for sidelight frames, windows and doors.

20. Working from the architect’s door schedules (and any schedules you created for
windows, etc), place a tick-mark in the appropriate row/column for each component of
the opening. (ie : door, frame, sidelight or window)
PRINTED IN CANADA

21. At this stage, other problem areas such are fire rating will come to light and should be
noted on your list of queries.
 Page
175
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

22. Before moving on to the Summary step, go over the drawings, schedules,
specifications and addendums once more to ensure that you have covered
everything.

SUMMARIZE

1. From your note-pad work, add up each distinct group and create a summary listing
which includes a separate line and description for each, in an ordered fashion.

2. The next step is to formally submit your queries to the architect. Upon receipt of your
answers, you can up-date your summary and move on the next step, pricing.

PRICING

Submit your Summary to your local authorized Fleming Distributor. The Distributor will
provide you with complete pricing for the project.

ORDERING
Once you are awarded the contract, you need to order product. Ordering terminology is
fairly straight forward, once you understand the abbreviations, designations and the
parameters.

FRAMES

A typical example for frames is shown below together with an explanation for each element.
Door Rabbet
Frame Gage Frame Rabbet Size
Frame Type Jamb Depth
Frame Series Swing

DW-FS-16-4-30x70-5 5/8-RH
ULx3/4xEmb
Options CRW
Tag as # 264

Frame Series : There are 5 basic series available and the features of each are covered
back in the Frame Section, Pages 60 through 70. The abbreviations, what they mean and
the specific pages describing each are as follows :

= F-Series, masonry profile frame, pages 60 and 61

A = A-Series, adjustable jamb depth frame, pages 67 and 68
CODW = Cased Open Knocked-Down Drywall Series, pages 62 and 63
DE = DE-Series, double egress frame, pages 64 and 65
DW = DW-Series, knocked-down drywall frame, pages 62 and 63
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
176
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

Frame Type : In most cases you will use either of the first two designations. The third is
for multiple opening frames. Multiple opening units, for ordering purposes only, are frames
which contain 2 or more individual rabbet openings. This covers any frame with a “between
the doors” mullion.

FS = Frame, Single : As shown on page 55 for single acting and page 58

for double acting
FD = Frame, Double : See page 56 for single acting pairs and double
egress or page 58 for double acting pairs
FM = Frame, Multiple : Illustrated on page 57 for contra-swing or R/L,
R/R, L/L, frames and page 59 for R/R/R, R/L/L, Pair/Pair units

Frame Gage : Again, in most cases you will be ordering 16 gage frames as shown in the
example. Our DW and CODW-Series are also available in 18 gage galvanneal.

Door Rabbet :

4 = 1-15/16” for 1-3/4” thick doors

Frame Rabbet Size : This is the nominal frame rabbet width and height, expressed in feet
and inches. For multiple opening frames, each rabbet opening must be specified. Refer to
pages 60 through 68 for the standard sizes available in each Series.

30x70 = 3’0” (36”) wide, 7’0” (84”) height door opening

60x80 = 6’0” (72”) wide, 8’0” (96”) height door opening
2x28x68 = 2 separate door openings, each 2’8” (32”) wide and 6’8” (80”) height
36 1/8x611 3/4 = 3’6-1/8” (42-1/8”) wide, 6’11-3/4” (83-3/4”) height door opening

Jamb Depth : The over-all depth of the frame, measured in inches. Refer to Pages 60 to
68 for the standard jamb depths available for each frame series.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
177
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

Swing : Refer to Pages 55 through 59 for illustrations. Do not use ‘reverse handings’
when ordering frame product. For multiple opening frames, (2 or more separate rabbet
openings in the same frame) specify the hand of each, working from left to right when
viewing the frame in elevation from the pull side of the doors.

= For cased open drywall (CODW) Series frames, this indicates

that the frame has no door hung in it, therefore has no handing
RH = Right hand single or double egress
LH = Left hand single or double egress
RHA = Right hand active. Used for pairs only. Indicates (by default)
that the LH frame rabbet opening will be prepared for the flush
bolt strike
LHA = Left hand active. Used for pairs only. Indicates (by default) that
the RH frame rabbet opening will be prepared for the flush bolt
strike
R/L = Right hand + left hand (with mullion)
R/R = Right hand + right hand (with mullion
L/L = Left hand + left hand (with mullion)
CS R = Contra-swing, right hand
CS L = Contra-swing, left hand
DA R = Double acting right hand
DA L = Double acting left hand
DA PR = Double acting pair
R/R/R = 3 right hand, single acting (with 2 mullions)
R/L/L = 1 right hand + 2 left hand, single acting (with 2 mullions)
PR/PR = 2 pairs, single acting (with 1 mullion)

Options : Options are defined as preparations, reinforcings, wall anchors, profiles or fire
ratings which are not provided ‘standard’ for the specific frame series ordered. Refer to
Pages 60 through 68 for the standard features of each series. Options are also standard
preparations or reinforcings required at non-standard locations. Each option is listed
separately.

The basic options are categorized as follows : wall anchors, assembly methods, hardware
and profiles.

Wall Anchors :

CSA = Combination Stud Anchor, pages 33 and 38, (2 piece type

supplied standard)
EWA = Existing wall anchor prep and guides, page 41 (butterfly style
supplied standard)
FA = Fire anchors, bridge and strap type, page 30
WA = Wire anchors, page 29
PRINTED IN CANADA

WSA = Wood stud anchors, page 39

ZA = Z anchors, page 34
 Page
178
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

Note : CODW, DW and A-Series frames are provided with wall anchorage as part of the
standard product and therefore need not be specified. See pages 62 and 67 for
details.

Assembly Except for the DE-Series, all frames are supplied knocked-down (KD or
Method : KD-DW), in separate pieces. DE-Series are provided standard as set-up
and welded (SUW) product.

= Knocked-down (KD) for F and A-Series frames, knocked-down

drywall (KD-DW) for CODW and DW-Series, supplied standard
SUW = Set-up and welded for F, A and DE-Series

Fire Rating : Specify laboratory, fire rating in hours and label material. Example :
ULx3/4xEmb. Distributor will advise appropriate laboratory and label
material available. Specify laboratory and fire ratings even when UL
embossed label will be utilized.

= Not fire rated

Lab : UL = Underwriters Laboratories

WHI = Warnock Hersey Inc

Rating : 3/4 = 3/4 hour rating

1 1/2 = 1-1/2 hour rating
3 = 3 hour rating

Material : Emb = Embossed (UL only, provided standard on all hinge jambs)
Met = Metal
Myl = Mylar

Hardware : All frames are prepared for 1-1/2 pairs of 4-1/2” standard weight (.134”)
hinges up to 7’6” (90”) rabbet height and 2 pairs up to 10’0” (120”). High
frequency hinge reinforcings are provided with raised dimples which, when
ground off, convert the reinforcing to use heavy weight (.180”) hinges.
Hinge locations are as shown in Figure 64 on Page 46. An ASA strike at
40-5/16” from bottom of strike jamb is also standard. Pairs are prepared
for 4-1/2” standard weight hinges as above. When any of the above are
required, they are not included in the options listing.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
179
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

ASA@__ = ASA (lipped) strike at non-standard location, specified

in inches at “__”.
ASANL = ASA no lip strike in Strike jamb at 48”. If non-standard
location is required, specify as ASANL@__ , indicating
centerline height required, in inches, from bottom of
strike jamb at “__”
ASAxASANL = ASA strike in strike at 40-5/16” and ASANL strike at
48”. If non-standard locations are required, specify as
ASA@__xASANL@__. Indicate required strike
centerline heights at “__”, in inches
CRW = Closer reinforcing, welded in head. See page 51
FB = Reversible flush bolt strike and reinforcing at centerline
of rabbet width. See page 53
N/BUTTS = No hinge reinforcing
N/S = No silencer (door bumper) preparation
NSHP,__,__,__ = Non-standard hinge pitch. Specify locations, top of
rabbet to top of each hinge cut-out in inches at each
“__”
NSHQ,__ = Non-standard hinge quantity for rabbet height. Specify
quantity at “__”
NSHS,__ = Non-standard hinge size. Specify height at “__”
PA = Parallel arm closer reinforcing, welded in head soffit for
each door. See page 52
S/ASA = Small ASA lipped strike at 48” centerline from bottom of
strike jamb. Specify location, in inches, if non-standard
S/ASANL = Small ASA no-lip strike at 48” centerline from bottom of
strike jamb. See page 49. Specify location if non-
standard
SURF STR = Surface strike reinforcing welded in strike jamb soffit at
41” from bottom of jamb or at the centerline of frame
rabbet width for pairs. See page 50. Specify location if
non-standard.

Profile : = Standard profile for Series specified.

DW = Drywall returns on F or DE-Series frames. See Figure 21,
Page 10
ER = Equal rabbet profile; 1-15/16” rabbets for 1-3/4” doors
or 1-9/16” rabbets for 1-3/8” doors
SR = Single rabbet profile. See Figure 12, Page 6
__F = Other than 2” face head. Specify face size required at “_”

Tagging : To assist in the identification of frame product arriving at and being shipped
from your facilities, you can specify that units have the architect’s (or your
PRINTED IN CANADA

own) number indicated on the frame.

 Page
180
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

All other options should be fully described. This would include such things as special
profiles, non-standard material, special hinge or strike reinforcing or preparation
requirements or concealed holders or closers.

Contact your local authorized Fleming Distributor or the factory for assistance with any
requirements not listed here.

TRANSOM FRAMES, SIDELIGHTS AND WINDOWS

To process orders for these types of units, please provide dimensioned elevations, section
profile details, all hardware, handing and anchor information as shown below, to your local
distributor.

7" 7"
8'-4" 16 16
2" 1'-6" 2" 1'-6" 2" 3'0" 2" 1'-6" 2"

2"
1 2

2"
5"

5"
2"

8
15" 1" 9" 15" 1" 9"
1 2 1 1 2 1
10"

1 16 4 16 16 4 16
3" 3"
5 5
2"

1" 4 4
4 GWG Typ.
3'-6"

2
3"
5
4
8'-2"

3
15" 1" 9"
1 2 1
7'

16
8"

16 4
2'-2"

5"
8

4 3
8"
8"

RH 4
8"

5"
8

ELEVATION 1 : Tag # 242 15"

2
1" 9"
1 1
Non-labelled, 4-1/2" hinges, ASA Strike, CRW, Wire Anchors, SUW 16 4 16
7" 7" 3"
5
16 16 4

Figure 220 : Typical Sidelight Frame Ordering Information

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
181
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

DOORS

A similar ordering sequence is used when ordering door product. A typical example, with
an explanation for each element is shown below.
Door Type Door Thickness
Optional Door Core Nominal Size

Door Gage Handing

Lock Stile
Door Series Preparation

D18-PS-M-4-30x70-RH-86ED
ULx3/4xMyl
Options Prep for AUR-8707-RH Yale lock
Tag as # 264

Door Series : Specify one of the 4 available series shown below. Their designations,
descriptions and the pages detailing each are :

D = D-Series, lock seam door, pages 122 and 123

E = E-Series, 6 panel, embossed face sheet lock seam door, pages
124 and 125
H = H-Series, vertically stiffened, fully welded edge seam door, pages
120 and 121
TRR = TRR-Series, lock seam, temperature rise rated fire door, pages
122 and 123

Door Gage : Indicate the face sheet gage required based on the specification and
availability noted below.

16 = 16 gage, available for D, TRR and H-Series doors

18 = 18 gage, available for D, TRR and E-Series doors
20 = 20 gage, available for D and E-Series doors

Optional Door Core : Only D-Series door optional cores are required to be specified.
E-Series are available only with a polystyrene core, H-Series are always a vertically
stiffened, fiberglass core and the TRR-Series has a specialized core to limit heat passing
through the door. The cores for E, H or TRR-Series are not required as part of the order
sequence. For D-Series doors the standard core is kraft paper honeycomb with the
following as available options:
PRINTED IN CANADA

PS = Polystyrene (R6)
PI = Polyisocyanurate (R12.3)
 Page
182
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

Door Type : This refers to light or louver preparations. Lighted doors are supplied with
Fleming standard snap-in glazing system shown in Figure 142 on page 100. Unless noted
otherwise with a dimensioned detail, all types are provided to the standards shown on
pages 101 through 104 in the door section. The standard designations are :

M = Slab (non-lighted) door, page 101

P = Slab door with peep hole / viewer, page 101
L = Louvered door, page 102
V = 10” x 10” view window, page 102
NL1 = Tall narrow light , page 102
NL2 = 6” x 16” narrow light, page 103
G = Half light, page 103
2G = 2 light, page 104
FG = Full light, page 104
__+L = Lighted door with louver at bottom. Specify light type at “__”

Door Thickness :

4 = 1-3/4” thick door

Nominal Size : This is the nominal size of the door, expressed in feet and inches. Refer to
pages 120 through 125, for the standard sizes available in each Series.

Note : Do not provide the actual leaf sizes. Actual leaf sizes are based on our
standard clearances, undersizing both the nominal width by 3/16” (3/32” at each
jamb) and nominal height by 7/8” (1/8” at head and 3/4” at the sill). A 3’0” x 7’0”
nominal door has an actual leaf size of 35-13/16” width by 83-1/8” height. All
actual leaf sizes are calculated this way, unless a non-standard undercut (the
distance from finished floor to bottom of door) is included in the “Options” portion
of the door ordering sequence. As an example, the same 3’0” x 7’0” nominal
door, ordered with a 3/8” undercut, will yield an actual leaf size of 35-13/16”
width by 83-1/2” height.

30x70 = 3’0” (36”) wide by 7’0” (84”) height nominal door size
36 1/8x611 3/ 4 = 3’6-1/8” (42-1/8”) wide by 6’11-3/4” (83-3/4”) height nominal
door size

Handing : The direction of operation for the door, with latching hardware. See pages 55
through 59 for illustrations of the various designations shown below :

RH = Right hand, locked from push side (back) of door

LH = Left hand, locked from push side (back) of door
RHR = Right hand reverse, locked from pull side (front) of door
LHR = Left hand reverse, locked from pull side (front) of door
PRINTED IN CANADA

REV = Reversible, non-handed, only D and H-Series ‘blank’ or 6’8”

doors with ‘161’, ASA or ASAxFB preparations are reversible
 Page
183
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

Lock Stile Preparation : This specifies the standard lock stile hardware applications
available from the list below. Refer to pages 109 to 113 for illustrations of the various
standard applications. Their designations are as follows :

161 = Cylindrical lock edge and face preparations and reinforcing, 2-3/4”
backset, edge prep centered at 39-9/16” from bottom of door,
page 109
86ED = Mortise lock (8” x 1-1/4”) edge preparation and reinforcing, edge
prep centered 39-3/16” from bottom of door, page 110
Blank = Blank door, reinforced for rim exit hardware, surface vertical rod
exit hardware or push / pull applications, page 111
ASA = ASA (4-7/8” x 1-1/4” with lip) strike preparation and reinforcing in
edge, centered at 39-9/16” from bottom of door, page 112
ASAXFB = ASA strike (as above) + 6-3/4” x 1” mortise flush bolt preparations
and reinforcings centered 12” from top and bottom of door, page 113

When any of the lock stile preparations listed above are required at non-standard locations,
they should be specified as shown below, with the required edge prep centerline, in inches,
from the bottom of the door indicated at “__”.

161@__ = Cylindrical lock

86ED@__ = Mortise lock
ASA@__ = ASA strike

The inactive leaf of a pair of doors with an ASA strike and flush bolts can have at non-
standard locations for either. They should be ordered using the following syntax :

ASA@__xFB = ASA strike (non-standard location, in inches) and ASA flush bolts
centered12” from the top and bottom of door
ASAxFB@__+12 = ASA strike at 39-9/16” from bottom of door, ASA flush bolt at a non-
standard centerline from the top specified in inches at “__” and an
ASA flush bolt centered 12” from the bottom of the door

Options : As with frame product, options are defined as preparations, reinforcings or fire
ratings not provided ‘standard’ for the series ordered. Refer to pages 120 to 125 for the
standard features of each series. Again, options are also standard preparations required at
non-standard locations.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
184
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

Fire Rating : Specify laboratory, fire rating in hours and label material. Example :
ULx3/4xMyl. The distributor will advise appropriate laboratory and label
material available.

= Not fire rated

Lab : UL = Underwriters Laboratories

WHI = Warnock Hersey Inc

Rating : 3/4 = 3/4 hour rating

1 1/2 = 1-1/2 hour rating
3 = 3 hour rating

Material : Met = Metal

Myl = Mylar

Hardware : The following are provided as standard for the Series indicated and therefore
are not required in the order sequence.

All Fleming doors are prepared for 1-1/2 pairs of 4-1/2”, standard weight
(.134”) hinges up to 7’6” (90”) nominal height and 2 pairs up to 10’0” (120”).
High frequency hinge reinforcings are provided with raised dimples which,
when ground off, convert the reinforcing to use heavy weight (.180”) hinges.
Hinge locations are as shown in Figure 147 on Page 105. In addition, all
Fleming doors have an integral 14 gage galvanneal steel closer reinforcing
provided at the top of each door, standard.

When required, the following hardware preparations must be specified :

ASANL = ASA no lip strike at 47-1/4” from bottom of door. If non-

standard location is required, specify as ASANL@__,
indicating centerline height , in inches, from bottom of
door at “__”
ASAxASANL = ASA strike at 39-9/16” and an ASA no lip strike at
47-1/4” from bottom of door. If non-standard locations
are required for either, specify as ASA @__xASANL
@__, with strike centerlines from the bottom of door at
“__” in inches
N/BUTTS = No hinge reinforcing
NSHP,__,__,__= Non-standard hinge pitch. Specify locations, top of door
to top of each hinge cut-out in inches at “__”
NSHQ,__ = Non-standard hinge quantity for nominal door height.
Specify quantity required at “__”
NSHS,__ = Non-standard hinge size. Specify height at “__”
PRINTED IN CANADA

S/ASA = Small ASA lipped strike at 47-1/4” centerline from

bottom of door. Specify location if non-standard
 Page
185
ESTIMATING & ORDERING Date
Mar ‘05

S/ASA = Small ASA lipped strike at 47-1/4” centerline from

bottom of door. Specify location if non-standard
S/ASANL = Small ASA no lip strike at 47-1/4” centerline from bottom
of door. Specify location if non-standard
_____ x ___ = Lock or exit device complete with functions holes.
Indicate complete manufacturer’s lock or exit device
number x swing

Tagging : To assist in the identification of doors arriving at and being shipped from your
facilities, you can specify that they have the architect’s (or your own) number
indicated on them.

All other options should be fully described. This would include such things as snap-in vinyl
or steel top caps, special hinge reinforcing or preparation requirements, concealed holders
or closers, astragals or optional edge seam treatment.

Contact your local authorized Fleming Distributor or the factory for assistance with any
requirements not listed here.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
186
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

161 See Cylindrical Lock Preparation

86ED See Mortise Lock Preparation

Active Door The leaf of a pair of doors in or on which the

latching or locking hardware is mounted.
Both leafs of a pair may be active

Actual Door Size The distance measured on the front skin

(pull side) from lock edge to hinge edge and
from top to bottom of the door. Actual door
size equals 'nominal size' less 'door
clearances'. Actual door size is expressed
in inches. Abbrev : Act. Dr. Size

Adjustable Floor An angle mechanically fixed to the bottom of

Anchor a jamb used to lift the base of the frame off
the rough or sub-floor in terrazzo or similar
applications. Also called Adjustable Base
Anchor. Also see Jamb Extension

Adjustable Frame See A-Series Frame

Anchor A steel component placed inside a frame

profile used to secure the frame to the
adjacent construction. Abbrev : Anch

Anchor Hinge A hinge which contains an additional bent

flange at the top of one or both leafs,
mortised in the hinge edge and optionally in
the top of the door, the other leaf in the
hinge jamb and head rabbet

ANSI American National Standards Institute

Applied Stop See Glass Stop

Arc Welding A method of joining metal components by

fusion with heat provided by an electric arc
between an electrode and the metal or
between two electrodes. The arc is shielded
from the atmosphere by inert gas
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
187
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

ASA Strike A 4-7/8" tall x 1-1/4" wide strike with 3-3/8"

tall lip, complying with ANSI A115.1. Used
with cylindrical and mortise locks

ASANL Strike A 4-7/8" tall x 1-1/4" wide strike without lip.

Used commonly with dead locks and dead
latches

A-Series Frame Fleming designation for a series of

adjustable jamb depth frames manufactured
in two sections which can be used on walls
of various thickness

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

Astragal A component or combination of components

applied to; (a) one or both leafs of a pair at
their meeting edges; (b) to the top leaf of
dutch doors or; (c) to the bottom of a flush
panel above a door. Astragals close the gap
between the leafs and provide a weather,
light or sound seal or retard the passage of
smoke, gases or flame. Also see Mortised
Astragal, Overlapping Astragal, Split
Astragal. Abbrev : Ast.

Back The 'push' side of a door

Back
Back Bend See Return

Backset The distance to a cutout or a datum line for a

hardware preparation from a defined datum
on a door or frame. Also see Device Back
Set, Flush Bolt Back Set, Hinge Back Set,
Lock Back Set, Strike Back Set. Abbrev : BS

Base See Sill

Base Anchor or See Floor Anchor and Mullion Base Anchor

Base Clip

Bead See Glass Stop

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
188
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Back
Beveled Edge The vertical door edge angled relative to the
Beveled
faces of the door. The standard bevel is 1/8" Edge
in 2" or 3° from front to back Front

Blank Jamb A vertical open section without hardware

preparations. Used where surface mounted
hardware, glazing materials or panels are
required. Abbrev : BJ

Borrowed Light A four-sided frame prepared for glazing

materials. Also see Window Frame.
Abbrev : B/L

Bottom Cap A metal channel secured inside the end

channel which closes the bottom of the door

Bottom Rail The horizontal face of a door below the

lowest glass light, panel or louver

Builders Per NFPA : Hinges, single, two or three

Hardware point locks or latches, top and bottom bolts
and door closers applied to only swing
doors. NFPA defines fire exit hardware
separately

Bull-Nosed Edge A vertical door edge radiused or segmented

relative to the faces of the door. Used on
doors with center-hung pivots or double
acting doors

Bumpers See Door Silencers

Butt Joint The intersection of frame members which

are not mitered

Butted Frame A frame which fits against a partition rather

than around it

Cased Open A frame profile without a door stop.

Abbrev : CO
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
189
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Ceiling Strut See Channel Extension

Center Rail The horizontal face of a door between two

glass lights, panels or a glass light and
louver. Also a horizontal closed section
exceeding 2" face width separating glazing
materials or panels in sidelight or window
frames

Channel Extension A vertical assembly extending from the

head or sill of a frame to the ceiling or floor
to hold the frame securely in place. Used
in heads of assemblies installed in drywall
partitions where the distance from the
head to the ceiling is excessive. Also used
to suspend sidelight or window assemblies
off the floor in a gypsum knee-wall
partition. Abbrev : Chan. Ext.

Cladding A material affixed to a surface of a door or

frame

Closed Section A mullion, center rail or corner post in

frame product

Closer Reinforcing A steel component in a door or frame

providing the necessary strength and
material thickness for thread engagement
required for mounting door closers.
Abbrev : CRW

Cold Rolled Steel A hot-rolled steel processed by annealing

and reduction to a required thickness by a
cold rolling process. Cold rolled steel is
the base material for galvanneal and
galvanized steel. Manufactured to ASTM
A366. Abbrev : CRS

Combination Stud A steel component used to secure a frame

Anchor to various designs of wood or steel stud
partitions. Abbrev : CSA
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
190
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Communicating A double rabbet frame prepared to accept a

Frame door in each rabbet. These frames are
typically used to facilitate access and control
between individual hotel rooms.
Abbrev : Comm Fr

Compression A factory installed wall anchor used in slip-on

Anchor drywall frames (KD-DW Series) to adjust,
secure and square the frame in a finished
opening. Compression anchors are located on
the inside of the soffit, near the top of each
jamb

Concealed An exit device with mechanism latching into a

Vertical Rod frame head and optionally into the floor, each
Device housed inside the door, interconnected with a
touch bar or crash bar mounted on the back
face (push side) of the door. Abbrev : CVR

Continuously A vertical door edge seam which is welded

Welded over its entire length. Fleming H-Series is a
continuously welded door

Contra-Swing A frame with two single doors, swinging in the

opposite direction with a fixed or removable
mullion between the doors. Abbrev : CS

Core The internal construction of a hollow metal

door

Corner Joint The intersection of two perimeter members of a

frame

Corner Post A closed hollow metal section used to create

an "L" (two way) or "T" (three way) intersection
in a sidelight or window assembly

CSDMA Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers

Association. An organization representing full
line manufacturers of standard and custom
hollow metal doors and frames in Canada

Cut-Off Stop See Sanitary Base

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
191
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Cutout An opening in a door or frame to accommodate

hardware, glazing, louvers, other options or
accessories

Cylindrical Lock Lock stile and edge cut-outs and reinforcing

Preparation complying with ANSI A115.2, consisting of a 2-
1/8" diameter hole at a 2-3/4" back set in each
face sheet and a 2-1/4" tall x 1-1/8" wide edge
cut-out, all on the same horizontal center line.
Commonly referred to as a "161" preparation

Depth See Jamb Depth

Device Back Set The distance from either the lock edge center
line or front edge (pull side) of a door, to a
vertical datum line used to position fire or
panic exit devices. The vertical datum line is
established by the exit device manufacturer
and can be the center of the device or the
cylinder

DHI Door and Hardware Institute. An international

organization representing the architectural
openings industry with membership comprising
firms, agencies or individuals engaged in the
manufacture or furnishing of products or
services to the industry

Door Clearance The distance between; (a) the door rabbet on a

frame and a door; (b) the door rabbet on a
frame and the top of a door; (c) two doors in a
pair or; (d) the bottom of a door and the floor
(also called 'under cut')

Door Rabbet The portion of a frame section in which the

hinge or strike are mortised or where glazing
materials or panels are located. Fleming
standard door rabbet is 1-15/16"
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
192
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Door Silencer A frame component manufactured from a

resilient material secured to the stop of the
strike jamb (for singles) or the head (for pairs)
to cushion the closing of a door

Door Size See Actual Door Size and Nominal Door Size

Door Stop The portion of a frame section into which the

door closes

Double Acting An assembly where the doors can swing in

both directions, towards or away from their
closed position. Abbrev : DA

Double Egress A frame and pair of doors swinging in the

opposite direction without a center mullion.
Abbrev : DE

Double Rabbet A frame profile with recesses on both sides of

the soffit. The recess for the door or glazing
materials is called the 'door rabbet', the other
is the 'opposite rabbet'. Most Fleming Frame
Series are double rabbet profile

Drywall Frame A knocked-down frame designed to be

installed in a gypsum and wood/steel stud
partition after the wall is completed. This
type of frame is also called a 'slip-on' frame.
Fleming's DW Series is a drywall frame

Drywall Profile An open frame section designed with

additional returns to protect gypsum or
plaster. Fleming KD-DW and A-Series
frames are both 'drywall profile' products

Drywall Return The portion of a frame profile formed 90º

from the returns, inside the throat opening,
parallel to the frame faces. Also called a
'double return'
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
193
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Drywall Series See DW-Series

D-Series Doors Fleming designation for galvanneal, lock-

seam, flush face (not embossed) doors

Dust Box A metal component attached to, covering, or

an integral part of a hardware reinforcing, to
prevent mortar, grout or plaster from entering
tapped holes in the reinforcing. Also called
'mortar guard box' or 'plaster guard box'

Dutch Door Two separate leafs, swinging independently,

hung one above the other in the same frame.
Fleming's door type designation is "DD"

Dutch Door A frame prepared for a dutch door

Frame

DW-Series Fleming designation for slip-on, knocked-

down commercial drywall profile frame
product. Available in standard and custom
jamb depths. Jambs and heads are factory
mitered

Electro A process where a 'flash-coat' of zinc is

Galvanized electrostatically applied to cold-rolled steel.
The weight of coating is substantially less
than that of galvanized or galvanneal steel.
ASTM A591 covers steel manufactured in
this fashion. This process is used to protect
cold-rolled steel from rusting between the
steel mill and factory applied paint. Due to the
limited amount of coating on the steel, electro
galvanized is not used by Fleming.

Embossed Door See E-Series Door

End Cap See Top Cap and Bottom Cap

End Channel An inverted "U" shaped component inserted

in the top and bottom of the door, projection
welded to each face sheet
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
194
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

E-Series Door Fleming designation for galvanneal, six-panel

embossed, lock-seam doors

Existing Wall A steel component secured inside the jamb

Anchor Guide or head profile, designed to retard the
compression of the section when the
expansion bolt anchors are tightened. These
anchors are used in frames mounted in
existing unit masonry, poured concrete or
structural steel. Fleming manufactures two
types of anchors, a 'butterfly' and a 'strap and
channel' type. Abbrev : EWA

Existing Wall A pierced and dimpled (countersunk) 1/4" or

Anchor 3/8" diameter hole in the soffit of an open
Preparation section reinforced inside the profile with an
existing wall anchor guide

Exit Device A door latching mechanism designed to

always be operable from the inside (push Rim Device Mortise Device
side) of the door by activating a crash bar,
touch bar or lever. There are two
classifications; panic exit and fire exit
devices. See each for definitions. Within
each classification, there are three types of Vertical Rod
device; rim, mortise and vertical rod. See Device

each for detailed descriptions

Face The portion of the exposed frame section,

when viewed in elevation, which joins the
door rabbet or opposite rabbet to the return
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
195
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Field Splice A connection of frame or door components

made in the field by others. Product is
fabricated in sections when site access,
shipping or handling limitations dictate

Filler Section A formed steel component used to close the

throat of an open section. May contain an
integral stop and soffit

Finished Floor The top surface of the floor. Where terrazzo,

resilient tile or carpet are used, the finished
floor is the top of the surface on which the
terrazzo, tile or carpet are installed

Fire Exit Device An exit device which has been tested for both
fire protection and panic exit loading.
Abbrev : FED

Floor Anchor A steel angle welded inside the bottom of a

jamb with provision for mechanical
attachment to the floor. Also see Mullion
Base Anchor

Flush Bolt A rod or bolt mechanism mortised in the edge

of the inactive leaf of a pair of doors, latching
into the head and/or floor. Abbrev : FB

Flush Bolt The horizontal distance from the lock edge

Backset center line to the center line of the bolt

Flush Door A door with the each face sheet formed from
one sheet, having no seams on the faces
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
196
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Frame A product category where units contain single

or multiple door openings without horizontal
transom members. Abbrev : Fr

Frame The distance between the stop on a frame

Clearance and the back face (push side) of the door.
Fleming standard Frame Clearance is 1/8"

Frame Rabbet The vertical distance from the bottom of a

Height jamb to the underside of an intersecting head
rabbet or transom mullion rabbet. The frame
rabbet height is generally the same as the
'nominal door height' or the 'actual door
height' plus 'door clearances'. Frame rabbet
heights are expressed in feet and inches.
Example ; 70 = 7'0" Abbrev : Fr Rab Ht

Frame Rabbet The horizontal distance between jamb

Width rabbets. The frame rabbet width for single
doors is generally the same as the 'nominal
door width'. For pairs, the frame rabbet width
is equal to the sum of the 'nominal door
widths'. The frame rabbet width is equal to
the 'actual door width' plus 'door clearances'.
Frame rabbet widths are expressed in feet
and inches. Example ; 30 = 3'0"
Abbrev : Fr Rab Wid

Front The 'pull' side of a door

F-Series Fleming designation for masonry profile,

knocked-down or welded, commercial
frames. Available in standard or custom jamb
depths and profiles. Jambs and heads are
factory mitered
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
197
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Gage A numeric designation used to define the

nominal thickness of steel sheet.
Abbrev : Ga

Galvanneal Steel with an annealed zinc-iron alloy, coated

by the hot-dip process, resulting in a dull
matte finish. Manufactured to ASTM A653.
Abbrev : Galv

Galvanized Steel that is zinc coated by the hot-dip

process resulting in a full spangled finish.
Manufactured to ASTM A653

Glass Stop Removable formed channel or angle used to

hold glazing materials or panels in place
within door or frame product

Glazing Trim The component in a glazed door opening to

which the glass stop is applied

Hand A term used to describe the direction of door

swing. Technically for hardware only four
'handings' are available; left hand (LH), right
hand (RH), left hand reverse (LHR) or right
hand reverse (RHR). For hollow metal 'hand'
and 'swing' are used interchangeably. Also
see Swing

Head The horizontal member which forms the top

of a frame product. Also describes the top
portion of a door. Abbrev : Hd

Hinge A hardware device used to support and swing

a door in a frame

Hinge Backset The distance from the back (push side) of a

door, or from the stop on a frame to the
inside edge of the hinge cutout

Hinge Edge The vertical portion of a door in which the

hinges are usually mortised
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
198
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Hinge Jamb The vertical perimeter member of a frame

from which the door is supported and swings.
Abbrev : HJ

Hinge A steel component on which a hinge is

Reinforcing mounted

Hinge Stile The vertical faces of a door at the hinged side

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association. A

division of NAAMM. An organization
representing custom steel door and frame
manufacturers

Hollow Metal A general term used to describe doors and

frame product manufactured from mild steel.
Abrev : HM

Honeycomb An internal stiffening component of steel

doors or panels constructed of
interconnected cells of kraft paper, laminated
under pressure to the inside face sheets.
Abbev : HC

Hospital Profile A type of double rabbet frame profile where

the stop at the opposite rabbet is formed as a
slope at 30º rather than with two 90° bends

Hospital Stop See Sanitary Base

Hot-Dip See Galvanized

Galvanized

Hot-Rolled A steel which is reduced to its final thickness

Steel by heating and rolling. Abbrev : HRS
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
199
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

H-Series Door Fleming designation for galvanneal,

continuously welded edge seam, vertically
stiffened doors

Inactive Door The leaf in a pair of doors which does not

contain a latch or lock and is secured in the
closed position with top and/or bottom bolts.

Interconnected See Communicating Frame

Frame

ISO International Standards Organization

ITS Intertek Testing Services. An international

testing and certification organization. Also
see WHI

Jamb The vertical perimeter member of frame

products

Jamb Depth The distance on a frame profile measured

from face to face, perpendicular to the face of
the door. Abbrev : JD

Jamb Extension The distance from the top of the rough (or
sub-floor) to the top of the finished floor. This
distance may be spanned by physically
lengthening the jambs. Alternately, angled
steel components (called jamb extensions)
may be welded or mechanically affixed to the
bottom of the jamb to place the base of the
jamb even with the top of the finished floor.
Abbrev : Jmb Ext

KD-Construction A frame assembly method. Loose jambs and

heads are shipped to site. Frame is
assembled and placed in position prior to
constructing adjacent partition.
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
200
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

KD-DW A frame assemby method. Loose jambs and

Construction heads are shipped to site. Frame is
assembled in a rough stud opening. Fleming
DW-Series is a KD-DW frame.

Knocked Down A frame manufactured in three or more

Frame pieces for field assembly

Labeled A product which bears the mark or symbol of

an accredited organization with a follow-up
service program, attesting to the product's
compliance with the requirements of the
appropriate standard

LD-Series Fleming designation for galvanneal, lock

seam, flush face, lead-lined doors

Lead-Lined A door or frame constructed with sheet lead

to prevent radiation penetration

Leaf An individual door, used singly, in pairs or in

multiple opening configurations

Light or Lite An opening in a door or frame prepared for

glazing materials

Lock Backset The horizontal distance from the lock edge

center line to the vertical center line of the
lock cylinder, knob or lever

Lock Edge The vertical portion of a door in which the

lock or latching device is mortised or
mounted

Lock Reinforcing A steel component attached to the inside lock

edge or lock stile of a door used to mount
and support a lock or latch
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
201
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Lock Seam A method of connecting door skins at the

door edges by forming mating pockets in the
sheet steel. Fleming D, E, LD and DSS-
Series are all lock seam doors

Lock Stile The vertical faces of a door at the latching

side

Louver A device containing a series of fixed or

operable slats or blades to allow the passage
of air through a door or frame

Masonry Profile An open frame section with the final legs or

returns formed to be perpendicular to the
faces

Masonry Wall A strap and channel type assembly welded to

Anchor the inside of an open section used to secure
the frame to the adjacent unit masonry
partition

Meeting Stile A lock stile intersection of a pair of doors

Miter Joint The intersection of two perimeter members

where the faces meet at an angle

Mortar Guard See Dust Box

Mortise A cutout in a door or frame to receive

hardware

Mortised An astragal installed in a recess in the edge

Astragal of a door
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
202
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Mortise Exit An exit device using a single point latching

Device mechanism recessed in the lock edge of a
door, inter-connected with a touch bar or
crash bar mounted on the back face (push
side) of the door

Mortise Lock A single point latching mechanism designed

to be installed in a recessed preparation in
the lock edge of a door. The most common
type of mortise lock has an 8" x 1¼" edge
preparation generically referred to as an
"86ED" lock

Mortise Lock Lock edge cut-out and reinforcing complying

Reinforcing with ANSI A115.1, consisting of an 8" tall x
1-1/4" wide edge cut-out and lock reinforcing
assembly. Commonly referred to as an
"86ED" preparation

Mullion Section A closed member within frame product,

separating doors, glazing materials or panels
with a maximum face width of 2". Vertical
mullions between doors can be fixed or
removable. Also see Center Rail.
Abbrev : MS

Mullion Base A steel component fixed to the bottom of a

Anchor vertical mullion with provision for mechanical
attachment to the floor

Muntin A narrow profile member used to separate

glazing materials in doors and frame product.
Generally these members are recessed from
either one or both faces of the door or frame

Mute See Door Silencer

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal

Manufacturers. An umbrella organization
representing manufacturers of diverse metal
products. Also see HMMA

Narrow Side See Back

PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
203
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Net Door Size See Actual Door Size

Nominal Door See Nominal Door Size

Height

Nominal Door A convenient method of describing the size of

Size a door which encompasses both the 'actual
door size' plus standard 'door clearances'.
The 'nominal door size' equals the 'frame
rabbet opening size' for single doors. For
pairs of doors the 'nominal door width' is half
the 'frame rabbet opening width'. Nominal
door size is expressed in feet and inches,
width by height. Example : 3070 = 3'0" width
x 7'0" height

Nominal Door See Nominal Door Size

Width

Opening Size See Frame Rabbet Width and Frame Rabbet

Height

Open Section A frame member containing a throat. Jambs,

heads and sills are open sections.
Abbrev : OS

Opposite In a double rabbet frame the recess in the

Rabbet section profile which is not prepared for
hardware or glazing materials

Overlapping An astragal surface mounted on either the

Astragal face or edge of one leaf in a pair which
extends over the adjacent leaf. Flat bar and
Z astragals are both overlapping

Pair Two doors swinging in the same direction

without a mullion between them. Abbrev : Pr

Panic Exit An exit device which has been tested for

Device cycle, push and pull side exit loading, but not
for fire protection
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
204
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Parallel Bevel A condition at the meeting stile of pairs of

doors where the vertical door edges are
angled in the same direction rather than in
the opposite direction Used on double
egress doors

Plaster Guard See Dust Box

Box

Pocket Frame A frame assembly designed for a door which

slides into a recess in the wall

Projection Weld A method of fusing metals which relies on the

application of electric current and pressure
through electrodes without the use of filler
metal. The location of the weld is determined
by the position of embossments (or dimples)
in one of the fused pieces

Rabbet A recess formed in a frame section to receive

a door, panel or glazing materials.
Abbrev : Rab

Rail The horizontal face of a door above, below or

between lights or louvers. Also see Bottom
Rail, Center Rail, Top Rail

Removable A closed section which can be taken out of a

Mullion frame opening to permit the access of larger
objects on a temporary basis. Removable
mullions may be a frame member or a
hardware item. Abbrev : Rem Mull

Return The portion of a frame profile extending back

from the face, perpendicular to the wall
surface

Reverse Bevel See Reverse Handed

Reverse Handed The hand of a door or lock. Used when the

key is located on the pull side of the door and
the door swings towards the exterior
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
205
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Reversible Door A door where the hinge edge preparations

(and lock preparations, if required) are
positioned equally from the top and bottom of
the door so that the door may be installed as
either right or left hand swing

Reversible A preparation in the head of a frame for a

Flush Bolt flush bolt strike which can be mounted to be
either left of right handed

Rim Exit Device An exit device with a single point latching

mechanism, interconnected with a touch bar
or crash bar, all surface mounted on the back
face (push side) of a door

Rough Opening The size of wall opening in which a frame will

be installed

Rough Stud The clear opening in steel or wood stud

Opening partitions, measured between; (a) the vertical
studs to which the frame will be anchored or;
(b) the floor and the horizontal stud or runner
at the frame head. Abbrev : RSO

Sanitary Base A stop and soffit on a frame section which

end at a specified distance above the bottom
of the section and is closed at an angle

Seamless Door A door having no visible seams on the faces

or edges

Second Return See Drywall Return

Set-Up and An term for frame assembly or construction

Welded methods where components are welded
together. Abbrev : SUW
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
206
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Shadow Line The portion of the exposed frame section,

Face when viewed in elevation, which connects the
return to the shadow line return, and extends
Shadow
parallel to the face Line
Face
Shadow
Shadow Line The portion of the frame section which is Line
Return
Return connected to the shadow line face and
extends perpendicular to the face

Shadow Line An architectural feature on a frame profile

Reveal comprising the shadow line face and shadow
line return

Side Light A frame product category where units contain

Frame single or multiple door openings with
provision for adjacent openings for glazing
materials, panels or louvers, separated by
vertical mullions. These units may also have
provision for single or multiple transoms

Silencer See Door Silencer

Sill The bottom horizontal perimeter member in a

four sided opening prepared for doors,
glazing materials or panels

Sill Channel A steel component fixed in the bottom

horizontal perimeter member of a sidelight or
window frame used to secure the member to
the floor

Single Acting A door which swings in only one direction

Door relative to the plane of the frame

Single Rabbet A frame profile with one recess for doors,

glazing materials or panels

Slip-On Frame See Drywall Frame

Small ASA A 2-3/4" tall x 1-1/8" wide strike with a 1-1/2"

Strike lip, complying with ANSI A115.2. Also called
a "T" strike. Abbrev : SML/ASA
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
207
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Small ASANL A 2-3/4" tall x 1-1/8" wide strike without a lip.

Strike Abbrev : SML/ASANL

Soffit The portion of the frame profile between the

stops on a double rabbet section or the stop
and the opposite face on single rabbet
sections. Also called Stop Width

Sound The ability to resist sound transmission

Retardant

Spat A protective covering, usually light gage

stainless steel, wrapping the bottom of a
section to prevent or minimize damage to the
base of the frame

Split Astragal A surface mounted, two component system

with one piece installed on each leaf of a pair
so that each component abuts the other in
the closed position

Split Frame See A-Series Frame

Spot Weld A method of fusing metals which relies on the

application of electric current and pressure
through electrodes without the use of filler
metal. The location of the weld is determined
by the position of the electrode

Spreader A temporary stiffening component attached to

the base of a rabbet opening in frame product
to maintain alignment during shipping and
handling. Not to be used for installation
purposes

Square Edge A vertical door edge formed 90° relative to

Door the faces of the door
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
208
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Stainless Steel An alloy of iron containing a minimum of 11%

chromium. Specified when elevated levels of
corrosion resistance or sanitation are
required

Steel Stud See Combination Stud Anchor and Z Anchor

Anchor

Stick Series Fleming designation for unmitered lengths of

frame section used in the fabrication of frame
product. Available in standard or custom
jamb depths and profiles

Stiffener An internal formed steel component for doors

and panels used to connect face sheets and
make them rigid. Fleming H-Series doors
utilize an interlocking type stiffener system

Stop The portion of a frame profile connecting the

door or opposite rabbet to the soffit. The part
of the profile against which the door closes.
Also called Stop Height

Stop Width See Soffit

Strike A device for retaining a latch or bolt. May be

mortised or surface mounted in the strike
jamb, head, floor or leaf

Strike Back Set The distance from the edge of a strike cut-out
to the back (push side) of the door or from
the edge of a strike cut-out to the stop on the
frame

Strike Jamb A vertical open section which receives a latch

or lock retaining device. Abbrev : SJ

Strike A steel component attached to the interior of

Reinforcing the frame profile or door edge used to mount
and support a surface or mortise strike
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
209
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Surface Bolt A rod or bolt mechanism applied to the face

of the inactive leaf of a pair of doors, latching
into the head and/or floor

Surface A factory installed steel plate, channel or

Hardware angle component providing the necessary
Reinforcing strength and material thickness for screw
engagement for devices mounted directly
upon the surface of door or frame product.
Does not include drilling and tapping

Surface An exit device with an exposed mechanism

Vertical Rod latching into the frame head, and optionally
into the floor, mounted on the back face
(push side) of the door. Abbrev : SVR

Swing Technically, describes the direction of egress

for frames. RH or LHR doors are used in
'RH' swing frames. Two single doors, one
right hand and one left hand are for a frame
with a swing called 'pair'. Industry however
uses 'swing' and 'hand' interchangeably.
Also see Hand

T Strike See Small ASA Strike

Temperature A door which has been tested to determine

Rise Rated the amount of heat passing through the
assembly after either one half hour or one
hour into the standard fire test. Door are
classified for 250°F, 450°F or 650°F
temperature rise at 30 minute or 250°C at
either 30 or 60 minutes. Abbrev : TRR

Template A precise detailed layout or pattern for

providing the necessary information to
prepare a door or frame for hardware

Templated A hardware product or device manufactured

to exactly match the dimensions and
locations shown on its drawing (template)

Terminated See Sanitary Base

PRINTED IN CANADA

Stop
 Page
210
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Tension Anchor See Compression Anchor

Thermally A frame option where the interior and exterior

Broken portions of the profile are separated to reduce
the transfer of cold from outside to inside.
Abbrev : TB

Threshold A raised hardware component fastened to the

floor in a door opening

Throat Opening The distance between the returns in masonry

profile sections, or the second returns in
drywall profile sections

Throw The maximum projection of a bolt or latch

when fully extended

Tolerance The limit of deviation from the nominal value

indicated

Top Cap A channel secured inside the end channel

which closes the top of a door

Transom A framed area immediately above a door

opening containing glazing materials, panels
or louvers

Transom Frame A product category where units contain single

or multiple door openings with single or
multiple openings above the doors for glazing
materials, panels or louvers, which are
separated from the door openings by a
horizontal mullion. Abbrev : TF
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
211
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Transom Mullion A horizontal closed section separating a door Transom

from glazing materials, panels or louvers Panels

Transom
Transom Panel An assembly of metal face sheets supported Mullions
by a core material to be installed a four-sided
opening above a door

Trim See Face

ULC Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. A

standards writing, testing and certification
organization in Canada, affiliated with ULI

ULI Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated. An

international standards writing, testing and
certification organization, affiliated with ULC

Undercut The distance from the bottom of the door to

the bottom of the frame. Fleming standard
undercut is 3/4". Abbrev : U/C

Vertical An exit device with a mechanism latching into

Rod Device the frame head, and optionally into the floor,
interconnected with a touch bar or crash bar
mounted on the back face (push side) of the
door. The latches are either housed within
the door (concealed) or on the back face
(surface mounted). Abbrev : VRD

Vertically A door or panel construction utilizing formed

Stiffened steel components to support the face sheets.
Fleming H-Series is a vertically stiffened door

View Window See Window Frame

Wall Anchor A steel component secured inside a

perimeter frame section used to attach the
frame to the adjacent construction. Wall
anchors may be factory or field installed
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
212
GLOSSARY Date
Mar ‘05

Welded Frame A frame assembled by spot and/or arc

welding at intersecting members. Also see
Set-Up and Welded

WHI Warnock Hersey, Incorporated. The

registered trademark of Intertek Testing
Services Ltd. (ITS). An international testing
and certification organization. Also see ITS

Wide Side See Front

Window Frame A product category where units contain single

or multiple openings for glazing materials,
panels or louvers, but not containing doors.
Also see Borrowed Light

Wire Anchor A field installed, malleable steel component,

drawn or extruded into a loop shape, used to
secure frame product to an adjacent unit
masonry partition. Abbrev : WA

Wood Stud A steel channel component welded to the

Anchor inside of an open section used to secure
frame product to an adjacent wood stud
partition. Abbrev : WSA

Wrap-Around A frame which fits over a partition

Z Anchor A formed steel component welded to the

inside of an open section used to secure
frame product to an adjacent steel stud
partition

Z Astragal A formed steel component applied to the

edge of the inactive leaf of a pair of doors
which closes the gap between the two leafs.
Abbrev : Z Ast
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
213
ABBREVIATIONS Date
Mar ‘05

160 ........... 2-3/8” BS Cylindrical Cont ......... Continuous

Lock Preparation CQ ........... Commercial Quality
161 ........... 2-3/4” BS Cylindrical CRS ......... Cold Rolled Steel
Lock Preparation CRW ........ Closer Reinforcing, Welded In
2F ............. 2" Face CS ............ Contra-Swing
2Pt ............ 2 Point Lock CSA ......... Combination Stud Anchor
3Pt ............ 3 Point Lock CSI ........... Construction Specifications
4F ............. 4" Face Institute
86ED ........ Mortise Lock Edge CVR ......... Concealed Vertical Rod
Preparation Cyl ............ Cylinder or Cylindrical

A ............... Adjustable Series Frame D .............. Lock Seam Door

Act ............ Actual DA ............ Double Acting
Adj ............ Adjustable DD ............ Dutch Door
AHJ .......... Authority Having DE ............ Double Egress
Jurisdiction DHI ........... Door and Hardware Institute
Alum ......... Aluminum Dia ........... Diameter
Anch ......... Anchor Dim .......... Dimension
ANSI ......... American National DL ............ Deadlock
Standards Institute DPS ........ Door Position Switch
ASA .......... 11/4" x 47/8" Lipped Strike Dr ............. Door
ASANL ...... ASA No Lip Strike DSS ......... Stainless Steel Lock
Ast. ........... Astragal Seam Door
ASTM ....... American Society for DW ........... Drywall
Testing Materials DWBJ ....... Drywall Blank Jamb
Assy ......... Assembly DWHD ...... Drywall Head
DWHJ ...... Drywall Hinge Jamb
Bev ........... Bevel DWSJ ....... Drywall Strike Jamb
BJ ............. Blank Jamb D16 .......... 16 Gage Lock Seam Door
B/L ............ Borrowed Light D18 .......... 18 Gage Lock Seam Door
Blk ............ Blank Reinforcing D20 .......... 20 Gage Lock Seam Door
BS ............ Backset
E .............. Embossed Lock Seam Door
CFD .......... Custom Frame - Double Ea ............ Each
CFS .......... Custom Frame - Single ELSTR ..... Electric Strike
Chan ........ Channel Emb ......... Embossed
CL ............ Center Line Eq ............ Equal
CO ............ Cased Open ER ............ Equal Rabbets
COBJ ....... Cased Open Blank Jamb EWA ......... Existing Wall Anchor
CODW ...... Cased Open Drywall Exist ......... Existing
Series Frame Ext ............ Exterior
COF ......... Cased Open Frame E18 ......... 18 Gage Embossed Door
COFD ....... Cased Open Frame - Double E20 .......... 20 Gage Embossed Door
COFS ....... Cased Open Frame - Single
PRINTED IN CANADA

COHD ....... Cased Open Head

Comm ....... Communicating
 Page
214
ABBREVIATIONS Date
Mar ‘05

Fº .............. Fahrenheit In. .............

Inch
FA ............ Fire Anchor In2 .............
Square Inch
FB ............ Flush Bolt Incl ...........Including
FD ............ Frame - Double ISO ........... International Standards
FE ............ Front Edge Organization
FED .......... Fire Exit Device ITS ........... Intertek Testing Services
FHMS ....... Flat Head Machine Screw
Fin ............ Finished JD ............ Jamb Depth
Flr ............. Floor Jmb .......... Jamb
FLS .......... Fire Labeling Specifications
FM ............ Frame - Multi-Opening KD ............ Knocked-Down
FPS .......... Feet per Second KDCR ....... Knocked-Down Center Rail
Fr .............. Frame KDDW ...... Knocked-Down Drywall
FS ............ Frame - Single KDMS ...... Knocked-Down Mullion
FSS .......... Stainless Steel F-Series Frame KDOS ....... Knocked-Down Open Section
Ft .............. Foot or Feet KDSS ....... Knocked-Down Sill Section
Ft2 ............. Square Feet
FW ........... Face Welded L ............... Left
Lb ............. Pound
Ga ............ Gage LD ............ Lead-Lined Door
Galv .......... Galvanneal Steel LF ............. Lead-Lined Frame
Glaz .......... Glazing LH ............ Left Hand
GPW ........ Georgian Polished Wire Glass LHA .......... Left Hand Active
GWB ........ Gypsum Wall Board LHR .......... Left Hand Reverse
GWG ........ Georgian Wired Glass LHRA ....... Left Hand Reverse Active
G90 .......... G90 Galvanized Steel L/R ........... Left/Right

H .............. Vertically Stiffened Door Max .......... Maximum

HC ............ Honeycomb Met ........... Metal
HD ............ Head Min ........... Minimum
HJ ............. Hinge Jamb M/Piv ........ Mortise Pivot
HM ........... Hollow Metal MS ........... Mullion Section
HMMA ...... Hollow Metal Manufacturers Mull .......... Mullion
Association Myl ........... Mylar
Hosp ......... Hospital Profile
Hr ............. Hour n/a ............ Not applicable or available
HRS ......... Hot Rolled Steel NAAMM ... National Association of
Ht ............. Height Architectural Metal
HWT ......... Heavy Weight Manufacturers
Hinge Preparation N/Butts ..... No Butts
H12 .......... 12 Gage Vertically Stiffened Dr NFPA ....... National Fire Protection
H14 .......... 14 Gage Vertically Stiffened Dr Association
H16 .......... 16 Gage Vertically Stiffened Dr NHS ......... No Hose Stream
IPLP ......... In-Plant Labeling Program NMS ......... National Master Specifications
PRINTED IN CANADA

Nom ......... Nominal

N/S ........... No Silencers
 Page
215
ABBREVIATIONS Date
Mar ‘05

NSHP ....... Non-Standard Hinge Pitch RRPC ....... Resin Reinforced

NSHQ ....... Non-Standard Hinge Qty Polyvinyl Chloride
NSHS ....... Non-Standard Hinge Size RSO ......... Rough Stud Opening
R Value .... Thermal Resistance
O/A ........... Over-All
OBSTR ..... Open Back Strike S .............. Surface Reinforcing
OC ............ On Center S/ASA ...... Small ASA Strike
OS ............ Open Section S/ASANL .. Small ASA No Lip Strike
Oz. ........... Ounces SB ............ Sanitary Base
S/CNL ...... Surface Hinge with
P ............... Pitch (Hinge Spacing) Channel Reinforcing
PA ............ Parallel Arm Sgl ............ Single
Closer Reinforcing Sgl Rab .... Single Rabbet
PDO ........ Punch and Dimple Only SJ ............. Strike Jamb
PGS ......... Paintable Galvanneal Steel S/L ........... Sidelight
PHMS ....... Pan Head Machine Screw SLP .......... Shadow Line Profile
PI ............. Polyisocyanurate Sml ........... Small
PMO ......... Punch Miter Only S/ASA ... .. Small ASA Strike
P/Piv ......... Pocket Pivot S/ASANL Small ASA No Lip Strike
P/R ........... Plaster Return SMS ......... Sheet Metal Screw
Pr ............. Pair Spec ......... Special Lock Preparation
Proj ........... Projection Sq. ........... Square
PS ............ Polystyrene SR ............ Single Rabbet
PSF .......... Pounds per Square Foot SS ............ Stainless Steel
PSI ........... Pounds per Square Inch SSA .......... Steel Stud Anchor
PUR ......... Poly Urethane Reactive SSFF ........ Steel Stiffened,
PVC .......... Polyvinyl Chloride Fiberglass Filled
PW ........... Profile Welded ST ............ Stick Series
STC .......... Sound Transmission Class
QP ............ Quick Pack Std ........... Standard
QPHD ....... Quick Pack - Heads Stl ............. Steel
QPHJ ....... Quick Pack - Hinge Jambs Surf Str ..... Surface Strike Reinforcing
QPSJ ........ Quick Pack - Strike Jambs SUW ........ Set-Up and Welded
Qty ........... Quantity SVR ......... Surface Vertical Rod
SWF ......... S. W. Fleming Limited
R .............. Right
Rab .......... Rabbet TB ............ Thermally Broken
Ref ........... Reference T&B .......... Tag and Band
Rein .......... Reinforcing TDS .......... Technical Data Sheet
Rem ......... Removable TF ............ Transom Frame
Rev ........... Reverse or Reversible Thk ........... Thick or Thickness
RH ............ Right Hand TO ............ Tag Only
RHA ......... Right Hand Active T/STR ...... "T" Strike
RHR ......... Right Hand Reverse TRR ......... Temperature Rise Rated
PRINTED IN CANADA

RHRA ....... Right Hand Reverse Active TW ........... Tack Welded

RLTCH ..... Roller Latch TWST ....... Trim Wall Stick
 Page
216
ABBREVIATIONS Date
Mar ‘05

U/C ........... Undercut

ULI ........... Underwriters Laboratories
U-Value .... Thermal Conductance

VRD ......... Vertical Rod Device

WA ........... Wire Anchor

Wd ............ Wood
WHI .......... Warnock Hersey, Inc.
Wid. .......... Width
Wt ............. Weight
W/LIP ....... With Lip
W/S .......... With Stop
WSA ......... Wood Stud Anchor

XLB .......... XL Buff (Mirror) Finish

Stainless Steel
XLS .......... XL Blend S (Brushed)
Finish Stainless Steel

ZA ............ Z Anchor
Z Ast ......... Z Astragal
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
217
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

160 (Cylindrical Lock, 2-3/8” BS) Arc Weld, 186

Lock, 144 ASA Strike, 187
161 (Cylindrical Lock, 2-3/4” BS) Backset, 20, 40, 47
Door, 116, 124 , 120 , 122 , 183 Locations, 40, 47,106-108, 118,
Locations and Backsets, 106, 119
108, 109, 116 Reinforcing,
Lock, 106-109 Frames, 47, 60, 62, 67, 69
2G (Door Type), 104, 182 Doors, 108, 112, 113, 118
4” Face, 15, 61, 69, 70, 179 Ordering, 179, 183
4 Sided Frames, 7, 9, 22, 23 ASANL Strike, 118, 179, 184, 187
4½ " Hinge, 14 ASA x FB
Door Preparation, 105, 109-111, Locations and Backsets, 108,
114 113, 118, 119
Frame Preparation, 40, 46 Ordering, 183
86ED (Mortise Lock) Door 106, 108, A-Series (Adjustable) Frame, 35,
110, 117, 183 36, 39, 40, 42, 67, 68, 187
Assembly Methods, 23, 24
A Fire Ratimg, 67, 73
Abbreviations, 213 Hardware Locations, 40, 47, 49
Active Door, 53, 56, 57, 112, 113, Installation Instructions, 86-90
118, 119, 186 Ordering, 175
Actual Door Size, 101, 111, 182, Standard Profiles, 68
186 Wall Anchors, 35, 39, 42, 44, 90
ADA, 145, 169 Assembly Methods
Adjustable Frame : See A-Series Frames, 7, 8, 11-7, 16, 17, 22-
Frame 24,
Adjustable Floor Anchor, 43, 45, 79 28, 31, 33-36, 37, 39, 41-43,
186 60, 62, 64, 67, 69, 70, 178
Anchor : See Wall Anchor, Floor ASTM Standards, 1-19, 71, 159,
Anchor 187
Anchor Hinges, 138, 186 Astragal, 97-99, 187
ANSI Standards, 6, 109, 112, 113,
116, 128-132, 143, 145, 152, B
154, 159, 186 Back (Defined), 92, 187
Applications Backset, 187
Bolts, 150 ASA Strike, 20, 47, 118
Closers, 159-166 ASA/NL Strike, 118
Concrete Walls, 40, 81 Cylindrical Lock, 116
Co-Ordinators, 169 Cylindrical Deadlock, 67
Exit Devices, 156-158 Defined, 14
Holders, 166-169 Flush Bolt, 119
Locks, 149, 150 Hinge, 20, 40, 46, 114
Masonry Walls, 27, 28, 77 Mortise Lock, 117
Steel Stud Walls, 32, 78, 82, 86 Mortise Deadlock
PRINTED IN CANADA

Wood Stud Walls, 37, 79, 80, 82, Small ASA Strike, 49
86 Small ASANL Strike, 49
 Page
218
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Base Anchor : See Floor Anchor Closer Reinforcing, 179, 189

Beveled Edge, 92, 124 , 120 , 122 , Concealed, 53
188 Door, 109-113, 115, 124 , 120 ,
BHMA, 131 122
Blank Door, 105, 111, 183 Parallel Arm, 52
Blank Jamb, 10, 41, 69, 188 Surface, 46, 51
Blank Mullion, 8, 4 Closers
Blistering, 21 Concealed, 163-166
Bolts, 147-148 Surface, 160-162
Borrowed Light, 8, 23, 188 Cold Rolled Steel, 1, 3, 5, 6, 189
Bottom Cap, 95, 188 Combination Closer/Holder, 168
Bottom Rail, 93, 188 Combination Stud Anchor, 33, 37,
Bridge and Strap Anchor, 29, 30, 60, 78, 79, 177, 189
60, 64 Communicating Frames, 18, 59, 190
Building Classifications, 127 Comparison
Bumper : See Door Silencer Fleming vs SDI-100, 128
Butted Frame, 22, 24, 27, 188 Compression Anchor, 23, 33, 35,
Assembly Methods, 28 37, 39, 42, 62, 83, 85, 190
Masonry Construction, 28-30 Concealed Closer, 53, 163-166
Poured Concrete, 40, 41, 81 Concealed Holder, 168
Butt Joint, 188 Concealed Vertical Rod Device,
Butterfly Existing Wall Anchor, 41, 155-158, 190
81 Concrete Walls, 11, 17, 25, 40, 41,
43, 60, 64, 67,69
C Anchors, 41, 42, 44, 60, 64, 81,
Cased Open Section, 13, 43, 58, 62, 90
69, 82, 188 Standard Jamb Depths, 40
Center Rail, 189 Construction
Frame Product, 10, 14, 9 Doors, 92, 100, 124 , 126, 128
Assembly Methods, 24 D-Series Doors, 120 , 121
Lited Doors, 92 E-Series Doors, 122 , 123
Ceramic Glazing, 74, 130 H-Series Doors, 124 , 125
Channel Extension, 189 Frames, 7, 8, 11, 12, 16, 60, 62,
Classification 67
Doors, 126 Continuous Hinges, 137
Openings, 128 Continuous Hinge Preparation
SDI, 128 Door, 114
Clearance : See Door Clearance, Frame, 46
Frame Clearance Continuously Welded, 190
Clip Edge Seam, 124
Mullion, 5 Contra-Swing, 57, 59, 73, 105, 120 ,
Closed Section, 10, 11, 14, 189 190
Closer Brackets, 161, 162 Co-Ordinators, 169
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
219
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Core, 190 Door Edge

D-Series Doors, 92, 120 , 121 Beveled, 92, 96, 97, 99, 124 ,
E-Series Doors, 122 , 123 120 , 122
H-Series Doors, 92, 124 , 125 Hinge Edge, 92, 92
Also See : Honeycomb, Lock Edge, 92, 93, 97, 106, 113,
Polyisocyanurate, 117, 119, 124 , 120 , 122
Polystyrene, TRR Standard, 92, 96, 118, 120 , 122
Corner Clip 128
Frames, 22-24, 60, 62, 67, 75, Welded, 92, 97, 124
86, 88, 89 Door Glazing, 100-104, 130
Corner Joint, 22-24, 35, 61, 62, 64, Door Head, 92, 93, 94, 95
68, 75, 86, 88, 89, 190 Door Louver : See Louvers
Corner Post, 10, 69, 70, 190 Door Rabbet, 17, 19-15, 43, 53, 66,
Cut-Off Stop : See Sanitary Base 191
Cylindrical Lock Prep, 106-109, 112, Ordering Sequence, 176
116, 118, 124 , 120 , 122 , 191 Door Series, 124 -123
Cylindrical Locks, 142-144, 149, 150 Order Sequence, 181
Cylindrical Deadlock, 49, 107, 116, Also See : D, E, H, and TRR-
118, 145, 149, 150 Series
Door Silencer, 192
D Door Sill, 92, 93, 95
Deadlock : See Cylindrical Deadlock, Door Sizes, 192
Definitions Standard, 115, 121 , 123
Door Series, 124 -123 Door Stop, 18-14, 47, 50, 60, 62,
Frame Product, 7, 2 64, 66, 67, 69, 192
DE-Series Frame Door Terminology, 91
See : Double Egress Frame Door Thickness, 17, 18, 60, 64,
Device Back-Set, 191 114-122 , 128, 182
DHI, 191 Door Types, 100-104
Distributor In-Plant Labeling, 72 Ordering Sequence, 182
Door Classification (Duty), 126, 128 Door Viewer, 101
Door Clearance, 97, 101, 105-108, Double Acting, 13, 58, 59, 192
191 Closers, 163, 166
Door Construction, 92, 92, 100, 126 Pivots, 140
D-Series Doors, 120 , 121 Double Egress (Defined), 13, 21,
E-Series Doors, 122 , 123 57, 192
Fleming vs SDI-100, 128 Double Egress Doors, 120
H-Series Doors, 124 , 125 Fire Rating, 129
Door Core, 92, 124 -123 , 181 Double Egress Frame, 57, 59, 64-66
Fire Rating, 73
Floor Anchors, 43
Installation Instructions, 75-81
Ordering, 175
Profile, 13, 17, 19-15, 66
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
220
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Double Rabbet, 11, 12, 14, 15, 18, E

21, 34, 41, 59, 60, 62, 69, 192 Edge Protectors, 170
Floor Anchors, 43 Edge Seam, 92, 128
Profile Terminology, 15 D-Series Doors, 92, 96, 120
Drywall Frame, 12, 14-10, 192 E-Series Doors, 92, 96, 122
See : DW-Series Frame H-Series Doors, 92, 124
Drywall Partitions, 11, 12, 14, 16, Electric Hinges, 136
17, 22-26, 31-40, 44, 74, 82-90 Electro-Galvanized, 193
Drywall Profile, 12-9, 23, 24, 33, 62, Embossed Door : See E-Series Door
67, 192 Embossed Labels, 60, 62, 64, 67,
Drywall Return, 12, 16, 192 69
D-Series (Lock Seam) Door, 96, 99 End Channel, 94, 115, 124 , 120 ,
120 , 121 , 193 122 , 193
Classification (Duty), 126, 128 Equal Rabbets, 18, 179
Cores, 120 E-Series (Embossed) Door, 92, 96,
Door Types, 101, 182 99, 115, 122 , 123 , 194
Hardware Preparations, 105-119 Classification (Duty), 126
Labeling, 120 , 129 Core, 122
Ordering, 181 Door Types, 101, 182
Standard Sizes, 121 Hardware Preparations, 105-119
Dust Box, 46-49, 60, 62, 64, 69, 193 Labeling, 122 , 129
Dutch Doors, 129, 193 Ordering, 181
Dutch Door Frames, 73, 193 Standard Sizes, 123
DW-Series (Slip-On) Frame, 13, 23, Estimating, 172-175
62, 63, 192 Existing Construction, 22, 24, 40-42,
Assembly Methods, 7, 8, 12, 23, 60, 64, 67, 81
62 Concrete, 41, 42, 81
Available Gages, 20, 62 Drywall, 42, 82
Base Anchors, 44 Masonry, 41, 42, 81
Hardware Preparations, 40-53 Precast, 41, 42, 81
Installation Instructions, 16, 23, Existing Wall Anchor, 41, 42, 60, 64,
82-86 81, 177, 194
Labeling, 62, 73 Exit Device, 50, 110, 111, 151-158,
Ordering, 175 194
Product Applications, 36, 82-86
Existing Partitions, 40, 42 F
Steel Stud Partitions, 32, 42 Face Dimpled Anchors, 33, 35, 37,
Wood Stud Partitions, 36, 37, 39, 42, 44, 67, 82, 90
39, 42 Face Width, 15, 16, 18, 20, 23, 41,
Standard Profiles, 12-8, 31, 36, 45, 60, 62, 64, 67, 69, 194
63 FG (Door Type), 104, 126, 182
Standard Sizes, 14, 63 Fiberglass
Wall Anchors, 35, 39, 44, 82-85 Core, 92, 124
Field Labeling,
PRINTED IN CANADA

See : Special Field Inspection

Field Splice, 195
 Page
221
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Filler Section, 69, 195 Frame Product Glazing, 7, 8, 11, 12,

Finished Floor, 195 17, 18, 74
Fire Exit Device, 110, 152, 195 Frame Profile, 10-15, 24, 33, 34, 37,
Fire Labeled Product, 41, 43, 61, 63, 66, 68, 179
Doors, 129, 130, 184 Frame Rabbet Height, 29, 34-36,
Frames, 71-74, 178 39, 40, 196
Glazing Materials, 74, 130 Frame Rabbet Width, 35, 36, 196
In-Plant Labeling, 72 Frame Series, 60-70
Louvers, 129 Ordering Sequence, 175
Panels, 74 Frame Sizes – Standard, 61, 63, 66,
Sidelight Frames, 73, 74 68, 117
Special Field Inspections, 72 Ordering Sequence, 176
Tests, 71, 72 Frame Type
Transom Frames, 73, 74 Ordering Sequence, 176
Windows, 74 Front (Door), 54, 92, 196
Fire Labels, 72, 178, 184 F-Series Frame, 60, 61, 196
Fire Rated Door and Frame Product Assembly Methods, 22, 24, 61
: See Fire Labeled Product Available Gages, 60
Fire Ratings, 72 Hardware Preparations, 40-53,
Flat Bar Astragal, 97 60
Floor Anchor, 43, 45, 60, 64, 69, 76, Installation Instructions, 75-81
195 Labeling, 60, 73
Also See : Adjustable Floor, Ordering, 175
Anchor, Mullion Floor Anchor Product Applications
Floor Closer, 165-166 Concrete Walls, 40, 41, 81
Floor Stop, 166 Masonry Walls, 27, 28, 60,
Flush Bolt, 147, 148, 179, 195 77
Doors, 108, 113, 119 Steel Stud Partitions, 32, 78
Frame Preparation, 53, 108 Wood Stud Partitions, 36, 37,
Flush Panel, 7, 8, 17, 18, 93, 100 39, 79
Frame (Defined), 7, 196 Standard Profiles, 11, 61
Frame Assembly Methods, 7, 11, Standard Sizes, 37, 61
22-24, 33, 37, 41, 60, 70 Wall Anchors, 28-30, 33, 34, 37,
Frame Clearance, 196 39
Frame Components, 8-5, 14, 15, 22- Full Light Door, 104
24, 46, 47, 58, 60, 62, 64, 67, 69, 70 Full Mortise Hinges, 132
Frame Gage Full Surface Hinges, 133
Ordering Sequence, 176 Function Holes, 117
Frame Installation
A-Series, 86-90
DW-Series, 82-86
F-Series, 75-81
KD Frames, 75-81
Welded Frames, 75-81
PRINTED IN CANADA

Frame Ordering, 175

Frame Product Definitions, 7, 2
 Page
222
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

G Hardware Options
G (Door Type), 103, 182 Door Ordering, 184
G90, 2-19 Frame Ordering, 178
Gage Hardware Preparation
Anchors, 33-35, 39, 41, 43, 45 Doors, 92, 105, 106, 109, 114
Defined, 20, 4, 197 Frames, 69
Doors, 92, 124 , 120 , 122 , 126, Head, 8-4, 15, 21-24, 31, 35, 42, 60-
128 62, 64-69, 197
Frames, 60, 62, 64, 67, 69 Head Preparation, 51-53
Reinforcings, 46, 60, 62, 64, 67, Heavy Weight Hinge Preparation,
69, 111, 117, 119, 124 , 120 , 46, 60, 62, 64, 67, 69, 114, 124 ,
122 120 , 122
Galvanneal, 1-21, 197 High Frequency Hinge Reinforcing,
Galvanized, 197 46, 60, 62, 64, 67, 69, 114, 124 ,
Georgian Wired Glass, 74, 130 120 , 122
Glass Stop, 197 Hinge, 132-141, 197
Glazing Backset, 20, 40, 46, 197
Doors, 100, 130 Edge, 92, 93, 96, 197
Frame Product, 7, 8, 17, 74 Height, 134
Glazing Trim, 100, 197 Jamb, 8, 9, 19, 20, 22, 23, 43,
Glossary, 186 60-62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 198
Guard Box : See Dust Box Locations, 40, 105
Mullion, 4
H Reinforcing, 198
Half Light Door, 103 Doors, 109, 110, 114, 124 ,
Half Mortise Hinges, 133 120 , 122
Half Surface Hinges, 133 Frames, 46, 60, 62, 64, 67,
Handing, 8, 9, 53-57, 64, 92, 105, 69
111, 177, 197 Sizing, 134
Also See : Swing Swing, 135
Hardware Stile, 92, 93, 110, 111, 198
Applications Weight, 135
Bolts, 150 Width, 134
Closers, 159-166 HMMA, 198
Co-Ordinators, 169 Honeycomb Core, 92, 120 , 198
Exit Devices, 156-158 Holders
Hinges, 132-134 Concealed, 168
Holders, 166-169 Surface, 167
Locks, 149, 150 Hollow Metal, 198
Push/Pulls, 170 Hospital Profile, 198
Hardware Locations and Backsets Hospital Stop, 198
Hinges, 20, 40, 114 Hot Rolled Steel, 198
Flush Bolts, 108
Locks, 106-108
PRINTED IN CANADA

Strikes, 40, 47-50, 106-108

 Page
223
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

H-Series (Vertically Stiffened) Door, K

92, 96, 124 , 125 , 199 KD Construction, 60, 61, 199, 200
Classifications (Duty), 126, 128 Assembly Method, 7, 8, 11, 22,
Door Type, 101, 182 24, 36, 60
Fire Rating, 129 Floor Anchor, 43
Hardware Preparations, 105-119 Installation Instructions, 75-81
Labeling, 124 Labeling, 60, 73
Ordering, 181 Hardware Preparations, 40-53
Standard Sizes, 125 Ordering, 178
Product Applications, 11, 22
I Existing, 40, 81
IBC, 72 Masonry, 27, 28, 77
ICBO, 71 Steel Stud, 31, 32, 78
Inactive Door, 56, 199 Wood Stud, 36, 37, 79
Hardware Preparations, 53, 112, Standard Sizes, 61
113, 118, 119 Wall Anchors, 29, 30, 33, 34, 37,
Initial In-Plant Inspection, 72 39, 41
In-Plant Labeling, 72 Also See : F-Series Frames
Installation Instructions Kick Plates, 170
A-Series, 86-90 Knocked-Down Drywall Construction,
DW-Series Frames, 82-86 See : DW-Series Frame,
KD Frames, 75-81 A-Series Frame
Welded Frames, 75-81
Interconnected Locks, 147, 149 L
ITS, 178, 184, 199 L (Door Type), 102, 182
Labeling, 200
J Doors, 129, 130
Jamb (Defined), 8-4, 199 Field, 72
Jamb Depth, 199 Frames, 171-174
Ordering Sequence, 176 In-Plant, 72
Profile Terminology, 8 Also See : Fire Labeled Product
Standard Sizes, 14, 27, 28, 32, Laminated Glazing, 74, 130
37, 40, 61, 63, 66-68, 70 Lead-Lined, 200
Jamb Extension, 199 Leaf, 200
Light or Lite, 200
Doors, 100, 122 , 126
Listed Distributor Program, 72
PRINTED IN CANADA
 Page
224
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Locks, 141-150 Mortise Closer, 53

Backset, 116, 117, 200 Mortise Deadlock, 49, 146, 149, 150
Edge, 92, 96, 200 Mortise Exit Device, 153, 156-158,
Preparations, 109-113, 116-119, 202
183 Mortise Locks, 144-145, 149, 150,
Reinforcing, 200 202
Blank Door, 111 Also See 86ED
Cylindrical Lock, 109, 116 Mortise Pivot, 13, 46, 114, 139-141
Cylindrical Deadlock, 116 Mortise Strike Preparation
Mortise Exit Device, 111 Vertical Rod Device, 53
Mortise Lock, 110, 117 Mullion, 7, 10, 14, 59, 202
Push/Pull, 111 Available Frame Series, 69
Rim Exit Device, 111 Assembly Methods, 24
Surface Vertical Rod, 111 Contra-Swing, 57
Lock Seam (Defined), 92, 201 Double Rabbet, 11, 14, 15
Lock Seam Door : See D and Floor Anchor, 45
E-Series Hardware Preparations, 46-53
Lock Stile, 93, 111, 116, 201 Profile Terminology, 15, 15
Louver, 93, 100, 129, 201 Single Rabbet, 12, 14, 15
Standard Profile, 14, 70
M Mullion Base Anchor, 45, 202
M (Door Type), 101, 182 Multi-Opening Frame Product, 7, 59,
Masonry Construction, 26, 27-30 69, 73
Masonry Profile, 11, 13, 201 Muntin, 202
Floor Anchors, 43
Product Applications, 14-10, 22, N
60, 61, 64, 66, 69, 70 NAAMM, 202
Wall Anchors, 29, 30, 33, 34, 37, Narrow Light Door, 102, 103
39, 41 Neutral Plane, 71
Masonry Walls, 26-30 NFPA 80, 71, 72
Masonry Wall Anchor, 29, 30, 77, NL1 (Door Type), 102, 182
201 NL2 (Door Type), 103, 182
Meeting Stile, 201 No Butts Option, 179, 184
Miter and Notch (M&N) Series, 69, 70 Nominal Door Size
Assembly Methods, 24, 69 Defined, 182, 203
Hardware Preparations, 40-53, Ordering Sequence, 182
69
Installation Instructions, 75-81 O
Product Applications Open Section, 9, 12, 13, 21, 203
Existing Walls, 40, 41 Opening Classifications, 128
Masonry Walls, 27-30 Opposite Face, 9
Steel Stud, 31-34 Opposite Rabbet, 18, 52, 203
Wood Stud, 36-39 Options
Standard Sizes, 70 Frame Ordering, 177
PRINTED IN CANADA

Miter Joint (Defined), 22-24, 201 Door Ordering, 183

Mop Plates, 170
 Page
225
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Ordering Q
Doors, 181
Frames, 175 R
Sidelight Frames, 180 Rabbet, 204
Transom Frames, 180 Rabbated Panel, 7, 73
Windows, 180 Rabbated Top Cap Door, 95
Overhead Holder, 166-168 Rail, 10, 14, 15, 24, 69, 93, 100, 204
Overlapping Astragal, 203 Regular Arm Closer, 160
Reinforcing, 46
P Closer
P (Door Type), 101, 182 Door, 110, 112, 113, 115,
Paintable Galvanneal : See 124 , 120 , 122
Galvanneal Frame, 51, 52
Paint Adhesion, 5, 21 Flush Bolt
Pair, 9, 35, 53, 56, 58-60, 62, 64, Door, 113, 119
67, 106, 108, 112, 113, 118-124 , Frame, 53
120 , 122 , 203 Hinge
Panic Exit Device, 110, 152, 203 Door, 110, 111, 114, 124 ,
Parallel Arm Closer, 161 120 , 122
Reinforcing, 52, 179 Frame, 46, 60, 62, 64, 67, 69
Parallel Bevel, 204 Lock, 110, 111, 116, 117, 124 ,
Panel (Frames), 7, 8, 17, 18, 73, 74 121 , 122
Peep Hole Preparation, 101 Push/Pull, 111
Pitch : See Hinge Location Strike
Pivot Preparation, 13, 46, 114, 139- Door, 113, 118
141 Frame, 47, 49, 60, 62, 64, 67,
Pivots, 138-141 69
Pocket Frame, 204 Surface, 50
Polyisocyanurate, 92, 120 , 181 Removable Mullion, 204
Polystyrene, 92, 122 , 129, 181 Return (on Frames), 16, 204
Pricing, 175 Standard Frame Profile, 16, 15
Profile Reveal, 19, 15
Ordering Sequence, 179 Reveal Rabbet, 20, 21, 66
Standard, 60-70 Reverse Handed, 54, 55, 57, 182,
Terminology, 14-15 204
Types, 11-8 Reversible Door, 111-113, 115, 124
Projection Weld, 46, 47, 60, 62, 64, , 120 , 122 , 205
67, 69, 124 , 120 , 122 , 298 Reversible Flush Bolt Strike, 53, 205
Properties Rim Exit Device, 50, 111, 153, 156-
Galvanneal, 19 158, 205
Protective Plates, 170 Rough Opening, 23, 36, 79, 82, 86,
Punch and Dimple, 23, 41, 44, 62, 205
67 Rust, 5, 21
Push/Pull
PRINTED IN CANADA

Hardware, 170
Reinforcing, 111
 Page
226
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

S Split Frame : See A-Series Frame

Sanitary Base, 205 Spot Weld, 53, 124 , 207
SDI-100 vs Comparison, 128 Spreaders, 76, 77, 80, 85, 89, 207
Seamless Door : See H-Series Spring Hinge, 136
Second Return : See Drywall Return Square Edge Door, 92, 207
Series-Gage Classifications, 126 Stainless Steel, 208
Set-Up and Welded (Defined), 8, 11, Steel Stud Anchor, 33-35, 208
12, 16, 22, 24, 28, 36, 60, 64, 67, Steel Stud Partitions, 26, 31-35, 76,
69, 70, 75-81, 178, 205 82-90
Shadow-Line, 206 Wall Anchors, 33-35
Sidelight Frames, 7, 10, 29, 30, 33, Steel Top Cap, 94, 95
59, 69, 70, 206 Stick (ST) Series Frame Product,
Assembly Methods, 7, 24 20, 27, 69, 70, 208
Fire Rating, 73, 74 Assembly Methods, 24, 69, 70
Ordering, 180 Floor Anchors, 43, 45, 69
Silencer : See Door Silencer Hardware Preparations, 40-53,
Sill, 9, 10, 69, 92, 206 69
Assembly Methods, 24 Installation Instructions, 75-81
Standard Profile, 9 Product Applications
Single Acting Door (Defined), 55, Existing, 40, 41
206 Masonry, 27-30
Closers, 160-166 Steel Stud, 31-34
Hinges, 132-138 Wood Stud, 36-39
Pivots, 138-141 Standard Profiles, 11, 14, 69, 70
Single Rabbet, 12, 14, 18, 64, 66, Wall Anchors, 29, 30, 33, 34, 37,
179, 206 39, 41
Floor Anchor, 43 Stiffener, 92, 100, 208
Profile Terminology, 15 Stop, 19, 20, 47, 50, 208
Sizes - Standard, Standard Profile, 19, 21, 60, 62,
Doors, 125 , 121 , 123 64, 66, 67, 69
Frames, 15, 17, 45, 61, 63, 66- Strap and Spacer Existing Wall
68 Anchor, 41
Slab Door, 101 Strike, 208
Slip-On Frame (Defined), 12, 23, Backset (Defined), 20, 208
206 Locations and Backsets
Also See : DW Series Frame Door, 108, 112, 113, 118,
Small ASA (T) or ASA/NL Strike, 119
179, 184, 185, 206, 207 Frame, 40, 47-50, 53, 60, 62,
Frame Preparation, 49 67, 69, 106
Snap-In Glazing Trim, 100 Also See : ASA Strike, ASANL
Snap-In Top Cap, 94 Strike, Flush Bolt Strike, Small
Soffit, 18, 21, 30, 35, 41, 50, 52, 66, ASA Strike, Small ASANL Strike,
207 Surface Strike, Vertical Rod
Spat, 207 Device
PRINTED IN CANADA

Special Field Inspections, 72

Split Astragal, 207
 Page
227
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

Strike Jamb, 8, 9, 60, 62, 67, 69, Thickness

208 Doors, 17, 18, 60, 64, 124 , 120 ,
Hardware Preparations, 40, 47, 122 ,128
50, 106 Steel : See Gages
Strike Mullion, 4 Threshold, 210
Hardware Preparations, 69 Throat Opening, 9, 16, 17, 27, 31,
Strike Reinforcing, 208 36, 37, 40, 210
Door, 108, 112, 113, 118, 119 Standard Frame Profiles, 16, 15
Frame, 40, 47-50, 53, 60, 62, 67, Throw, 210
69 Top Caps, 94, 95, 210
Stud Partitions, 11, 12, 14, 16, 23, Top Jamb Surface Closers, 162
26, 31-40, 42, 43, 62, 67, 78, 79, Top Rail, 92
82-90 Transom (Defined), 7, 210
Standard Jamb Depths, 32, 37 Transom Frame, 7, 210
Wall Anchors, 33-35, 37, 39, Assembly Methods, 7, 24
83-85, 90 Labeling, 73, 74
Surface Bolts, 147-148, 209 Ordering, 180
Surface Closer Reinforcing, Wall Anchors, 30
Door, 109-113, 115, 124 , 120 , Transom Mullion, 10, 51-53, 211
122 Transom Panel, 211
Frame, 51 TRR-Series (Temperature Rise
Surface Closers, 160-162 Rated) Door
Surface Holders, 167 Labeling, 120 , 129, 210
Surface Strike Preparation, 50, 179 Ordering, 181
Surface Vertical Rod Device, 111, T Strike : See Small ASA Strike
154, 157, 158, 209 Two Light Door, 104
Swing : 182, 209
Also See : Handing U
Swing Clear Hinges, 134 UBC, 71
Undercut, 211
T Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (ULI),
Table of Illustrations, iv 60, 62, 64, 67, 69, 72, 178, 184,
Tack Welded Door Edge, 99 211
Tagging In-Plant Labeling Program, 72
Doors, 185 Special Field Inspections, 72
Frames, 179 Standards, 71
Take-Off, 172-175
Temperature Rise Rated : See TRR- V
Series Door V (Door Type), 102, 182
Template, 209 Vertical Rod Device, 53, 111,
Terminology, 154-158, 211
Doors, 92, 92 Vertically Stiffened Door :
Frames, 7-15 See H-Series Door
Thermally Broken, 210 View Window, 2
PRINTED IN CANADA

View Window Door, 102

Vinyl Top Cap, 94
 Page
228
INDEX Date
Mar ‘05

W
Wall Anchor, 29, 30, 33-35, 37, 39,
41, 42, 211
Ordering Sequence, 177
Also See : Combination Stud
Anchor, Compression Anchor,
Existing Wall Anchor, Masonry
Wall Anchor, Snap-In Base
Anchor, Wire Anchor, Z Anchor
Wall Stop, 166
Welded Edge Seam, 92, 124
Welded Frame, 212
Welded Stiffener : See H-Series
WHI, 72, 178, 184, 212
Window, 8, 10, 29, 30, 33, 69, 212
Assembly Methods, 8, 24, 69
Fire Rating, 74
Ordering, 180
Wire Anchor, 29, 77, 177, 212
Wired Glass, 74, 130
Wood Stud Anchor , 37, 39, 60, 177,
212
Wood Stud Partitions, 26, 36-39, 42,
62
Installation Instructions, 79, 80,
82-86
Standard Jamb Depths, 37
Wall Anchors, 38, 39, 42
Wrap-Around Frame, 16, 17, 22, 24,
27, 29, 31, 36, 42, 60-70, 212

Z
Z275, See Galvanized Steel
Z Anchor, 34, 78, 177, 212
Z Astragal, 97, 98, 212
ZF75, See Galvanneal Steel
PRINTED IN CANADA
 About Fleming
Founded in 1959, S.W. Fleming Ltd. began as a small custom manufacturer of non-residential
steel doors and frames. Due to a combination of quality, product depth and service, Fleming
quickly grew to become the largest supplier in their market.

In 1980, Fleming realized that substantial growth would require a change in marketing
philosophy. A decision was made to stop selling on a direct basis to general contractors
and to implement a distributor program in every major city in Canada. In 1986, Fleming
successfully launched this distributor program into the U.S. and overseas markets.
Today Fleming distributors are in every major center throughout North America.

Fleming’s reputation as one of North America’s fastest growing steel door and frame
manufacturers is due to its commitment to quality, service, product development and
the use of state-of-the-art technology. Fleming’s depth of product offerings and fire
rating capabilities combine to make Fleming one of the most comprehensive product
lines of steel doors and frames in the world.

Table of Contents Company Features

• ISO 9001 Registered Company
Profile 1 9 Windows &
Sidelights • Member NAAMM

Frames 3 10 Flic • Member Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association

• Member DHI
Doors 5 11 Testing & • Complete Product Offerings
Technical Support
• State-of-the-Art Manufacturing Facility
Specialties 7 13 Galvanneal

Service
Fleming has always been the industry leader in service. The use of real time production
planning affords Fleming the best lead times in the industry at competitive prices.
The latest in production equipment, tools and in-plant automation allows Fleming to
provide the highest quality product and service available.

Fleming’s friendly and knowledgeable customer service staff are always available to answer
your questions and provide any pricing or delivery assistance. Our Technical Services
Department is considered one of the finest in the world and is always ready to assist, advise or
consult on technical issues.

1 www.flemingdoor.com
When it comes to shipping lead times, Fleming leads the way with the fastest lead times in
the industry. As well as offering guaranteed Quick Ship Programs, Fleming’s normal lead
times for standard product is one week and two weeks for custom product. The most impor-
tant thing with regards to all of Fleming’s shipping schedules is our “on time” performance
level, with an annualized “on time” rate of 99% plus our zero back order policy. You can’t beat
Fleming for service.

Service Features
• 1 Week Lead Time on Stock Product

• 2 Week Lead Time on Custom Product

• 5 Day Quick Ship Program

• 2 Hour Quick Pack Program

• Real Time Production Planning

• Instant Order and Shipping Acknowledgments

• Web Site Production Schedule Accessibility by Distributors

• Zero Back Order Policy

• Complete Project Management Software

Other Publications Available

Other publications are available from Fleming. Please contact our Customer Service
Department to receive.
• Architectural Manual

• Technical Manual

• Price Book

• Basic Hollow Metal Training Manual

• Fire Labeling Guide

• Presentation Materials

1-800-263-7515 2
 F Series - Masonry
The F series is Fleming’s • Hinge reinforcing is dimpled
masonry profile frame. for conversion from standard
This frame series is to heavy weight
manufactured for both • Available in a wide range of
welded or knocked down custom profiles including
applications. shadow line, narrow face,
hospital profile or with
• Manufactured from paintable sanitary bases
galvanneal or G90 steel • Wide variety of anchors
• Available in 16, 14 and 12 gage available for different wall
• Available in virtually any size and installation conditions
and jamb depth • Includes welded in base anchors
• Hinge jambs are UL embossed • All frames BRAKE FORMED
• Provided with Fleming’s providing consistent and true
standard high frequency corners
hinge reinforcings

DW Series - Drywall
The Fleming DW Series is • Provided with Fleming’s
a knocked down drywall standard high frequency
profile frame for “after hinge reinforcings
wall” conditions. • Hinge reinforcing is dimpled
for conversion from standard
• Manufactured from paintable to heavy weight
galvanneal steel • Standard tension anchor
• Available in 18 and 16 gage and dimpled bases for quick
• Available in a wide variety of and simple installation
sizes and jamb depths • All frames BRAKE FORMED
• Hinge jambs are UL embossed providing consistent and true
corners

MAS-PROFILE ANCHORS
COMBINATION MASONRY FIRE EXISTING WALL ANCHOR Z ANCHOR
STUD ANCHOR ANCHOR

DW-PROFILE WIRE-ANCHOR COMPRESSION BASE ANCHOR

ANCHOR

3 www.flemingdoor.com
A Series - Adjustable Jamb Depth
The A Series frame is • Available in three different sizes
Fleming’s commercial • Type S - 4-1/2" to 6-5/8"
quality adjustable jamb jamb depths
depth frame. Utilized by • Type M - 5-1/16" to 7-7/8"
distributors who need to jamb depths
offer knocked-down or • Type L - 7-7/8" to 13-1/2"
welded frames with jamb depths
custom jamb depths or for • Provided with Fleming’s high
installation in unknown or frequency hinge reinforcing
uneven wall conditions. • Hinge reinforcing dimpled for
conversion from standard
• Manufactured from 16 gage to heavy weight
paintable galvanneal steel • Frame faces dimpled for easy
• Hinge jambs are UL embossed installation in masonry concrete
or drywall

R Series - Retrofit
Fleming’s R Series was of standard shim stock as
specifically designed to meet necessary. Once installed
the growing need for a slip the R Series readily accepts
in steel door frame for the virtually any steel or wood
renovation and retro fit doors to complete the
building construction opening. A variety of face
market. The R Series trims and door stops can
Frame easily slides over be added to enhance the
the existing frame rabbet opening as directed by the
and is then screw fixed to designer.
the existing frame. A square
and plumb installation is • Manufactured from paintable
quickly and accurately galvanneal steel
accomplished by the use • Available in 16 gage

TB Series - Thermally Broken

The TB Series is a thermally • Manufactured from 16 gage
broken commercial knocked- paintable galvanneal steel
down or welded steel frame • Available up to 6-3/4"
for use where extreme jamb depth
temperature differences • Exceeds the standards for
occur. It is manufactured Insulated Steel doors with
with a PVC spline which frames CGSB 82-GP-5M
eliminates through metal • Provided with Fleming’s high
contact, substantially frequency hinge reinforcing
decreasing the thermal • Hinge reinforcing dimpled
conductivity experienced in for conversion from standard
a normal steel frame. to heavy weight

1-800-263-7515 4
 D Series
The Fleming D Series Door Features:
has earned a reputation for
quality, durability and • Extra deep end channels at top
performance throughout the and bottom of door for lasting
commercial construction integrity
industry. The D Series is • High frequency hinge
Fleming's lockseam door for reinforcings which outperform
use in standard, medium, typical 3/16" hinge reinforcing
heavy and extra heavy duty • Dimpled hinge reinforcing for
applications. easy conversion from standard
to heavy weight hinges
• Manufactured from paintable • Adhesive assisted extra deep
galvanneal or G90 steel lockseam which enhances
• Available in 20, 18 and 16 gage structural rigidity and durability
• Available with pre-expanded of the door
paper honeycomb, polystyrene • Closer reinforcing in all doors
or polyisocyanurate cores • All interior components made
• Available with labeling up to with galvanneal steel
3 hours with UL, ULC and WHI • Level ‘A’ grade in accordance
• Southern Building Code with ANSI A 250.4 (formerly
compliant including Dade, A 151.1) test procedures
Broward and Palm Beach
Counties
• Available in sizes up to
3'0 x 10'0 or 4'0 x 9'0
• Available with a wide range of
glass light and louvre
preparations

STANDARD DOOR ELEVATIONS DOORS

TYPE V DOOR TYPE 2G DOOR TYPE NL1 DOOR STANDARD FLEMING D SERIES
HINGE LOCATIONS PLAN SECTION

H SERIES
PLAN SECTION
TYPE FG DOOR TYPE NL2 DOOR TYPE G DOOR

HIGH FREQUENCY HINGE

REINFORCED DOORS

STANDARD GLAZING DETAIL

5 www.flemingdoor.com
H Series - Steel Stiffened
When security and lasting Features:
performance are the issue,
the Fleming H Series should • Extra deep end channels at the
be specified. Recognized as top and bottom of the door for
one of the strongest doors in lasting integrity
the industry, it is designed • High frequency hinge reinforcings
to withstand the wear and which outperform typical
tear of high abuse areas 3/16" hinge reinforcing
as well as high security • Dimpled hinge reinforcing for
applications. This door is easy conversion from standard
specified in many banks, to heavy weight hinges
police stations, detention • Closer reinforcing in all doors
facilities and schools. • All interior components made
with galvanneal steel
The H Series Door is • Level ‘A’ grade in accordance
constructed using interlock- with ANSI A 250.4 (formerly
ing steel stiffeners that are 1 A 151.1) test
welded to each face of the • Continuously welded edge
door at 6" centers. Voids • Manufactured from paintable
are filled with fiberglass galvanneal or G90 steel
insulation and then the • Available in 16, 14 and 12 gage
edges are continuously • 20 gage interlocking stiffeners
welded for the maximum spot welded to door faces
in durability and security. • Available with labels up to
3 hours with UL, ULC, WHI
• Available in any size
• Available with a wide range of
glass light and louvre
preparations

E Series
Elegance combines with Features:
true Commercial Quality
in this exquisite steel door. • Extra deep end channels at top
Manufactured to rigid and bottom of door for lasting
commercial specifications, integrity
the Fleming E Series 6 • High frequency hinge reinforcings
panel embossed door which outperform typical 3/16"
provides security and hinge reinforcing
durability for today's • Dimpled hinge reinforcing for
demanding markets. easy conversion from standard
to heavy weight hinges
• Manufactured from paintable • Adhesive assisted extra deep
galvanneal steel lockseam which enhances
• Available in 20 and 18 gage structural rigidity and
• Available with polystyrene core durability of the door
providing needed insulating • Closer reinforcing in all doors
values • All interior components made
• Available with up to 1.5 hour with galvanneal steel
label from UL, ULC, WHI
• Available in sizes up to 3'8 x 7'0

1-800-263-7515 6
 Stainless Series
Whether you are specifying require the extra corrosion
or supplying stainless steel resistance, Fleming manu-
for corrosion resistance or factures doors and frames
for its aesthetic beauty, using Type 304 stainless
Fleming can manufacture steel with galvanneal
stainless steel doors and internal components. Both
frames to meet your needs. types of stainless steel are
available in a brush finish
For openings that require (XL Blend s) and in a
special corrosion resistance mirror finish (XL Buff).
such as pools, chemical
storage areas, food process- • Frames available up to 4'0 x 9'0
ing plants and laboratories, singles, 8'0 x 9'0 pairs
Fleming makes doors and • Doors available up to 3'6 x 8'0
frames using Type 316 • Transom, sidelight and
stainless steel. All the borrowed lights available
interior components of • Can have fire rating up to
these doors and frames 1-1/2 hour
are also made with the • Available in 16 gage for frames
same 316 stainless steel. and 18 gage for doors
• Units available welded or
For openings that require knock-down
the modern clean look of
stainless steel but do not

Acoustic Units
Where the transmission of These units, tested in strict
sound is a factor, Fleming conformance with ASTM
offers acoustic doors and E90 AND E413 at
frames. Fleming's acoustic Riverbank Acoustic
assemblies have been Laboratories, yield sound
developed to meet the ratings up to STC 46. Also
requirements of all available are fire rated
but the most unusual acoustic assemblies to STC
situations. 46 with UL, ULC labels up
to 1.5 hours.

TRR Series - Temperature Rise Rated

To reduce the potential 450˚F, or 650˚F temperature
hazard of heat radiation rise at 30 minutes or 250˚C
through doors in locations at either 30 or 60 minutes.
where it could interfere Fleming can supply labeled
with the safe evacuation TRR doors to accommodate
of occupants, a maximum any of these classifications.
temperature rise on the
unexposed side of certain • Available with up to 1-1/2 hour
fire doors is required. fire rating
Doors classified for 250˚F, • Available in sizes up to 4'0 x 8'0
singles or 8'0 x 8'0 pairs
7 www.flemingdoor.com
Detention Series
Besides product for the Contact Fleming’s Technical
commercial construction Services Department for
market, Fleming manufac- more information or
tures doors and frames for specifications for these
detention and correctional products.
facilities. All doors and
frames are manufactured to
meet and exceed all require-
ments of ANSI/NAAM 863
performance criteria for
Detention Security Hollow
Metal Doors and Frames.

Metric Product
Fleming has been an All Fleming literature and
industry leader in metric technical support data are
conversion since its North available in both metric
American inception in the and imperial. Additionally,
1970s. In fact, Fleming Fleming offers customized
staff were the industry technical data and
representatives to the information specifically
Canadian Metric for metric standards.
Commission and are
advisers to the USA If your requirements are
conversion to metric. As for metric steel doors and
a major manufacturer frames, Fleming is your
of steel doors and frames obvious choice.
for Canadian and
International markets,
Fleming produces both
stock and custom product
to the International SI
Metric Standards.

1-800-263-7515 8
 Stick Series
For Sidelight, Transom Fleming offers a wide range
Frames and Window units, of standard components
Fleming offers two different such as open and mullion
programs. Distributors can sections prepared for
utilize either our Stick numerous hardware
Program or our Mitre and options, center rail and sill
Notch Program. sections in standard jamb
depths of 4-3/4, 5-3/4, 6-3/4,
Both of these programs 7-3/4, and 8-3/4. Custom
give the architect virtually sticks are also available in
unlimited design capabili- virtually any jamb depth,
ties as well as ensuring that hardware preparation or
these units will be supplied profile.
in a timely fashion by local
distributors.

The Fleming Stick Program Features:

provides distributors the
ability to buy different • Available in 16, 14 and 12 gage
components that would • Manufactured from Paintable
make up a sidelight, Galvanneal Steel
transom or window. • Available in virtually any jamb
These components come depth or profile
in 10' lengths and are • Standard length of 10'0"
then cut by the distributor • Mullions shorter than 10' are
for fabrication of the pre-notched
specific units. • Standard two-week delivery

Mitre and
Notch Program
The other option for Our distributor simply
distributors when supply- assembles the pre-bundled
ing sidelight, transom or units to a drawing, adds
window units is the glass stop and anchors
Fleming Mitre and Notch and ships to the project.
Program. This program Regardless which product
allows the distributor to is required, Fleming can
order the material for provide exact requirements
different units’ pre-cut, to fill the order.
mitred and notched for
easy assembly in their
shops. Each individual
piece is engineered,
punched, formed and
tagged making for a precise
fit every time.

9 www.flemingdoor.com
Fleming Information Connection

Project Management AVACAD

Software
• Automated shop drawings
Fleming’s Project • Elevations, Sections and
Management Software by Details made easy
AVAware Technologies Inc. • Elevations and drawings
is a state-of-the-art, user can be saved for use
At Fleming, we believe friendly program that in Projects
that the use of the latest allows the distributor to
in technology allows both work effortlessly through AVAPROJECT
our distributors and our- a project from take-off
to estimating, from shop • Automated Take-Offs
selves to be more efficient.
drawings to ordering. • Automated Door and
This in turn allows our
Frame Schedules
distributors to become
The system is divided into • Hardware Schedules
more profitable by using
three programs. There is • Automated estimating
technology rather than
the AVACAD program for • Summarization of project
cost-intensive man hours.
drawing and pricing materials
The concept behind FLIC is elevations, the AVAPROJECT • Automated Shop Drawing
to offer the distributor both program for take-offs, door generation
tools for communicating and frame schedules, • Uses Price Book from Link
with Fleming and to offer hardware schedules, shop section as well as distributor
software programs to assist drawings and estimates, built pricing for labor,
the distributors in project and there is the Fleming hardware, etc.
management, estimating, Link which is the ordering • Can interface with
drawing and ordering. program with direct links distributor’s own system for
to Fleming. This Link utilization of existing stock
program can also be used inventory and invoicing
Communication as an electronic price book. (ASCII files)
Although this is separated
with the Factory
into three separate Fleming Link
Through our website, programs, these all interact
we offer our distributors with one another so that • Automated Price Book
the opportunity to you can draw elevations • Allows for automatic Price
communicate with in AVACAD from the Book revisions
Fleming in a number of AVAPROJECT program or • Allows order to be sent
different ways. We provide send all the information electronically to factory
direct E-Mail to factory from either of these • Can separate Stock material
personnel and we provide programs directly to the from Custom components
downloadable technical Fleming Link.
Call or e-mail us today
information when needed
to find out how Fleming
for specification writing or
can help grow your
submittal purposes.
business and make your
company more efficient
and profitable.

1-800-263-7515 10
 Fire Labeling
Fleming has been testing Underwriters’ Laboratories
fire door and frame has developed UL10c, a test
products for nearly 40 standard which addresses
years. Today our listings all the requirements of UBC
are some of the most 7-2 (1997).
comprehensive in the world.
Internationally, the pre-
Fleming’s ongoing test dominant test standards,
programs have yielded a ISO 3008 and BSI 476, have
fully integrated line of been used. These place the
products complying with neutral pressure plane at
national and international one-third of the assembly
standards. Products are height and neither has a
available certified by hose stream test.
Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. (ULI), Underwriters Other changes such as the 13'6" x 12'0" and fire
Laboratories of Canada development of positive rated acoustic, lead-lined
(ULC), Intertek Testing pressure standards by NFPA and detention security
Services/Warnock Hersey or ASTM and the adoption assemblies are but a small
(ITS/WHI), Factory Mutual and enforcement of the portion of the products
Research (FM) and International Building Code available.
Warrington Fire Research (IBC), a single Mode Code
the US, may bring new or Fleming distributors,
(WFR), the most widely under our UL, ULC and
recognized, respected and different requirements into
the marketplace. Fleming is ITS/WHI In-Plant Labeling
accepted labs in the world. Programs can assemble
well prepared for the
Fire test standards have demands of today and and/or modify product
evolved and Building tomorrow. and provide in-shop fire
Codes have changed labeling.
dramatically. Fleming products have been
successfully tested to the Fleming publishes a
Fire doors in North traditional North American comprehensive stand-alone
America, since early 1900s, fire test standards, UL9, catalogue, the “Fire
have been tested to UL10b, UL10b, CAN4-S014, Labeling Specifications,”
ASTM E152, ANSI/NFPA CAN4-S106, ASTM E152, which details the complete
252 and other similar ASTM E163, NFPA 252 range of fire door and
Standards. The neutral and NFPA 257. frame product, available
pressure plane for these has from the factory and our
been located at the top of In addition, Fleming doors stocking distributors.
the assembly and generally and frame products are
requires a hose stream test. certified for compliance
with the new positive
The International pressure requirements
Conference of Building under the Uniform
Officials (ICBO) adopted Building Code (UBC),
and published a positive the International Building
pressure fire test, UBC 7-2, Code (IBC) and for
for the Uniform Building international markets to
Code (UBC) in 1997. This UBC 7-2 (1997), UL10c,
standard requires the ISO 3008 and BSI 476.
neutral pressure plane to
be located 40" from the Fire doors and frames
bottom of the assembly and to 8'0" x 10'0" at 3 hour,
requires a hose stream for temperature rise rated
all tests 3/4 hour and doors, sidelight and
longer in duration. window assemblies up to

11 www.flemingdoor.com
Hurricane Resistant Doors & Frames
To meet the demands of • Large Missile Impact Doors can be provided
building codes calling Metro-Dade County, PA 201 with glass lites up to
for hurricane resistant - South Florida Building Code, 100 square inches and
products, Fleming has Sections 2309, 2314 and 2315 approved frame anchors
submitted product to the • Cyclic Load include wire or existing
Hurricane Test Laboratory - Metro-Dade County, PA 203 wall types in new or
(HTL) in Florida. This is - South Florida Building Code, existing masonry or
one of the very few labs to Sections 2309, 2314 and 2315 concrete and combina-
be independently certified - SBCCI, SSTD 12-94 tion stud anchors for
by Miami-Dade County, • Structural Loading, Air and steel or wood stud and
AAMA, the Texas Water Infiltration and Forced drywall partitions.
Department of Insurance Entry
and the Southern - Metro-Dade County, PA 202
Building Code Congress - ASTM E283, E331 and E330
International (SBCCI), - South Florida Building Code,
requiring strict adherence Section 3603.2(b)5
to nationally recognized
test methods established Assemblies certified up to
by ASTM, AAMA, NWWDA 4'0" x 8'0" singles with
and UL. cylindrical or mortise locks
or rim exit devices are
Fleming doors and frames permitted. Pairs to 8'0" x
with design pressures up 8'0" with cylindrical or
to 90 pfs (+ and -) have mortise locks and flush
been tested successfully bolts, rim exit devices with
for compliance with the removable hollow metal
following hurricane and mullions or surface vertical
wind-borne debris related rod devices are approved.
standards:

Customized Specifications
Fleming’s unique “no provide you with proprietary
charge” specification or non-proprietary specifica-
writing service is another tions as you wish.
way we strive to provide
the Architectural market All Fleming specifications
with the most up-to-date, are available in a multitude
appropriate, and accurate of electronic formats to suit
specifications possible. your needs and are usually
Whether your needs are completed within 24 hours
for specifications that are of request.
project specific, building To obtain more information
type specific or an office on this service simply contact
master, Fleming can pro- Fleming’s Customer Service
duce to your requirements. or Technical Service
Our simplified questionnaire Department.
can be easily answered in
minutes and is used to

1-800-263-7515 12
 Galvanneal Steel
All hollow metal doors produced from the identical • The galvanneal process begins
and frames manufactured base cold rolled steel, which in the Hot Strip Mill where a
in North America are conforms to ASTM A366. billet is reduced in thickness
to a coil of steel.

HOT STRIP MILL

The hot rolled steel, meet- to reduce it to the exact A366. It is then recoiled or
ing ASTM A569, is then thickness required, the slit in to sheets
moved to a Cold Strip Mill edges are trimmed for
where it is uncoiled, pick- tension leveling and the • It is how the cold-rolled
led, cleaned and rinsed. product is oiled to prevent steel is further processed
The steel is heated, passed rusting of the now Cold that creates galvanized and
through dimensioning rolls Rolled Steel, meeting ASTM paintable galvanneal.

COLD STRIP MILL

For galvanneal and galva- of mechanical wipers. For through a chromate and
nized steel, the cold-rolled galvanneal, the excess phosphate passivation
coil is processed through a molten zinc is removed wash to retard storage
Galvanizing Mill. It is using air knives. The gal- stain. Finally both galva-
uncoiled, degreased and vanneal coil enters an nized and galvanneal steels
run into a continuous hot- annealing furnace and are recoiled or slit into
dip zinc coating bath. For heat converts the zinc coat- sheet stock.
galvanized steel the free ing to a zinc-iron alloy.
zinc is removed by a series Next the galvanneal goes

GALVANNEAL MILL
13 www.flemingdoor.com
Paintable Galvanneal Steel
One of the many things The seasonal North corrosion resistance
that separates Fleming American climate varying and finish paint film
from its competition is the from hot and humid to cold adhesion.
material from which our freezing rain and snow
Fleming backs these
products are manufactured. proved to be a formidable
claims with the only
As a standard, Fleming challenge to any material.
10-Year Rust Perforation
products are manufactured Also, steel doors and frames
and Finished Paint Film
from Paintable Galvanneal, are generally subjected to
Adhesion Warranty in
a Hot Dipped Galvanized the worst climatic and
the industry today. Most
Steel rather than Cold environmental conditions
manufacturers charge a
Rolled Steel with factory while on the job site prior
premium in cost and an
applied primers. to installation and finish
increase in lead times
painting; hence the reason
Galvanneal was developed for a galvanized product.
for using Paintable
for the automotive industry With Fleming you get a
Galvanneal.
by the steel mills to combat product that is competi-
the ravaging effects of Paintable Galvanneal is tively priced with cold
corrosion most common on a Hot Dipped Galvanized, rolled steel, the added
vehicles in the 1960s. specially processed steel protection of hot dipped
Today, North American that receives a mill coating galvanizing, superior
manufacturers of auto- of chromate and phosphate finished paint film
mobiles use Galvanneal or at the steel mill to ensure adhesion, and on-time
a sister product Galvalume the maximum in finish delivery.
for all body parts below paint adhesion and low Note: For a copy of the ASTM
the splash rail. Fleming maintenance operation. Corrosion Resistance and Finished
pioneered the use of Independent laboratory Paint Film Adhesion test reports
or Fleming's industry leading
Galvanneal in the steel testing to strict ASTM test
10-Year Rust Perforation and
door and frame industry criteria has proven that Finished Paint Film Adhesion
over 25 years ago for the Fleming Paintable Warranty, please contact your
same reasons as the Galvanneal Steel outper- local Fleming Distributor or
automotive industry, in forms traditional cold Fleming’s customer service
department directly.
that the most troublesome rolled and factory primed
complaint was that of rust. painted with regard to

10
TY
YE

A
N

R
WA R R A

Rust Perforation &

Paint Adhesion

1-800-263-7515 14
 Fleming
Offering a total manufacturing, supply and service support network, Fleming combines the
efficiencies of standardization with the versatility of custom requirements to provide a
guaranteed approach to satisfying construction and other industry needs in steel doors
and frames.

Factory trained distributors are located throughout North America and the world to
provide you with the expertise you require in the door, frame and hardware industry.
These distributors also have licensed fabrication shops to ensure you get your
product as efficiently, professionally and as quickly as possible.

Please contact Fleming or an Authorized Fleming Distributor today to fulfill all your
Hollow Metal needs.

Head Office
Fleming
20 Barr Road
Ajax, Ontario, Canada
L1S 3X9
T • 905-683-3667
F • 905-427-1668
1 (800) 263-7515
E-mail: [email protected]

Warehouses

Vancouver Chicago
S.W. Fleming Ltd. Distributors Warehouse Midwest
2340 Viscount Way, Suite 101 1765-H Courtland Ct.
Richmond, B.C. Addison, Illinois
V6V 1N1 60101
T • 604-278-3785 T • 888-309-9089
F • 604-278-0527 F • 630-458-1581

Boston Dallas Tampa Bay

Designed and Produced by SUTTON JAVELIN Communications Printed in Canada

Wholesale Distribution Inc. Quick Draw Southwest R & S Manufacturers Representatives

44 Green River Way 11220 Gemini Lane 12632 - 59th Way North
Watertown, Massachusetts Dallas, Texas Clearwater, Florida
02272-0313 75229 33760
T • 617-923-9700 T • 972-406-9085 T • 727-535-2020
F • 617-923-4489 F • 972-406-9084 F • 727-539-8810

Authorized Fleming Distributor

 On-line technical support
On-line technical services - ready to assist, advise or consult on technical issues, compliance and customized specifications.
Plus our no charge specification writing service for the most accurate, appropriate, up to date specifications possible.

e-business package
Quote, order and track 24/7 with our exclusive e-business package

FIRE LABELING SPECIFICATIONS

99% on time delivery
HOLLOW METAL FIRE DOORS
Proven 99% on-time shipping. Fully integrated ordering package ensures order accuracy and onsite delivery schedules. FIRE DOOR FRAMES AND TRANSOM FRAMES
FIRE WINDOWS AND SIDELIGHT FRAMES

Best lead times

Real time state-of-the-art production and planning affords Fleming the best lead times with zero back order policy.

For Additional Information Contact

Your Local Authorized Fleming Distributor

or Technical Services, Fleming Door Products, Ajax

20 Barr Road, Ajax, Ontario L1S 3X9 Tel: 1-800-263-7515 Fax: 1-905-427-1668
email:[email protected] www.flemingdoor.com

ISO
N AT I O N A L A S S O C I AT I O N O F
ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS
��������������������������
� � � � � � � � � � �
9001:2000 DHI
���������������
� � � � � � � � �
CANADIAN
STEEL DOOR
MANUFACTURERS
ASSOCIATION

All conditions not covered on Pages 4 to 15 must comply with UL file Number R8930 and WHI Reference Number L14896 for Hollow Metal Fire Doors and must be installed in accordance with NFPA 80. All
Conditions not covered on Pages 16 to 31 must comply with UL File Number R8931 and WHI Reference Number L14896 for Fire Door Frames, Transoms, Sidelights and Windows, the Standard for Fire Door
Frames, UL 63, and must be installed in accordance with NFPA 80. Constructions designated with “IPLP” (In-Plant Labelling Program) may be labeled be either Fleming Door Products Ltd. or Authorized Fleming
Distributors under Follow-Up Service Procedures or Factory Audit Manuals issued by Underwriters Laboratories or Warnock Hersey. Constructions not carrying the IPLP designation must be factory labeled by
Fleming Door Products Ltd,. Ajax. Field application of fire door or frame product labels is not permitted except under UL or WHI Special Field Inspection Programs. Contact Technical Services, Ajax, for further
PRINTED IN CANADA IMPRIMÉ AU CANADA

information. This publication, developed by Fleming Door Products Ltd. to provide guidance on the fire rating of commercial steel door and frame products, contains advisory information only and is provided
as a public service. A continuous Research and Development Program is in place, therefore Fleming Door Products Ltd. reserves the right to incorporate changes at any time, without notice and disclaims all
liability of any kind for the use or adaptation of the materials contained herein. Revision 10

All materials are copyright protected and cannot be copied or reproduced without the express consent of the author.
An ASSA ABLOY Group Company An ASSA ABLOY Group Company
CONTENTS
Contents ................................................................................... 1 Fleming Fire Door Frame Product Requirements
Fleming Door Series Descriptions ............................................ 1 Standard Frame Constructions ......................................... 19
Introduction ............................................................................... 2 Frame Material ............................................................. 19
General Requirements - Fire Door Assemblies Sizes ........................................................................... 19
Over-View, Code and Listing Organization Requirements .... 2 Hardware Preparations ................................................ 19
Definitions ........................................................................... 2 Anchorage ......................................................................... 19
Wall Versus Fire Door Assembly Ratings ............................. 2 New Unit Masonry Partitions ......................................... 20
Assembly Rating Requirements .......................................... 3 Existing Partitions ........................................................ 20
Fire Test Methods ................................................................ 3 Drywall Partitions ......................................................... 20
In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP) ......................................... 4 Profile Requirements ......................................................... 21
Maximum Door Sizes by Rating and Construction Hollow Metal Removable Mullions ...................................... 22
2 and 3 Hour Fire Doors - Table 2 ........................................ 4 Assembly Methods ............................................................ 22
1/3, 1/2, 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 Hour Fire Doors - Table 3 .............. 5 Available Options ............................................................... 22
Fleming Fire Door Requirements Non-Standard Frame Constructions .................................. 23
Standard Door Constructions .............................................. 6 Knocked-Down Slip-On (DW-Series) ........................... 23
Face Sheet Material ....................................................... 6 Double Egress ............................................................. 23
Sizes ............................................................................. 6 Contra-Swing ............................................................... 23
Core Materials ................................................................ 6 Multi-Opening ............................................................... 23
Vertical Edge Seam Construction ................................... 6 Dutch ........................................................................... 23
Hardware Preparations .................................................. 6 Frame with Panel Above Door ...................................... 23
Fleming Glazing Kits ............................................................ 7 Adjustable Jamb Depth (A-Series) ................................ 24
3rd Party Glazing Kits ........................................................... 7 Stainless Steel ............................................................. 24
Glazing Materials ................................................................. 7 Clad ............................................................................. 24
Fire Door Louvers and Preparations .................................... 8 Lead-Lined ................................................................... 24
Fleming Astragals (Flat Bar and Z Types) ............................ 8 Acoustic (SF-Series) .................................................... 25
Non-Standard Door Constructions ....................................... 9 Detention Security ........................................................ 25
Double Egress ............................................................... 9 Bullet-Resistant (BR-Series) ........................................ 25
Rabbetted Top Cap ........................................................ 9 Transom, Sidelight and Window Frames ........................... 25
Dutch Doors .................................................................. 9 Maximum Over All Unit Sizes - Table 10 ....................... 25
Temperature Rise Rated ............................................... 10 Glazed Frame Product ................................................. 26
Stainless Steel .............................................................. 10 Paneled Frame Product ............................................... 26
Clad .............................................................................. 10 2 & 3 Hour Transom Frames ........................................ 26
Lead-Lined .................................................................... 11 1 & 1-1/2 Hour Transoms, Sidelights & Windows ......... 26
Acoustic ........................................................................ 11 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour Transoms, Sidelights & Windows ......... 27
Detention Security ......................................................... 11 Other Restrictions and Requirements ............................... 27
Bullet-Resistant ............................................................. 11 Labeled Glazing Materials for Frame Product-Table 1.... 28-31
Other Restrictions and Requirements ................................ 11 Labels .................................................................................... 31
Labeled Glazing Materials for Fire Doors - Table 4 ....... 12-15 Fleming Fire Door Labels ..................................................... 32
Handing Terminology ................................................................ 15 Fleming Frame Product Labels ............................................ 33
Frame Product Definitions ....................................................... 16 Hardware Requirements - Fire Doors & Frame Product
Maximum Frame Rabbet Sizes by Rating & Construction General ............................................................................. 34
2 & 3 Hour Frames & Transoms - Table 5 ........................... 16 Hinges and Pivots .............................................................. 34
1 & 1-1/2 Hour Frame Product - Table 6 ............................. 17 Self-Latching Devices and Strikes ..................................... 34
1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour Frame Product - Table 7 ....................... 18 Self-Closing Devices ......................................................... 35
Coordinators ...................................................................... 35
Door Viewers ..................................................................... 35
3rd Party Astragals, Gaskets, Door Seals & Door Bottoms ... 36
Referenced Standards & Publications ..................................... 36
Index ..................................................................................... 37
Fleming Door Series Descriptions
BR-Series Fully Welded, Welded Vertical Steel Stiffeners and Fiberglass Core, Bullet-Resistant Reinforced Face Door
CW-Series Fully Welded, Seamless Edge, Honeycomb, Polystyrene or Polyisocyanurate Core Door
D-Series Lock Seam, Honeycomb, Polystyrene or Polyisocyanurate Core Door
DSS-Series Lock Seam, Polystyrene Core, Stainless Steel Door
E-Series Lock Seam, Polystyrene Core, 6 Panel Embossed Face Sheet Door
H-Series Fully Welded, Seamless Edge, Welded Vertical Steel Stiffeners and Fiberglass Core Door
LD-Series Lock Seam, Honeycomb and Lead-Lined Composite Core Door
S-Series Fully Welded, Welded Vertical Steel Stiffeners and Fiberglass Core Detention SecurityDoor
SD-Series Lock Seam, Composite Sound Core Door
SL-Series Visible Center Seam, Polystyrene Core, Textured Wood Grain, Stained Face Sheet Door
SLE-Series Visible Center Seam, Polystyrene Core, Textured Wood Grain, Stained 6 Panel Embossed Face Sheet Door
TR-Series Lock Seam, Temperature Rise Rated Core Door
TRE-Series Lock Seam, Temperature Rise Rated Core, 6 Panel Embossed Face Sheet Door
TRSL-Series Visible Center Seam, Temperature Rise Rated Core, Textured Wood Grain, Stained Face Sheet Door

1
 INTRODUCTION
Fleming's "Fire Labeling Specifications" is intended to assist de- This publication has been formatted by recognized product
sign, specification and related professionals involved in commer- groups; hollow metal fire doors, frames, transom frames, side-
cial, industrial, institutional and detention security construction light and window assemblies. Each group is further detailed by
throughout North America. It provides a definitive source of infor- hourly rating. From the applicable building code, determine the
mation regarding fire labeled steel doors and frame product. required rating, locate the appropriate product group and select
The information contained in this publication has been compiled the construction/series/gage best suited.
from testing authority listings, procedures and policies, NFPA 101, All sizes referenced in this document are nominal. Imperial
the "Life Safety Code", NFPA 80, "Fire Doors and Windows", indus- (inch-pound) values are dominant followed by the correspond-
try and National Standards. ing hard metric (millimeter-gram) value in parenthesis. Impe-
This document was first published in 1983. This 2004 edition, the rial values are expressed in inches, unless shown otherwise.
10th revision, has been updated extensively to reflect the evolution Metric sizes are given in millimeters (mm), unless indicated
of code and test requirements, as well as the products now avail- otherwise. Imperial and hard metric sizes are not equal.
able to meet these demands. Users are encouraged to direct inquiries relating to application
Sections have been added to review and clarify Code and Listing or fire labeling to your local authorized Fleming distributor, or
Organization fire test methods, Fleming's UL and WHI distributor Bud Bulley, Manager, Technical Services - Ajax.
In-Plant Labeling Programs (IPLP) and Fleming's labels. Throughout this document references are made to the Fleming
As well, several tables have been incorporated to detail the require- Technical Manual, available on our web-site, www.flemingdoor.com.
ments and the availability of labeled glazing materials permitted in Additional copies of the "Fire Labeling Specifications" and our "Tech-
Fleming's products. nical Manual" (each in hard copy or pdf-format CD versions), are
Finally, a new section, devoted entirely to hardware, as it relates to available free of charge by contacting us directly.
fire doors and frame product, has been included. Continue = Comments on this publication are gratefully appreciated.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - FIRE DOOR ASSEMBLIES

Over-View, Code and Listing Organization Requirements Wall Versus Fire Door Assembly Ratings
1. Although applicable to all steel doors and frames, for the 3. The fire protection rating of a fire door assembly is deter-
purposes of this publication, the requirements detailed in mined by the fire resistance rating of the wall in which it will
this section are intended to be specific to Fleming labeled be installed and the regulatory requirements of the govern-
product only, regardless of construction, size, rating or list- ing building code. Code requirements are based on the
ing authority and are applicable in all North American juris- uses or 'occupancies' within the building, the specific loca-
dictions. tion in the building and the potential fire hazards in that
Definitions particular area.
2. For fire-rated doors, frame product, hardware, glazing ma- 4. NFPA 101, the "Life Safety Code", outlines the typical rela-
terials and other "opening" related accessories, the follow- tionship between opening location, fire resistance rating of
ing terms are defined: the wall and fire protection rating required for the fire door
assembly, as shown in Table 1. See NFPA 101, Article
Listed - A product tested or evaluated for reasonably fore-
8.2.3.2.3. Building codes and local by-laws may have dif-
seeable risks associated with the product.
ferent requirements, which supercede NFPA-101.
Classified - A product tested or evaluated for; a specific risk
(or risks); performance under specified conditions; or regula- Table 1
tory codes. Opening Location
Fire Resistance Fire Protection Rating -
Rating - Wall Fire Door Assembly
Labeled - A product 'Listed' or 'Classified' by an accredited
organization and bearing the Mark, Logo or Symbol of that Openings which separate
buildings or divide a single 4 Hours 3 Hours
organization as verification of on-going inspection and com- building into fire areas
pliance with the required Standard performance criteria. Openings in; enclosures
Listings - A published directory (printed or electronic), detail- of vertical communication
ing products 'Listed' or 'Classified' by an accredited organi- (stairwells or elevator
shafts) or; exterior walls 2 Hours 1-1/2 Hours
zation, acceptable to the 'Authority Having Jurisdiction'. UL's
subject to severe fire
"Fire Resistance Directories", and WHI's "Directory of Listed exposure from outside
Products", are examples of 'Listings'. Neither this docu- the building
ment nor manufacturer’s catalogues are considered 'List- Openings between
1 Hour 1 Hour
ings'. occupancies
Authority Having Jurisdiction - The individual or entity re- Openings in; corridor and
room partitions or;
sponsible for approving equipment, installation or proce- exterior walls subject to
dure and/or enforcement of code, by-law or other regulatory 1 Hour 3/4 Hour
light to moderate fire
requirements. exposure from outside
Fire Door Assembly - The combination of labeled compo- the building
Openings where smoke
nents; door, frame product, hardware, glazing trim, glazing
control is the primary
materials, accessories and their installation, used to pro- consideration or;
tect an opening in a wall. Building codes and regulatory between a habitable
1/3 Hour
organizations have developed other terms to describe this room and a corridor
(No Hose Stream - US)
concept, such as 'closures' or 'opening-protectives'. when the wall has a fire 1 Hour
(With Hose Stream -
resistance rating not
Frame Product - The term used to describe as a single Canada)
more than 1 hour or;
group; frames, transom, sidelight and window assemblies. across corridors where a
See Page 16 for descriptions of each. smoke partition is
required
Non-Rated - No fire protection rating.
Continue g 2
5. The governing building code specifies both the fire pro- 15. US codes requiring traditional/negative pressure testing
tection rating (FPR) and any temperature rise rating (TRR) specify Test Standards; UL10B, UL9, NFPA 252 and/or
that may be required on doors. Required ratings include; NFPA 257. Canadian codes; CAN4-S104 and/or CAN4-
· 1/3, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 2 and 3 hour FPR with no TRR required S106.
(ie; the TRR is greater than 650°F (343°C) at 30 Min- 16. US codes requiring compliance with positive pressure
utes) testing reference UL10C, UBC 7-2 (1997) and/or UBC 7-
· 3/4, 1-1/2 and 3 hour FPR with 250°F (121°C), 450°F 4 (1997). (These test methods are not used in Canada.)
(232°C) or 650°F (343°C) at 30 Minutes TRR (for the US 17. A category system has been developed jointly by UL and
only) WHI to differentiate product types by application and the re-
· 3/4 and 1-1/2 hour FPR with 250°C (482°C) at 30 Min- quirements for use in positive pressure jurisdictions. All
utes TRR (for Canada only) Fleming labeled doors are Category A - "Fire Doors Not
· 1-1/2 and 3 hour FPR with 250°C (482°C) at 60 Minutes Requiring Additional Components" to be positive pressure
TRR (for Canada only) labeled. Fleming doors and frame product do not require
6. The project Architect is responsible for building compart- gaskets of any kind for positive pressure compliance. Refer
mentalization and the determination and scheduling of; to the Fleming Technical Manual for additional details on the
· Fire test methodology (traditional/negative versus posi- category system.
tive pressure) 18. Hollow metal frame products have also been evaluated for
· Fire protection ratings positive pressure and have been found to have no affect on
· Temperature rise ratings the performance of the assembly under these test meth-
· Smoke and draft control ratings ods. Frame products are therefore not required to be
7. Distributors must ensure the product, as specified, detailed labeled for positive pressure.
and/or scheduled by the Architect, is eligible prior to order- 19. As well, the following products have also been evaluated
ing factory labeling, or applying labels themselves. Ineligible and found to not adversely affect fire protection perfor-
product cannot be labeled. See Page 32, Item 616 for mance under positive pressure testing. Labels applied
additional information. to them are not required to include any reference to the
8. Enforcement of building code, by-law or other regulatory positive pressure test standards;
requirements are the responsibility of the Authority Hav- · Hinges (except as described in Page 34, Item 630)
ing Jurisdiction. · Electric strikes (See Pg 35, Items 675 and 676)
Assembly Rating Requirements · Single-point locks or latches (See Pg 34, Items 643 - 648)
9. A fire door assembly's rating requires that each of its com- · Fire exit devices (See Pgs 34 & 35, Items 652 - 667)
ponents (door, frame product, hardware and when speci- · Flush or surface bolts (See Pgs 34 & 35, Items 649,
fied, glazing trim, glazing materials, louvers and any other 650, 668-671)
accessories) is fire labeled, installed and maintained in 20. In the US, fire doors may also be tested and labeled for
accordance with their individual listings, NFPA 101 and 'Smoke and Draft Control'. These are separate tests and
NFPA 80. If a required component is omitted, is not la- requirements from fire testing. The test methods used are
beled, or is not installed or maintained in accordance UL1784, UBC 7-2 Part 2 (1997) or NFPA 105.
with its listing, NPFA 101 or NFPA 80, it renders the entire 21. Fire door labels certifying compliance with these Standards
assembly non-rated. must include the symbol S .
10. Fleming fire door and frame product labels may be ap- 22. Fleming fire doors, like all others, must utilize Category H -
plied only at the factory, or the facilities of UL or WHI ap- "Labeled Smoke and Draft Control Gaskets", and be installed
proved distributors in Fleming's In-Plant Labeling Pro- in UL or WHI labeled steel frame product to comply with the
gram (IPLP). See Page 4, Items 28 to 32 for additional smoke and draft control requirements. Frame product must
information. utilize positive pressure labeled doors. Doors and frame
11. The field application of fire door or frame product labels product must be installed in accordance with their 'Instal-
or the field modification of labeled doors or frame product lation Instructions'. For Fleming products, one (1) copy
is not permitted except under UL or WHI Special Field should be provided with each set of submittal/shop draw-
Inspection Programs. See the Fleming Technical Manual ings and another copy must be included with the Bill of
or contact Fleming Technical Services - Ajax, for additional Lading with each shipment. See the Fleming Technical
information on these Programs. Manual for Installation Instructions.
12. The following are not considered field modifications and 23. Smoke and draft control performance is a function of the
are therefore permitted to be performed on site; door and gaskets, not the hollow metal frame product. There-
· Drilling of function holes for locks and fire exit devices fore hollow metal frame products are not required to be la-
· Drilling of 3/4" (19) diameter holes (maximum) for labeled beled for smoke and draft control.
door viewers 24. For detailed descriptions of these Test Standards, refer to
· Drilling and tapping required to mount labeled hardware the Fleming Technical Manual.
· The installation of astragals, labeled hardware, gaskets,
glazing materials and other labeled accessories 25. Products labeled for positive pressure fire testing also com-
· The installation of labeled fire door louvers in prepared ply with and are eligible for labeling to the traditional/negative
door openings as described on Page 8, Items 120 to 134 pressure fire test standards.
· The installation of labeled 3rd party glazing kits in prepared 26. Products labeled only to the traditional/negative pressure
door openings as described on Page 7, Items 94 to 101 standards, except as noted in Item 19, are not eligible in posi-
Fire Test Methods tive pressure applications.
13. Two types of fire tests for fire door assemblies are recog- 27. When positive pressure doors by others are required for
nized in North America; 'traditional/negative' and 'positive' Fleming frame product, they must be;
pressure. · UL or WHI labeled Category 'A' or 'B' fire doors
14. Fleming fire doors and frame product are labeled for compli- · Installed in accordance with the installation instructions
ance to both types and all of the Standards referenced in provided with the door, and
Items 15 and 16. · Any Category G - "Edge Sealing'' systems required for
Continue = the door must be installed
3
 In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP) · Installation of flush steel top and bottom caps
28. Fleming distributors authorized by UL and/or WHI under · Under-sizing of doors to suit non-standard heights
this program, order eligible doors, frame components, an- 31. Permitted frame modifications are;
chors and accessories from the factory. These may then · Assembly of combinations of jambs, heads, mullions,
be modified and/or assembled at the distributor’s shop center rails, corner posts and sills into finished product
within the program limitations and the specified label then · Welding-in of captive anchors (as required)
applied. Only those "Constructions" identified with the · Welding-in of closer reinforcing
"IPLP" suffix on Pages 4 and 5 (for doors) and 16 to 18 (for · Preparation for field splices
frame product) are eligible under this program. · Preparation for and installation of panels and glazing
29. Distributors under this program are subject to unan- stops
nounced on-going inspections by UL and/or WHI to verify · Preparation and installation of approved alternate hinge,
compliance with the program requirements. strike and other hardware reinforcing
30. Permitted door modifications include; 32. Constructions not included in this program must be provided
· Preparation and/or installation of Fleming glazing kits from the factory;
· Preparation for and/or installation of labeled 3rd party glaz- · Prepared for all hardware
ing kits and fire door louvers · With fire label applied
· Tack-welding of vertical edge seams · For doors;
· Conversion from visible to seamless edge seams · Fleming glazing kits installed, or
· Preparation and installation of Fleming internal lock edge · Prepared for labeled 3rd party glazing kits
reinforcing channels for double egress applications · Prepared for labeled fire door louvers
· Preparation and installation of approved alternate lock, · For frame product;
strike, hinge and other hardware reinforcing · Factory assembled (if SUW required)
· Installation of in-fill panels Continue =

Tables 2 and 3 provide detail relating to maximum nominal door sizes for Fleming fire doors by rating and construction. The sizes
indicated are those permitted by UL and WHI respectively and the limitations indicated in Item 44, Page 6.
Table 2
2 and 3 Hour Fleming Fire Doors
Notes (See Pages 6-12 and 31-33)
Maximum Rabbet Sizes (Items in ( ) are applicable to all Constructions unless noted)
(43-45)

Construction
Typical

(43,47,49)
Construction Series

643-677)
Astragals
Materials

(135-151
691-692)
Latching

(76-119)

Specific
Glazing
(57,59)
Door

Edges

(70,72
Cores

Notes
Sizes
(33-39) Gage UL WHI
Elevations

Singles Pairs Singles Pairs

CW14 36" x 120" 72" x 120" - -

(900 x 3050) (1800 x 3050)
or or
D16, D18 48" x 108" 96" x 108" 48" x 96" 96" x 96" 53
CW16, CW18 (1250 x 2750) (2450 x 2750) (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450)
48" x 96" 96" x 96" 44
Standard D20 - - 60
(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 76
(IPLP) 64
44" x 84" 88" x 84" 44" x 84" 88" x 84" 40 643 94
E18
(1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) (1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) 675 103
54 135 33-75
44" x 84" 88" x 84" 663-666
E20 - - 142 120-134
(1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150)
D18/20-8 36" x 84" 72" x 84"
- - 50 53
(1-3/8") (900 x 2150) (1800 x 2150)
H12,H14 48" x 120" 96" x 120" 48" x 120" 96" x 120" 51
55 61
H16 (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050) (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050) 52
Standard SL16,SL18 48" x 96" 96" x 96" 48" x 96" 96" x 96"
43
SL20 (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 58 80
42 54
SLE18 36" x 84" 72" x 84" 36" x 84" 72" x 84" 44 62 71 103
SLE20 (900 x 2150) (1800 x 2150) (900 x 2150) (1800 x 2150) 47 663-666
44" x 84" 88" x 84" 44" x 84" 88" x 84" 142 103
TRE18 44 59
Temperature (1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) (1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) 40 192 643 193
64
Rise TR18 188 192 675 193 186-197
Rated 48" x 96" 96" x 96" 48" x 96" 96" x 96" 663-666 80
TRSL16 43 58
(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 42 143
TRSL18 62 103
CW14 72" x 120" -
(1800 x 3050)
or 72" x 120" 64
D16, D18 (1800 x 3050) 161 152-
CW16, CW18 96" x 108"
Double (2450 x 2750) or 154
Egress 96" x 108" 44
D20 - 94
(IPLP) (2450 x 2750) 142
40 156 103
88" x 84" 88" x 84" 157
E18 159
(2250 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) 64
- - 162 152-165
88" x 84" 152
E20 -
(2250 x 2150)
H12,H14 96" x 120" 96" x 120" 51 61
163
H16 (2450 x 3050) (2450 x 3050) 52 152
Double SL16,SL18 96" x 96" 96" x 96"
Egress 80
SL20 (2450 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 58 143 71
42 44 54 103
SLE18 72" x 84" 72" x 84" 62 157 156
159
SLE20 (1800 x 2150) (1800 x 2150)
Detention S12 42" x 86" 42" x 86" 51 255-
- - 40 55 61 - 252 251-259
Security S14 (1100 x 2200) (1100 x 2200) 253 257

4
 Table 3
1/3 (With or Without Hose Stream), 1/2, 3/4, 1 and 1-1/2 Hour Fleming Fire Doors

Maximum Rabbet Sizes Notes (See Pages 6-12 and 31-33)

(Items in ( ) are applicable to all Constructions unless noted)
(43-45)

Construction
Typical Construction

(43,47,49)

Astragals
Series

Materials

678-679)
(135-151

630-664)
Latching

(76-119)

Specific
Glazing
(57,59)
Door

Edges

(70,72
Cores

Notes
Sizes
(33-39) Gage UL WHI
Elevations
Singles Pairs Singles Pairs

CW14 36” x 120” 72” x 120” - - 60

(900 x 3050) (1800 x 3050) 64
or or 36” x 120” 72” x 120” 60
D16, D18 96” x 108”
48” x 108” (900 x 3050) (1800 x 3050) 53 64
CW16, CW18 (2450 x 2750)
(1250 x 2750) or or 74
42” x 86” 84” x 86” 48” x 108” 96” x 108” 44 60
Standard D20
(1100 x 2200) (2200 x 2200) (1250 x 2750) (2450 x 2750) 64 138-140 73
76
(IPLP) 142 630
44” x 84” 88” x 84” 40 94
E18 54 650
(1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) 44” x 84” 88” x 84” 103
662 33-75
42" x 84" 84" x 84" (1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150)
E20 53 64 120-134
(1100 x 2150) (2200 x 2150)
D18/20-8 36” x 84” 72” x 84”
- - 50 54
(1-3/8”) (900 x 2150) (1800 x 2150)
H12 48” x 120" 96” x 120” 48” x 120” 96” x 120” 51
55 61
H14,H16 (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050) (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050) 52
SL16,SL18 48” x 96” 96” x 96” 48” x 96” 96” x 96”
Standard 43 137 73
SL20 (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 58 80
42 54
SLE18 36” x 84” 72” x 84” 36” x 84” 72” x 84” 44 62 71 103
SLE20 (900 x 2150) (1800 x 2150) (900 x 2150) (1800 x 2150) 47 73
44” x 84” 88” x 84” 44” x 84” 88” x 84” 138-140
TRE18 40 44 59 73
Temperature (1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) (1150 x 2150) (2250 x 2150) 142 80
64 630
Rise TR18 188 192 103 186-197
48” x 96” 96” x 96” 650
Rated TRSL16 42 43 58 143 193
(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 662
TRSL18 62 192
Stainless 48” x 96” 96” x 96” 44” x 86” 59 630,650
DSS18 198 43 201 199 200 198-204
Steel (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) (1150 x 2200) 60 662
H12,H14 - 205- 43 73
210 61 213-
H16 48” x 96” 207 205 211 630
Clad 215 205-225
D16, D18 (1250 x 2450) 219- 207 59 212 650
223
CW16, CW18 221 208 209 60 662
36” x 96” 36” x 96” 244-
Acoustic SD16 236 238 240 247 236-250
(900 x 2450) 72” x 96” (900 x 2450) 72” x 96” 248
or or 40 43
(1800 x 2450) (1800 x 2450) 226- 630,650 232
Lead-Lined LD16 48” x 86” 48” x 86” 229 230 226-235
228 662 233
(1250 x 2200) (1250 x 2200)
Bullet- BR16 48” x 96” 48” x 96” 263
262 43 261 - 266 267 260-271
Resistant BR14 (1250 x 2450) (1250 x 2450) 264
- -
Detention S12 42” x 86” 42” x 86” 51 255-
40 55 61 - 252 251-259
Security S14 (1100 x 2200) (1100 x 2200) 253 257
CW14 72” x 120” -
(1800 x 3050) 72” x 120” 64
138-140
D16, D18 or (1800 x 3050) 152
161 142
Double CW16, CW18 96” x 108” or 153
158
Egress (2450 x 2750) 96” x 108” 44 154 94
(IPLP) D20 - (2450 x 2750) 40 156 103
88" x 84" 159
E18 88” x 84” 152 138
- (2250 x 2150) - 162 152-165
(2250 x 2150) 153 158
E20 -
H12 96” x 120” 96” x 120” 51 61
163 158
H14,H16 (2450 x 3050) (2450 x 3050) 52 152
Double SL16,SL18 96" x 96" 96" x 96"
80
Egress SL20 (2450 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 58 143 71
42 44 54 103
SLE18 72" x 84" 72" x 84" 62 157 156
159
SLE20 (1800 x 2150) (1800 x 2150)
D16, D18 48” x 112” 48” x 112”
59
CW16, CW18 (1250 x 2850) (1250 x 2850)
168 60
Door with 42” x 86” 64
D20 42” x 86” 630
Panel - (1100 x 2200) - 40 44 - 170 166-172
(1100 x 2200) 662
Above E20
44” x 84” 59
44” x 84” 169
E18 (1150 x 2150) 64
(1150 x 2150)
SL16 58
42 54
SL18 42” x 86” 62
Dutch 42” x 86”
D16, D18 (1100 x 2200) - - 43 179 174-176 183 173-185
(IPLP) (1100 x 2200) 59
CW16, CW18 40 180 64
D20 -
5
 FLEMING FIRE DOOR REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD DOOR CONSTRUCTIONS Thickness
33. Items 34 to 151 and 272 to 283 are applicable to all Fleming 49. Standard door thickness; 1-3/4" (44.4) except H12 Series,
labeled doors unless indicated otherwise. which are 1-7/8" (47.6) and S-Series which are 2" (50.8).
34. 'Standard' construction refers to single doors or pairs of 50. UL D18 and D20 Series doors are available 1-3/8" (35)
doors (swinging in the same direction) applications only. thick. See Page 34, Item 642 for additional information.
35. The factors determining whether a door is considered a 51. H14 and H16 Series doors are available 1-7/8" (47.6)
Fleming 'Standard' construction (or not) are; specialized and 2" (50.8) thick. UL H and S-Series doors are also
applications; performance based features; or the use of ma- available 2-1/8" (54) and 2-1/4" (57.2) thick.
terials that affect fire performance. 52. H12 Series are available at 1-3/4" (44.4) thick.
36. Preparations for hardware, glass lights, louvers, door thick- Core Materials
ness or fire test methodology do not determine construction 53. For all D and CW-Series fire doors, kraft paper honeycomb
type. is the standard core. Polystyrene (R 6/RSI 1.06) is available.
37. Refer to the Fleming Technical Manual for standard and op- 54. Only polystyrene is available for E, DSS, SL and SLE-
tional features provided or available for each door Series. Series doors.
38. Those constructions not considered ‘Standard’ include; 55. Only vertical stiffeners with fiberglass batt insulation are
· Specialized applications; double egress, dutch or door permitted for S or H-Series fire doors.
with panel above
56. All other Constructions/Series/Gages (TR, TRE, TRSL,
· Performance based; temperature rise, sound, lead-lined,
lead-lined, bullet-resistant and acoustic) utilize proprietary
bullet-resistant, or detention security
cores to achieve their specific performance based re-
· Material based; stainless steel or clad
quirements.
39. All Standard construction doors are intended for use with all
Fleming frames, transom and sidelight frames, unless indi- Vertical Edge Seam Construction
cated otherwise. 57. Hinge and lock edges are beveled 1/8" in 2" (3 in 50) stan-
dard, except SL, SLE and TRSL-Series. Optional square
Face Sheet Material edges are permitted.
40. Standard material for all Constructions/Series/Gages; A40
58. SL, SLE and TRSL-Series are provided with beveled lock
galvanneal (except DSS-Series). Galvanized (G90) is
edge and square hinge edge, standard. Bevel on both edges
available, except for E and TRE-Series doors.
is available on SL and TRSL-Series only.
41. Standard material for DSS-Series; Type 304, 'XL Blend S'
59. All Fleming Standard construction D and DSS-Series doors
(brushed) Finish. Type 304, 'XL Buff' (mirror) and Type 316,
up to 96" (2450) height, E, TRE, TR-Series and doors with
with 'XL Blend S' and 'XL Buff' Finishes available.
panel above are provided with exposed mechanical inter-
42. Standard material for SL, SLE and TRSL-Series is a tex- locking seams at both vertical edges.
tured wood grain, A40 galvanneal with factory-applied stain
60. Labeled D and DSS-Series doors over 96" (2450) height and
and UV-resistant clear coat. Galvanized (G90) is not avail-
all labeled SD and LD-Series doors, must have both vertical
able.
edge seams tack-welded top and bottom, above and below
Sizes each edge cutout and at 12" (305) on center maximum.
43. The sizes indicated on Pages 4 and 5, Tables 2 and 3, re- 61. Bullet-resistant, H, CW and S-Series doors are provided
flect the maximums permitted by UL and WHI, prepared for standard as fully welded and seamless at both vertical edges.
hardware as detailed on Pages 34 to 36, Items 619 to 697
62. SL, SLE and TRSL-Series are provided with an exposed
and within the following recommendations.
center seam on both vertical door edges, standard. Not avail-
44. D16, D18, E18, E20 and CW-Series doors are eligible for able as seamless vertical edge construction.
labeling up to 48" x 120" (1250 x 3050) nominal leaf size.
63. For 1-1/2 hour maximum pairs provided without astragal,
From a recommended application stand-point however,
tack-welded lock edge seams are required. See Page 8,
the following are suggested and reflected on Pages 4 and 5;
Items 138 to 140 for additional information.
· D and CW-Series doors greater than 36" (915) nomi-
nal leaf width should not exceed 108" (2750) height 64. Seamless vertical edges on labeled D, E, TR, TRE, SD,
· Due to material availability, E and TRE-Series doors are doors with panel above and LD-Series doors are available.
limited to 44" x 84" (1150 x 2150) leaf size Seams are tack-welded top and bottom, above and below
· Due to material availability, SLE-Series doors are limited each edge cutout and at 12" (305) on center, body-filled,
to 36" x 84" (900 x 2150) ground smooth and touched-up.
45. There are no minimum nominal leaf sizes imposed from a 65. Rabbetted lock edge pairs, not in a 'means of egress', pre-
fire-labeling standpoint. However, NFPA 101, the "Life Safety pared for surface vertical rod fire exit devices only, are per-
Code", limits doors in a 'means of egress' to a minimum of mitted, except on SL, SLE and TRSL-Series.
32" x 80" (800 x 2030). (See NFPA 101, Articles 7.15, 7.2.1.2 Hardware Preparations
and Annex A.7.2.1 for further reference.) From a manufac- 66. See the Fleming Technical Manual for standard and optional
turing perspective, the following minimum nominal leaf sizes hardware locations and preparations provided or available
apply; for each door series.
· E and SLE-Series; 32" x 80" (815 x 2030) 67. As a minimum, each labeled door must be prepared for
· All other Series; 12" x 24" (305 x 610). hinges, labeled self-latching and self-closing devices. Re-
46. Codes and bylaws may impose additional limitations. fer to Pages 34 to 36, Items 619 to 697 for detailed informa-
47. Maximum undercut on all hollow metal fire doors, standard tion on hardware requirements.
for all Fleming doors (except acoustic doors) and minimum 68. All Fleming doors, (except 1-3/8" (35)), are provided with
for SLE-Series; 3/4" (19). 4-1/2" (114) standard weight (0.134"/3.4) hinge reinforcing,
48. Minimum undercut on all hollow metal fire doors, except SLE- distributor convertible to heavy weight (0.180"/4.6).
Series, recommended undercut on Fleming doors in 4-sided 69. All doors exceeding 96" (2450) height must be prepared
frame product and Acoustic doors; 1/4" (6.4). for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight hinges (minimum).
Continue = Continue g
6
70. Unless indicated otherwise, Fleming labeled doors can 84. No maximums are imposed for stile widths or rail heights.
be prepared for all UL and WHI labeled self-latching de- 85. Fleming glazing kits are permitted in UL labeled 'French-Door'
vices. type applications. See the Fleming Technical Manual for de-
71. Concealed or inset type vertical rod fire exit devices are tails.
not available on SLE-Series doors. 86. Refer to the Fleming Technical Manual for other approved
72. Electro-Lynx wiring harness (or approved conduit) are per- optional Fleming glazing kits.
mitted in Fleming fire doors 1-3/4" (44.4) or thicker, for 87. 'Bridged cutout only' (BRCO) and 'cutout only' (CO) factory
use with fire labeled electic or electronic hardware, up to door options are available for distributors authorized under
the limitations of the hardware manufacturer’s listings.
Fleming’s In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). When BRCO
73. Open-back strikes are permitted in the inactive leaf of 1-1/2 and CO options are ordered the distributor is responsible for
hour pairs of; internal perimeter reinforcing channels that may be required
· Standard construction H, CW, D16, D18, SL16 and for Fleming or 3rd party glazing kits.
SL18 Series doors up to 96" x 96" (2450 x 2450)
88. Distributors not included in Fleming In-Plant Labeling Pro-
· Standard construction E18 Series doors
gram must order doors labeled, with factory installed;
· Standard construction SLE Series doors
· Fleming glazing kits or,
· Standard construction WHI D20 Series doors up to 96" x
· Cut-out with internal perimeter reinforcing channels
96" (2450 x 2450)
(INCNL option) for 3rd party labeled glazing kits
· Standard construction WHI E20 Series doors
89. Double egress, temperature rise rated, labeled non-metallic
74. Maximum height of edge cutout for open-back strike is
clad and detention security door constructions have spe-
5-1/4" (133.4). Lock edge seam only on D and E-Series
cific glazing limitations. Refer to the information provided
doors must be tack-welded top and bottom, immediately
for each construction for details.
above and below each edge cutout and at 6" (150) on
center (maximum). 90. Glass lights may be provided in operable or fixed doors.
75. Reinforcing for surface mounted closers is provided stan- 91. Glazing is not permitted in labeled dutch, louvered, non-me-
dard in all Fleming doors. See Page 35, Items 678 to 682 for tallic clad, acoustic or bullet-resistant doors.
additional information. 92. Round or radiused Fleming glazing kits are not available.
Fleming Glazing Kits 93. Fleming glazing kits are considered 'part of the door' and
76. Fleming snap-in glazing kits are provided standard for are therefore not labeled separately.
1-3/4" (44.4) thick D, E, CW and H-Series doors and are 3rd Party Glazing Kits
for use with labeled glazing materials not exceeding 5/16" 94. Only UL labeled glazing kits, approved for use in hollow metal
(8) thickness. fire doors are permitted in Fleming UL labeled doors. UL or
77. Fleming snap-in kits are eligible for use in both tradi- WHI labeled glazing kits approved for use in hollow metal
tional/negative and positive pressure applications. fire doors may be used in Fleming WHI labeled doors.
78. Fleming snap-in steel glazing kits exceeding nominal 95. For distributors in Fleming's In-Plant Labeling Program,
widths of 30" (765) or nominal heights of 36" (915) must Bridged Cutout Only (BRCO), Cutout Only (CO), or Inner
have removable stops screw-fixed at 8" (200) on center, Channel Reinforcing (INCNL) factory options may be speci-
2" (50) maximum from each end, with #6 x 1-1/2" (38) fied for doors with 3rd party glazing kits. See Item 87 for
sheet metal screws. details. Doors may also be ordered as slab, with all required
79. Minimum nominal light width for Fleming snap-in glazing preparations and reinforcing by the distributor.
kits; 4-1/2" (114). 96. For distributors not in the In-Plant Labeling Program, doors
80. Textured wood grained light kits, stained to match door, for 3rd party glazing kits must be factory ordered as labeled,
are provided for SL, SLE and TRSL Series doors. Trim complete with Inner Channel Reinforcing (INCNL) option.
and stops require inner/outer-reinforcing channels. Stan- 97. 3rd party glazing kits are usually sized based on 'exposed
dard glazing space; 3/8" (9.5) with 5/8", 7/8" and 1-1/8" glass size' rather than 'nominal glass rabbet opening'. Dis-
(15.9, 22.3 and 28.6) available. Removable glazing stops tributors should take this into consideration when ordering
are secured with #6 oval head sheet metal screws. or preparing Fleming doors for such kits.
81. For applications not covered in Items 76 or 80, Fleming 98. 3rd party glazing kits under the joint UL and WHI identification
'thermal glazing kits' (THGLZ), with glazing space as speci- system for positive pressure applications are Category F -
fied by distributor, are provided standard. "Labeled Light Kits", and must be labeled as such to indi-
82. All Fleming glazing kit sizing and locations are based on cate compliance.
the 'nominal glass rabbet opening', not the 'exposed glass 99. Category F labeled light kits are also permitted in traditional/
size'. negative pressure jurisdictions.
83. Minimum recommended nominal lighted door dimensions; 100. Labeled 3rd party glazing kits may be installed on site, in open-
· Stile widths and center rail heights; 6" (150) ings prepared at the factory or prepared by IPLP approved
· Top rail height; 7" (180) distributors.
· Bottom rail height; 6-13/16" (175) 101. Labeled 3rd party glazing kits are not provided or installed
Fleming Snap-In Minimum Recommended by Fleming.
Glazing Kit Lighted Door Dimensions
6" 6" Glazing Materials
(150) (150)
102. Glazing materials are investigated to the same test stan-
dards as fire door and window assemblies for fire protec-
(180)
7"

tion only, unless specifically indicated otherwise in their

Width or Height
Nominal Light

5" (8) Max

16
individual listings.
Glazing
103. UL labeled glazing materials are required in UL labeled
(150)

Thickness
6"

doors. UL or WHI labeled glazing materials may be used

in WHI labeled doors.
(175)
613"
16

104. Labeled glazing materials must have a fire protection rating

at least equal to that of the door in which it will be installed.
7 Continue = Continue g
105. Except as indicated in Item 91, refer to Table 4, Pages 12 127. Perimeter of louver cutout must be provided with internal
to 15 for a summary of labeled glazing materials eligible reinforcing channels. See the Fleming Technical Manual
for use in Fleming's UL and WHI fire doors. for additional information.
106. Labeled glazing materials up to 5/16" (8) thick can be 128. Fleming fire doors may be prepared for labeled louvers
used with Fleming snap-in glazing kits, unless indicated by the factory or distributors under Fleming's In-Plant La-
otherwise in the glazing manufacturer's listings. beling Program (IPLP).
107. When labeled glazing materials exceeding 5/16" (8) thick- 129. Distributors not included in the Fleming In-Plant Labeling
ness are specified, Fleming’s 'thermal glazing kits' (THGLZ) Program must order labeled doors complete with factory pre-
are provided, except on SL, SLE and TRSL-Series doors, pared louver cutout and inner perimeter reinforcing chan-
unless distributor ordered otherwise or required by the glaz- nels (INCNL option) installed.
ing manufacturer's listings. 130. Louvers may be installed by the distributor or in the field when
108. When other than 7/16" (11.1) glazing space for 5/16" (8) the door is prepared and labeled as indicated in Items 120 to
maximum glazing is required, distributor must specify glaz- 132.
ing space requirements. 131. Fire door louvers complying with positive pressure test re-
109. Specific glazing compounds or other installation components quirements must be labeled to indicate such.
may be required for individual glazing materials. Refer to 132. Louvers are not permitted in;
the glazing material manufacturer's listings for such. · 2 and 3 hour doors or 1/3 hour (no hose stream) doors
110. As indicated in their listings, labeled glazing materials may · Doors with lights
require specific 3rd party glazing kits, or stop heights greater · Doors prepared for fire exit devices
than the 3/4" (19) provided standard on Fleming's kits. For · Acoustic doors
taller stop heights, custom Fleming glazing kits can be pro- · Lead-lined doors
vided (except for snap-in). · Dutch doors
111. For Fleming fire doors up to 3/4 hour rating, double glazed · TR, TRE or TRSL doors
lights with 1 piece of labeled 1/4" (6) GWG + 1 piece of 1/4" · Clad doors
(6) tempered glazing, are also permitted. · Bullet-resistant doors
112. Each piece of glazing material used in fire doors must la- · Stainless steel doors
beled. · Doors in 'a means of egress'
· Smoke and draft control doors
113. Glazing materials to be installed in positive pressure fire
doors must be labeled as such to indicate compliance. 133. Fire door louvers are not provided or installed by Fleming.
114. Glazing materials that have been evaluated to UL 263, "Fire 134. Except as indicated in Item 132, Fleming Standard con-
Tests of Building Construction and Materials", are intended struction louvered fire doors are permitted in all Fleming
for installation as 'walls' and unless indicated otherwise in frames, transom and sidelight frames.
their individual listings, are not permitted in fire doors. Fleming Astragals (Flat Bar and Z Types)
115. Glazing materials for use in fire door assemblies, labeled for 135. Astragals are required on;
both fire protection and bullet-resistance (UL 752, "Bullet- · 3 hour pairs
Resisting Equipment") are not currently available. · 3 hour double egress pairs
116. Glazing materials are not supplied or installed by Fleming. · Pairs of TR-Series doors over 86" (2200) in height
· Pairs of positive pressure TRSL-Series doors
117. Factory or IPLP approved distributor installed in-fill panels
· Top leaf of dutch door
are permitted in lieu of labeled glazing materials.
· Bottom of flush (non-rabetted) panel above a door in
118. Minimum in-fill panel construction for; frame without transom mullion
· 1, 1-1/2, 2 and 3 hour doors; 1 sheet of 20 gage steel · Pairs of LD and SD-Series doors
laminated to each face of 3/8" (9.5) thick inorganic ce-
136. See Page 35, Items 663 to 666 for additional information on
ment board, nominal density - 110 pcf (1760 kg/m3)
3 hour doors in a 'means of egress'.
· 1/3, 1/2 and 3/4 hour doors; 1 sheet of 20 gage steel
laminated to each face of 1/2" (12.7) thick non-rated gyp- 137. The following pairs and double egress doors up to 1-1/2 hour
sum wall board maximum, are provided standard without astragals;
· H-Series up to 96" x 120" (2450 x 3050)
119. Fleming 'thermal glazing kits' (THGLZ) are used for secur-
· CW, SL and SLE-Series
ing in-fill panels.
· TRSL-Series traditional pressure doors.
Fire Door Louvers and Preparations 138. Pairs of 1-1/2 hour maximum, D, E, DSS, TR and TRE-Se-
120. Except as indicated in Item 132, labeled louvers are permit- ries, Standard, Double Egress and Clad construction doors
ted in all 1-1/2 hour maximum Fleming fire doors, to the sizes are available without astragal. See Items 139 to 140 for de-
indicated on Pages 4 and 5, Tables 2 and 3, for each tails.
Construction/Series/Gage.
139. For the Series and Constructions detailed in Item 138, the
121. Fire door louvers must be UL labeled, installed within the lock edge seam of each leaf, if provided without an as-
lower 40" (1020) of the assembly for positive pressure ap- tragal, must be tack-welded top and bottom, immediately
plications, and in accordance with the louver manufacturer’s above and below each edge cutout and at 12" (305) on cen-
templates and installation instructions. ter (maximum) for;
122. Maximum labeled louver size; 24" x 24" (610 x 610). · D and DSS-Series doors up to 96" (2450) height
123. Minimum stile width; 5-27/32" (148), minimum bottom rail · E-Series doors
height; 8" (203) (actual front skin dimension). · TR and TRE-Series up to 86" (2200) height
124. No maximum imposed for stile widths. 140. The hinge and lock edge seams on each leaf of D-Se-
125. Only one (1) louver per fire door assembly is permitted. ries, Standard and Double Egress construction pairs over
This limits their use to 1 louver per leaf and 1 leaf per pair. 96" (2450) height, if provided without an astragal, must be
tack-welded top and bottom, immediately above and below
126. Louvers are permitted in fixed or operable doors.
each edge cutout and at 12" (305) on center (maximum).
Continue = Continue g
8
141. D, CW and H-Series, Standard construction UL pairs up 153. All D and E-Series double egress doors must have lock
to 3 hour rating, with rabbetted lock edges may be pro- edge seam tack-welded top and bottom and at 12" (305)
vided without an astragal when; on center maximum.
· Not in a 'means of egress', and 154. D-Series double egress doors exceeding 96" (2450)
· Both leaves are prepared for surface vertical rod fire exit height must have lock and hinge edge seams of both
devices, and leaves tack-welded top and bottom and at 12" (305) on
· The inactive leaf is provided with a labeled coordinator, center maximum.
and 155. The requirements in Items 152 to 154 may be incorpo-
· The provisions for lock edge seams in Items 139 and rated in Standard construction D or E-Series doors, for
140 are met conversion to double egress, at distributor locations in-
142. Where an astragal is required for a pair or double egress cluded in Fleming's In-Plant Labeling Program.
doors, flat bar type is provided standard, for screw fixing to
the front (pull-side) of the active leaf, or the back (push-side)
of the inactive leaf.
143. Where an astragal is required for pairs of SL, SLE or TRSL-
Series doors, custom 'h-shaped' textured wood grain as-
tragals are provided standard. Astragals are factory stained 156. Double egress pairs are restricted to vertical rod fire exit
to match doors. Astragals are available with integral ASA device applications, surface or concealed types, with or with-
and flush bolt reinforcing, or blank only, for screw fix mount- out bottom rod.
ing to lock edge of inactive leaf. 157. 3 hour double egress must be provided with an astragal.
144. Z astragals, prepared to clear lock edge hardware prepara- 158. Astragals are not required on double egress pairs up
tions, or with integral lock edge hardware reinforcing, are to 1-1/2 hour rating for the following Series. See items 138,
available, for screw fixing to the edge of the inactive leaf of 140, 142 and 148 for details;
pairs, except for SL, SLE and TRSL-Series. · D or CW-Series up to 96" (2450) height
145. Security type Z astragals, prepared to clear active leaf lock · E, H, SL and SLE-Series
edge hardware, are also available, for screw fixing to the 159. Glass lights in labeled double egress doors are limited to
edge of the active leaf of pairs, except for SL, SLE and TRSL- exposed sizes not exceeding 100 in2 (0.06m2) area, 12" (305)
Series. width or 33" (840) height per leaf, for all ratings. Refer to
Table 4, Pages 12 to 15 for glazing material availability. Also
Act. Act. see Pages 7 and 8, Items 76 to 119.
Dr. Dr. 160. D20 and E20 Double Egress doors are available with WHI
label only.
Flat Bar Astragal Z Astragal 161. D and CW-Series double egress doors are honeycomb
(Standard) (Optional) core standard. Polystyrene and TRR cores are available.
162. E-Series double egress doors are polystyrene core stan-
dard, with TRR core available.
163. H-Series available with vertical stiffeners/fiberglass core only.
Inact. Act. 164. Double egress construction with honeycomb and polysty-
Dr. Dr.
rene cores are included in Fleming's distributor In-Plant La-
beling Program (IPLP).
Security Astragal H Astragal 165. For use with Fleming Double Egress construction frames
(Optional) (Optional)
and Fleming UL transom frames and sidelight assemblies.
146. Flat bar type astragal is provided standard for screw fixing to Door with Rabbetted Top Cap
the back (push-side) of a flush panel above a door. 166. Available in single door applications only.
147. See Item 179 for requirements on dutch doors, Page 11, 167. Minimum door top cap rabbet height; 3/4" (19)
Item 230 for LD-Series and Page 11, Item 240 for SD-Series 168. D and CW-Series doors provided with honeycomb core stan-
doors. dard, polystyrene optional. Not available for TRR applications.
148. All Fleming astragals are shipped loose for installation by 169. E-Series doors are provided only with polystyrene cores.
others on site.
170. Glass lights are permitted in rabbetted top cap doors. Refer
149. Fleming flat bar and Z astragals may be tack-welded to door to Table 4, Pages 12 to 15 for glazing material types, sizes
at the factory or approved distributor's shop. Not available and ratings. Also see Pages 7 and 8, Items 76 to 119.
for SL, SLE or TRSL-Series 'h-shaped' astragals.
171. This construction not included in In-Plant Labeling Program.
150. Labeled 3rd party, surface mounted weather, sound or light
sealing type astragals are permitted; 172. For use in Fleming 'Frame with Panel Above Door' con-
· In conjunction with Fleming's flat bar astragal on all struction frames only, with Fleming fixed or removable
Fleming doors up to 3 hour rating, or hollow metal panel above door (no transom mullion).
· As a stand-alone astragal when the requirements on Panel is considered and labeled as part of the frame in
Page 8, Items 137 to 140 are met. (Exception: Acoustic this application. See Page 23, Items 441 to 455 for addi-
doors. See Page 11, Items 240 to 242 for details) tional information on frame and panel.
151. See Page 36, Items 689 to 697 for details on 3rd party as- Dutch Doors
tragals. 173. Available in single door applications only.
NON-STANDARD DOOR CONSTRUCTIONS 174. Top leaf may latch into either the strike jamb or the bottom
leaf using a labeled self-latching device.
Double Egress (D/E) Doors
175. Cylindrical latches or automatic flush bolts are permitted
152. All D and E-Series double egress construction doors must
to latch top leaf into bottom leaf.
utilize Fleming's internal lock edge reinforcing channel.
176. Bottom leaf must latch into strike jamb.
Continue = Continue g
9
177. Self-closing device is required on top leaf only. Spring Stainless Steel (DSS-Series) Doors
hinges may be used as self-closing device. See Page 198. Face sheets are fabricated from stainless steel in lieu of
34, Items 636, 637 and Page 35, Items 679, 680 for addi- galvanneal. Standard material for DSS-Series; Type 304,
tional information. 'XL Blend S' (brushed) Finish. Type 304, 'XL Buff' (mirror)
178. Available in D, CW, SL16 and SL18 Series. and Type 316 with 'XL Blend S' or 'XL Buff' Finishes are avail-
179. Optional 8" (200) maximum deep shelf on 1 side of door able. Acid etched patterns, logos, etc., are permitted.
only is permitted. Shelf and support brackets are not avail- 199. Pairs up to 1-1/2 hour without astragal are available. See
able in textured wood grain. Shelf and shelf support brack- Page 8, Items 138 to 140 for additional information.
ets are shipped loose for site installation by others. Top leaf 200. Glass lights are permitted in DSS-Series doors. Refer to
must be provided with steel astragal (supplied loose for site Table 4, Pages 12 to 15 for glazing materials, sizes and rat-
installation). Flat bar type required for dutch doors without ings. See Pages 7 and 8, Items 76 to 119 for additional
shelf, special off-set type required with shelf. information.
180. D and CW-Series dutch doors are provided with honey- 201. Polystyrene is the standard core material. TRR applications
comb core standard and are available with polystyrene. are not available.
181. SL-Series dutch doors available only with polystyrene 202. Louvers are not permitted in labeled stainless steel doors.
cores. 203. Stainless steel construction doors are not included in
182. D and CW-Series dutch doors are included in Fleming's Fleming's distributor In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
distributor IPLP. 204. DSS-Series doors are for use in Standard or Stainless Steel
183. Lighted or louvered dutch doors are not permitted. construction frames, transom and sidelight frames.
184. D20 dutch doors are available with WHI label only. Clad Doors
185. Dutch doors are intended for use in all Fleming single 205. Metallic claddings are permitted on 1-3/4" (44.4) thick, D,
frames and transom frames only. CW and H-Series singles and UL H, CW and D-Series pairs.
Temperature Rise Rated (TR, TRE and TRSL-Series) 206. Metallic cladding must be a factory installed non-com-
186. Temperature rise rating (TRR) is a measure of the average bustible material such as brass, bronze, aluminum or
temperature rise, above ambient, on the unexposed door face stainless steel (except Type 302), with a maximum thick-
during the initial 30 minutes (or 60 minutes in Canada) of the ness of 1/16" (1.6), secured to the front and edges and/or
fire test. The lower the TRR, the better the performance. back of door.
187. Temperature rise ratings are in addition to a door's fire 207. Base door widths are adjusted to meet NFPA 80 required
protection rating. clearances between finished door and adjacent door and/
188. Available in TR18, TRE18 and TRSL-Series constructions or frame.
for single, pairs and double egress applications, with a pro- 208. Maximum door thickness (including cladding); 1-7/8" (47.6).
prietary, solid, asbestos-free, core system in lieu of honey- 209. Dand CW-Series doors provided with honeycomb core
comb or polystyrene for both traditional/negative and posi- standard. Polystyrene and TRR are available.
tive pressure jurisdictions. 210. H-Series provided with vertical stiffener/fiberglass core only.
189. Fleming TRR labels indicate the maximum TRR required by 211. Pairs up to 1-1/2 hour are available without astragal.
code and attained by the door construction; 250°F (121°C) 212. The lock edge seam of each leaf, when provided without
at 30 Minutes for US requirements and 250°C (482°F) at 60 an astragal, must be tack-welded top and bottom, imme-
Minutes for Canada. diately above and below each edge cutout and at 12" (305)
190. TR and TRE-Series doors are provided with exposed me- on center (maximum).
chanical interlocking seam standard, with seamless edge 213. Glass lights are permitted in metallic-clad construction
available. doors. Refer to Table 4, Pages 12 to 15, for eligible la-
191. TRSL-Series are available only with exposed center seam beled glazing materials, sizes and ratings. Also see Pages
on both vertical edges. 7 and 8, Items 76 to 119.
192. Astragal required on TR18 or TRE18 Series pairs exceed- 214. Fleming steel glazing kits are clad to match door (Excep-
ing 86" (2200) height or 1-1/2 hour rating and all positive pres- tion; Fleming kits are fabricated from stainless steel for stain-
sure TRSL-Series pairs. See Page 8, Items 135 to 139 and less steel clad doors).
Page 9, Items 142 to 151 for additional information. 215. Clad or stainless Fleming snap-in kits are not available.
193. Unless specifically listed otherwise, maximum exposed la- 216. Labeled louvers are not permitted in clad construction doors.
beled glazing material sizes are limited to 100 in2 (0.06m2)
area, 12" (305) width and 33" (840) height per leaf. See 217. Metallic claddings are permitted in traditional/negative and
Table 4, Pages 12 to 15 for labeled glazing materials avail- positive pressure jurisdictions.
able beyond these limitations, which also maintain the tem- 218. Metallic clad construction doors are not included in Fleming's
perature rise rating of the fire door. Also see Pages 7 and 8, distributor In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
Items 76 to 119. 219. UL and WHI labeled non-metallic claddings, full door or pro-
194. Doors with an average unexposed surface temperature ex- tective plate type applications, are also permitted on labeled
ceeding 650°F (343°C) after 30 minutes of fire test expo- Standard and Double Egress construction fire doors, to the
sure are considered non-temp rise. lesser of the size and rating for the Construction/Series/
195. 1/3, 1/2, 1 and 2 hour fire protection ratings are not recog- Gage on used, or the limits of the cladding manufacturer's
nized in building codes for TRR applications. individual listings.
196. TR, TRE and TRSL construction doors are not included in 220. For positive pressure jurisdictions, non-metallic
Fleming's distributor In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). claddings must be labeled as such for compliance and
are limited to use on 1/3 hour (no hose stream) doors
197. TRR doors may be used in all Standard, Double Egress, only, unless cladding is listed otherwise.
Contra-Swing and Multi-Opening construction frames.
TRR doors are not permitted in transom or sidelight 221. Labeled non-metallic claddings may be installed by the
distributor or in the field, in accordance with the cladding
frames.
manufacturer's listings and installation instructions.
Continue = 222. Astragals are as per the base door requirements.
Continue g 10
223. Glass lights or louvers are not permitted in Fleming non- 248. If factory acoustic certification is not required, doors may
metallic clad doors. be prepared for fire exit devices.
224. Labeled non-metallic claddings are not provided or in- 249. SD-Series doors are not included in Fleming's distributor
stalled by Fleming. In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
225. Metallic and labeled non-metallic clad doors are for use 250. For use with Fleming acoustic frames and gasketing sys-
in all Fleming frames, transom and sidelight frames. tem only.
Lead-Lined (LD-Series) Doors Detention Security (S-Series) Doors
226. Available with composite honeycomb and lead-lined core. 251. Meets NAAMM HMMA 863-90 static load, impact load, rack
227. Lead lining is secured to the inside of the front (pull-side) and removable glazing stop test requirements.
face sheet and door edges. 252. Doors may be prepared for all labeled mortised, pocket or
228. Lead-lining is specified by thickness or weight. Lead-linings jamb mounted self latching devices.
available are; 253. S-Series doors are 2" (50.8) thick standard. UL S-Series
· 1/32" / 2 psf (0.8 / 9.8kg/m2) are available 2-1/8" (54) and 2-1/4" (57.2) thick.
· 3/64" / 3 psf (1.2 / 14.6kg/m2) 254. Each leaf must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight
· 1/16" / 4 psf (1.6 / 19.5kg/m2) hinges minimum.
229. Both vertical edge seams must be tack-welded top and bot- 255. Security glazing materials for use in swinging hollow metal
tom, above and below each edge cutout and at 12" (305) on fire doors are permitted. See Pages 7 and 8, Items 102 to
center maximum. 119 and Table 4, Pages 12 to 15 for additional information.
230. Composite lead/steel flat bar astragal, shipped loose for in- 256. Only Fleming's detention security glazing kits are permitted.
stallation on site by others, is required on all pairs for radia- 257. Glass lights in all S-Series doors are restricted to maximum
tion shielding purposes. exposed glass size per leaf of 100 in2 (0.06m2) area, with
231. Each leaf must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight neither the exposed width nor height exceeding 10" (250).
hinges (minimum). 258. S-Series doors are not included in Fleming's distributor In-
232. Labeled 1/4" (6) thick lead-loaded georgian wired glass Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
(GWG), to the sizes and ratings indicated in Table 4, Page 259. For use with Fleming Detention Security frames only.
12 for standard labeled 1/4" GWG, is permitted.
233. Fleming lead-lined glazing kits, similar to thermal glazing Bullet-Resistant Doors (BR-Series)
(THGLZ) are required. 260. Level 3 (44 magnum revolver) rating to UL 752.
234. Lead-lined doors are not included in Fleming's distribu- 261. Only proprietary vertically stiffened core is available in fire
tor In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP) labeled bullet-resistant doors.
235. For use with SUW Standard or Lead-Lined frames only. 262. Doors are provided with bullet-resistant face reinforcing on
the 'pull-side', which must be designated by the project
Acoustic (SD-Series) Doors Architect.
236. Available in SD16 Series acoustic construction only, utiliz- 263. Edges are beveled 1/8" in 2" (3 in 50) standard, with
ing Fleming's proprietary sound attenuating core system. square edges available.
237. Maximum acoustic rating; STC 46. 264. Seamless (tack-welded, body filled and ground smooth)
238. Both vertical edge seams must be tack-welded top and bot- vertical edge seams are standard.
tom, above and below each edge cutout and at 12" (305) on 265. Doors are prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight (0.180"/
center maximum. 4.57) hinges, minimum up to 36" x 84" (900 x 2150), 5" (127)
239. Each leaf supplied with Fleming surface mounted, adjust- extra-heavy weight (0.190"/4.8) over 36" x 84" (900 x 2150).
able automatic door bottom. 266. Only labeled mortise locks or latches, or mortise fire exit
240. Pairs of doors are supplied with Fleming acoustic astragal, devices are permitted. Only those function holes specifi-
surface mounted on the back (push-side) of the inactive leaf cally required for the latching hardware are permitted in the
and a steel flat bar astragal mounted on the front (pull-side) door.
of the active leaf. 267. As Bullet-Resistant Glazing Materials, evaluated from a fire
protection rating standpoint are not currently available, glass
lights are not permitted in fire labeled bullet-resistant doors.
268. Louvers are not permitted in bullet-resistant doors.
269. Bullet-resistant door construction is not included in the
Fleming In-Plant Labeling Program.
241. Automatic doors bottoms and astragals are shipped loose 270. Pairs are not available.
for installation on site by others. 271. For use only with labeled Fleming bullet-resistant frames.
242. Substitutions with other door bottoms or astragals will void Other Restrictions and Requirements
the STC rating, as unit is tested as an assembly. 272. Items 273 to 283 apply to all Fleming labeled doors regard-
243. Each leaf must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight less of Construction/Series/Gage.
hinges (minimum). 273. Polyurethane, phenolic, polyisocyanurate or other core
244. Special back-set locks/latches are not required. Minimum materials are not permitted in Fleming labeled door con-
back-set; 2-3/4" (69.9). structions.
245. ASA/NL strike (due to astragal requirements) and flush bolts 274. Non-labeled facings, claddings, finishes, protective plates
are required on the inactive leaf of all pairs. or plant-ons are not permitted (ie: wood veneers, plastic,
246. Minimum recommended undercut on acoustic doors; 1/4" paper or fabric). See Page 10, Items 205 to 225 for details
(6). of approved metallic and labeled, non-metallic claddings
247. When fire protection rating and factory acoustic certification permitted for Fleming Clad construction doors.
are both required, fire exit devices and glass lights are not 275. WHI labeled D, CW and E-Series doors are available 1-3/4"
permitted. (44.4) thick only.
Continue = Continue g
11
276. Each leaf in a communicating frame assembly must be 279. Radiused/bullnosed lock or hinge edges and rabbetted
labeled and equal in fire protection rating to the frame hinge edges are not permitted.
product. 280. Sloped, round or arched top doors are not permitted.
277. Unequal leaf pairs are permitted. Widest leaf of a pair 281. Field spliced or double acting doors are not permitted.
may not exceed the largest single leaf width permitted for 282. Vinyl top caps are not permitted in fire doors.
the Construction/Series/Gage used.
283. Preparations for, or the installation of mail slots, mono-
278. The use of Fleming H-Series doors is not recommended
Continue =
rail cutouts or security view ports are not permitted.
in Fleming DW or A-Series frames.
Table 4: Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Fire Doors
The following Table summarizes the maximum exposed areas, widths and heights of labeled glazing material permitted in Fleming's fire doors.
Each piece of glazing must be labeled by the glazing manufacturer or their UL and/or WHI approved distributor. The information presented
was current at time of publication. Readers are advised to consult UL's "Fire Resistance Directory", or WHI's "Directory of Listed Products", for
additional or up-dated information. These charts must be read in conjunction with Page 7, Items 76 to 93 (Fleming Glazing Kits), Items 94 to
101 (3rd Party Glazing Kits) and Items 102 to 119 (Glazing Materials).
(i)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Exposed Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,b) (b) (b) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hr 1/3 Hr 3/4 & 1-1/2 Hr
2 & 3 Hr 1-1/2 Hr 1 Hr (WHS (e)) (c) (NHS (d)) (c) TRR Doors (b)
/ Distributor Description
100 in2 100 in2 1296 in2 3289 in2 100 in2
1/4" (6)
Georgian Wired Glass UL (0.06m 2) (0.06m 2) (0.84m 2) (2.12m 2) (0.06m 2)
-
WHI 12" (305) 12" (305) 54" (1370) 35-3/4" (910) 12" (305)
Asahi, (GWG) (f,k)
33" (840) 33" (840) 54" (1370) 92" (2340) 33" (840)
Central
or Up to 4 Lights Up to 4 Lights
1/4" (6) Georgian Wired 2856 in2 3289 in2 100 in2
Pilkington each 552 in2 each 552 in2
Glass (GWG) with UL (1.84m 2) (2.12m 2) (0.06m 2)
- (0.36m 2) (0.36m 2)
Specified Glazing WHI 34" (865) 36" (915) 12" (305)
Compound (f) 12" (305) 12" (305)
84" (2135) 92" (2340) 33" (840)
46" (1170) 46" (1170)
3/8" (10) 3072 in2 3072 in2 3072 in2 3072 in2 3072 in2
2 2 2 2 2
Cement Board UL (1.98m ) (1.98m ) (1.98m ) (1.98m ) (1.98m )
-
with 20 Gage WHI 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
Fleming Face Sheets 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
In-Fill 2 2
Panels 1/2" (13) 1296 in 1296 in
2 2
Gypsum Board UL (0.84m ) (0.84m )
- - - -
with 20 Gage WHI 54" (1370) 54" (1370)
Face Sheets (g) 54" (1370) 54" (1370)
'FireLite' and 100 in2 2034 in2 3024 in2 3024 in2 3024 in2 100 in2
2 2 2 2 2 2
'FireLite NT' (0.06m ) (1.31m ) (1.95m ) (1.95m ) (1.95m ) (0.06m )
UL
3/16" (5) 12" (305) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 12" (305)
and 33" (840) 56-1/2" (1435) 89" (2260) 89" (2260) 89" (2260) 33" (840)
Anemostat, 2 2 2 2 2 2
Mestek, 'FireLite Plus' 100 in 100 in 100 in 1296 in 2000 in 100 in
2 2 2 2 2 2
Nippon 5/16" (8) (0.06m ) (0.06m ) (0.06m ) (0.84m ) (1.29m ) (0.06m )
Non-Wired WHI
Electric 12" (305) 12" (305) 12" (305) 54"(1370) 36" (915) 12" (305)
or Ceramic Glazing 33" (840) 33" (840) 33" (840) 36"(915) 62-3/8" (1585) 33" (840)
Technical 'Fireglass 20' 2
Glass 1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4" 3024 in
(6, 10, 13, 19) (1.95m 2)
UL - - - - -
36" (915)
Tempered Non-Wired
89" (2260)
Glazing (g)
2
'Pyroguard' 1288 in
5/16" (8) (0.83m 2)
CGI UL - - - - -
Non-Wired 28" (710)
Laminated Glazing 46" (1170)
'Insulgard' 1156 in2 1156 in2
GE 13/16" (21) (0.75m 2) (0.75m 2)
UL - - - -
Polymers Wired-Laminated Glazing(g) 34" (865) 34" (865)
(1-1/4" Stop Ht Req'd) 34" (865) 34" (865)
'FRP-100 Inferno-Lite' 2 2
1296 in 1296 in
13/16" (21) 2 2
(0.84m ) (0.84m )
Wired-Laminated UL - - - -
42" (1070) 42" (1070)
Glazing (g,h) 42" (1070) 42" (1070)
2 2
'FRP-200 Inferno-Lite' 100 in 100 in
Globe- 7/8" (22) (0.06m 2) (0.06m 2)
Amerada UL - - - -
Non-Wired 10" (255) 10" (255)
(1" Stop
Laminated Glazing (g) 33" (840) 33" (840)
Ht Req'd)
'FRP-300 Inferno-Lite' 2 2 2 2 2
1" (25) Non-Wired (g) and 100 in 100 in 100 in 100 in 100 in
(0.06m 2) (0.06m 2) (0.06m 2) (0.06m 2) (0.06m 2)
'FRP-400 Inferno-Lite' UL -
10" (255) 10" (255) 10" (255) 10" (255) 10" (255)
13/16" (21)
(g) 33" (840) 33" (840) 33" (840) 33" (840) 33" (840)
Wired-Laminated Glazing
Notes (f) : With or without a 2nd layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hr only
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997 or UBC 7-4 1997) (g) : Requires non-standard glazing kits due to glazing manufacturer's stop
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirements and/or glazing thickness
(b) : Maximum area per door leaf (h) : See Page 8, Item 110 for additional information
(c) : Maximum area per door light (i) : Each glazed opening must meet all 3 criteria - area, width and height
(d) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (j) : 3/4 Hour fire protection rating maximum (1 & 1-1/2 Hour not available)
(e) : WHS - With Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (k) : 1 Hour fire protection rating maximum (1-1/2 Hour not available)

Continue g 12
 Table 4 (Continued): Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Fire Doors
(i)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Exposed Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,b) (b ) (b) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hr 1/3 Hr 3/4 & 1-1/2 Hr
2 & 3 Hr 1-1/2 Hr 1 Hr (WHS (e)) (c) (NHS (d)) (c) TRR Doors (b)
/ Distributor Description

'Pyroedge-20' 3154 in2

1/4" or 3/8" UL (2.04m 2)
- - - - -
(6 or 10) WHI 34-3/4" (885)
Tempered Glazing 90-3/4" (2305)
‘Pyrobel 45-16’ 2747 in
2
2747 in2
2
5/8” (16) (1.77m 2) (1.77m )
Non-Wired Laminated WHI - - - -
Interedge 58-3/4” (1490) 58-3/4” (1490)
Glazing(g) 58-3/4” (1490) 58-3/4” (1490)
or
2 2 2 (k)
Glaverbel ‘Pyrobel 60-25’ 3855 in 3855 in 3855 in 3855 in 2
2 2
1” (25) (2.49m 2) (2.49m ) (2.49m ) 2
(2.49m )
Non-Wired Laminated WHI - -
87-5/8” (2225) 87-5/8” (2225) 87-5/8” (2225) 87-5/8” (2225)
Glazing(g) 87-5/8” (2225) 87-5/8” (2225) 87-5/8” (2225) 87-5/8” (2225)
‘Pyrobel 90-37’ 1243in 2 1243in2 1243in2 1243in 2 1243in2
2 2 2 2 2
1-1/2” (37) (0.80m ) (0.80m ) (0.80m ) (0.80m ) (0.80m )
Non-Wired Laminated WHI -
45” (1140) 45” (1140) 45” (1140) 45” (1140) 45” (1140)
Glazing(g) 45” (1140) 45” (1140) 45” (1140) 45” (1140) 45” (1140)
1080 in2
'Pyrostop 45-200' 2
3/8" (10) (0.70m )
WHI - - - - -
36" (915)
Non-Wired Glazing (h )
36" (915)
3724 in 2 3724 in2
2 2
(2.4m ) (2.4m )
'Pyrostop 45-200' UL - - - -
41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060)
3/4" (19) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280)
Non-Wired
Glazing (g ,h) 1080 in 2 1080 in2 1080 in2
2 2
(1" Stop Ht Req'd) (0.70m ) (0.70m ) (0.70m 2)
WHI - - -
36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
3724 in2 3724 in 2 3724 in2
‘Pyrostop 60-101' 2 2 2
(2.4m ) (2.4m ) (2.4m )
7/8" (22) UL - - -
41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060)
and 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280)
'Pyrostop 60-201'
Pilkington 1-1/16" (27) 1080 in
2
1080 in 2 1080 in2 1080 in2
2 2 2 2
or Non-Wired Glazing (g ,h) WHI - -
(0.70m ) (0.70m ) (0.70m ) (0.70m )
Technical (1" Stop Ht Req'd) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
Glass 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
‘Pyrostop
2 2 2
60-251, 60-261 3724 in 3724 in 3724 in
2 2 2
60-351, 60-361' (2.4m ) (2.4m ) (2.4m )
UL - - -
1-5/8" (41) 41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060)
Non-Wired Glazing (g ,h) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280)
(1" Stop Ht Req'd)
2 2 2 2 2
1080 in 1080 in 1080 in 1080 in 1080 in
‘Pyrostop 90-102'
(0.70m 2) (0.70m 2) (0.70m 2) (0.70m 2) (0.70m 2)
1-7/16" (37) WHI -
36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
Non-Wired Glazing (g ,h)
36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915) 36" (915)
‘Pyrostop 90-102'
1-7/16" (37), 2 2 2 2 2
3724 in 3724 in 3724 in 3724 in 3724 in
'Pyrostop120-104'
(2.4m 2) (2.4m 2) (2.4m 2) (2.4m 2) (2.4m 2)
2-1/8" (54) and UL -
41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060) 41-5/8" (1060)
'Pyrostop120-202'
89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280) 89-3/4" (2280)
1-9/16" (40)
Non-Wired Glazing (g ,h)
2 2 2 2 2
‘Superlite I-W 552 in 552 in 2856 in 2856 in 3289 in
1/4” (6) (0.36m 2) (0.36m 2) (1.84m 2) (1.84m 2) (2.12m)
WHI -
Non-Wired 12” (305) 12” (305) 34” (865) 34” (865) 36” (915)
Laminated Glazing 46” (1170) 46” (1170) 84” (2150) 84” (2150) 92” (2335)
'Superlite I-20' 2
2678 in
Safti 1/4", 3/8" or 1/2"
(6, 10 or 13) UL (1.73m 2)
or - - - - -
WHI 34" (865)
O'Keeffe's Non-Wired
78" (1980)
Laminated Glazing (g )
2 2 2
'Superlite I-XL' 1485 in 1485 in 3341 in
1/4" (6) UL (0.96m 2) (0.96m 2) (2.16m 2)
- - -
Non-Wired WHI 24-1/4" (615) 24-1/4" (615) 35" (890)
Laminated Glazing 67" (1700) 67" (1700) 96" (2440)
nd
Notes (f) : W ith or without a 2 layer of tem pered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour only
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997, UBC 7-4 1997) (g) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing m anufacturer's stop
(a) : W here perm itted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirem ents and/or glazing thickness
(b) : Maxim um area per door leaf (h) : See Page 8, Item 110 for additional inform ation
(c) : Maxim um area per door light (i) : Each glazed opening m ust m eet all 3 criteria; area, width and height
(d) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (j) : 3/4 Hour fire protection rating m axim um (1 & 1-1/2 Hour not available
(e) : W HS - W ith Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (k) : 1 Hour fire protection rating m axim um (1-1/2 Hour not available)

13 Continue g
 Table 4 (Continued): Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Fire Doors
(i)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Exposed Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,b) (b) (b) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hr 1/3 Hr 3/4 & 1-1/2 Hr
2 & 3 Hr 1-1/2 Hr 1 Hr (WHS(e)) (c) (NHS (d)) (c) TRR Doors (b)
/ Distributor Description
'Superlite II-20'
2792 in2
21/32" (17) 2
(1.8m )
Non-Wired WHI - - - - -
Laminated Glazing 36" (915)
77-3/4" (1975)
(7/8" Stop Ht Req'd) (g)
'Superlite II-45' 2 2
2880 in 2880 in
1-1/2" (38) 2 2
Non-Wired (1.86m ) (1.86m )
WHI - - - -
33-1/4" (845) 33-1/4" (845)
Laminated Glazing
86-5/8" (2200) 86-5/8" (2200)
(1-1/4" Stop Ht Req'd) (g)
2432 in
2
2432 in2
2
(1.57m 2) (1.57m )
Safti 'Superlite II-XL' UL - - -
34-1/2" (875) 34-1/2" (875)
-
or 3/4" (19) 70-1/2" (1790) 70-1/2" (1790)
O'Keeffe's Non-Wired 2 2 2
Laminated 2432 in 2432 in 2432 in
2 2
Glazing (g) (1.57m 2) (1.57m ) (1.57m )
WHI - - -
70-1/2" (1790) 70-1/2" (1790) 70-1/2" (1790)
70-1/2" (1790) 70-1/2" (1790) 70-1/2" (1790)
4952 in2 4952 in2 4952 in2 2 (k)
'Superlite II-XL' 4952 in
2 2 2
1" (25) UL (3.19m ) (3.19m ) (3.19m ) (3.19m 2)
Non-Wired - -
WHI 106-1/2" (2705) 106-1/2" (2705) 106-1/2" (2705) 106-1/2" (2705)
Laminated Glazing (g,h) 124-1/2" (3160) 124-1/2" (3160) 124-1/2" (3160) 124-1/2" (3160)
2 2 2 2 2
'Superlite II-NT' 4990 in 4990 in 4990 in 4990 in 4990 in
1-1/2" (38) (3.21m 2) (3.21m 2) (3.21m 2) (3.21m 2) (3.21m 2)
UL -
Non-Wired 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200)
Laminated Glazing (g,h) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200)
'Pyroswiss' 2910 in2
3/16" (5) UL (1.88m 2)
- - - - -
Tempered WHI 35-3/4" (910)
Non-Wired Glazing 81-1/4" (2065)
'Pyroswiss G'
4738 in2
5/16",3/8",1/2" & 3/4"
(8,10,13 & 19) (3.06m 2)
WHI - - - - -
Tempered 93-1/2" (2375)
Non-Wired Glazing(g) 93-1/2" (2375)

'Swissflam-45 N2'
2635 in2 2635 in2
5/8" and 3/4"
(16 and 19) (1.7m 2) (1.7m 2)
WHI - - - -
Laminated Non-Wired 77-1/2" (1970) 77-1/2" (1970)
Glazing(g) 77-1/2" (1970) 77-1/2" (1970)

'Swissflam-60 N2' 3325 in2 3325 in2 3325 in2

1" (25) (2.14m 2) (2.14m 2) (2.14m 2)
WHI - - -
Laminated Non-Wired 95" (2415) 95" (2415) 95" (2415)
Glazing(g) 95" (2415) 95" (2415) 95" (2415)
Vetrotech 'Swissflam-60 N2' 4465 in2 4465 in2 4465 in2
St-Gobain 1-1/8" (29) (2.28m 2) (2.28m 2) (2.28m 2)
WHI - - -
Laminated Non-Wired 95" (2415) 95" (2415) 95" (2415)
Glazing(g) 95" (2415) 95" (2415) 95" (2415)
'Swissflam-90 N2' 1084 in2 1084 in2 1084 in2 1084 in2
1-3/8" (35) (0.7m 2) (0.7m 2) (0.7m 2) (0.7m 2)
WHI - -
Laminated Non-Wired 32" (815) 32" (815) 32" (815) 32" (815)
Glazing(g) 34" (865) 34" (865) 34" (865) 34" (865)
'Keralite FR-R' 100 in2 1511 in2 1511 in2 1511 in2 1511 in2 100 in2
2 2
3/16" (5) (0.06m ) (0.97m 2) (0.97m 2) (0.97m 2) (0.97m 2) (0.06m )
WHI
Laminated Non-Wired 12" (305) 60-1/4" (1530) 60-1/4" (1530) 60-1/4" (1530) 60-1/4" (1530) 12" (305)
Glazing 33" (840) 60-1/4" (1530) 60-1/4" (1530) 60-1/4" (1530) 60-1/4" (1530) 33" (840)
'Keralite FR-L' 100 in2 490 in2 490 in2 490 in2 490 in2 100 in2
2 2
5/16" (8) (0.06m ) (0.32m 2) (0.32m 2) (0.32m 2) (0.32m 2) (0.06m )
WHI
Laminated Non-Wired 12" (305) 26" (660) 26" (660) 26" (660) 26" (660) 12" (305)
Glazing 33" (840) 26" (660) 26" (660) 26" (660) 26" (660) 33" (840)
'Keralite FR-L' 1036 in2 1036 in2
3/8" (10) (0.67m 2) (0.67m 2)
WHI - - - -
Laminated Non-Wired 37" (940) 37" (940)
Glazing(g) 37" (940) 37" (940)
nd
Notes (f) : W ith or without a 2 layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour only
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997, UBC 7-4 1997) (g) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing m anufacturer's stop
(a) : W here perm itted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirem ents and/or glazing thickness
(b) : Maxim um area per door leaf (h) : See Page 8, Item 110 for additional inform ation
(c) : Maxim um area per door light (i) : Each glazed opening m ust m eet all 3 criteria; area, width and height
(d) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (j) : 3/4 Hour fire protection rating maxim um (1 & 1-1/2 Hour not available
(e) : W HS - W ith Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (k) : 1 Hour fire protection rating maxim um (1-1/2 Hour not available)
Continue g 14
 Table 4 (Continued): Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Fire Doors
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Exposed Area x Width x Height (i)
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,b) (b) (b) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hr 1/3 Hr 3/4 & 1-1/2 Hr
2 & 3 Hr 1-1/2 Hr 1 Hr (WHS(e)) (c) (NHS(d)) (c) TRR Doors (b)
/ Distributor Description
'Omnilite'
360 in2
13/16" (21)
UL (0.23m2)
Non-Wired - - - - -
WHI 36" (915)
Laminated Glazing(g)
36" (915)
(WHI: 1" Stop Ht Req'd)
'Omnilite'
Viracom 576 in2
13/16" (21)
or Wired-Laminated UL (0.37m2)
- - - - -
Sieracin/ WHI 36" (915)
Glazing (g)
Trans Tech 36" (915)
(WHI: 1" Stop Ht Req'd)
'Omnilite FR-45' 2 2
588 in 588 in
13/16" (21)
Wired-Laminated UL (0.38m2) (0.38m2)
- - - -
(g) WHI 24" (610) 24" (610)
Glazing
24" (610) 24" (610)
(WHI: 7/8" Stop Ht Req'd)
nd
Notes: (f) : With or without a 2 layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hr only
: Not positive pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997 or UBC 7-4 1997) (g) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing manufacturer’s
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction stop height requirements and/or glazing thickness
(b) : Maximum area per door leaf (h) : See Page 8, Item 110 for additional information
(c) : Maximum area per door light (i) : Each glazed opening must meet all 3 criteria - area, width and height
(d) : NHS = No Hose Stream; for 1/3 hr doors in the US only (j) : 3/4 hour fire protection-rating maximum (1 & 1-1/2 hour not available)
(e) : WHS = With Hose Stream; for 1/3 hr doors in Canada only (k) : 1 hour fire protection rating maximum (1-1/2 hour not available)

HANDING TERMINOLOGY

Key Key

Left Hand Right Hand Pair Right/Left Contra-Swing - Right Hand

(L) (R) (PR) (R/L) (C/S R)

Key Key

Right Hand Reverse Left Hand Reverse Double Egress - Right Hand Right/Right Contra-Swing - Left Hand
(RHR) (LHR) (D/E R) (R/R) (C/S L)

Double Acting Single Left/Left Double Acting Pair

(D/A) Communicating Single Double Egress - Left Hand (D/A Pr)
(Com) (D/E L) (L/L)
(Non-Labeled Only) (Non-Labeled Only)

15
 FRAME PRODUCT DEFINITIONS (LABELED AND NON-LABELED)
Frames
Grouped in this category are units that contain single or multiple door openings
without horizontal transom mullions. Frames may be 3 or 4 sided. Units that
contain flush or rabbetted panels above the doors are considered frames.
Frames are available tack, face or profile-welded, knocked-down or knocked-
down drywall (slip-on). Typical Elevations >>

Transom Frames
This category includes units that contain single or multiple doors with single or
multiple openings above, separated from the doors with a horizontal mullion.
The openings above the doors are called 'transoms'. Transoms may be filled
with glazing materials, panels or louvers (non-labeled only). Labeled transom
frames are available only as face or profile-welded. Typical Elevations >>

Sidelight Frames
This category includes units that contain single or multiple doors with adjacent
openings for glazing materials, panels or louvers (non-labeled only), separated
by vertical mullions. The openings for glazing materials, etc. are called 'side-
lights'. Sidelight frames may also incorporate single or multiple transoms. La-
beled sidelight frames are available only as profile-welded. Typical Elevations >>
Window Frames
This group includes units that contain single or multiple openings for glazing
materials and/or panels but not containing doors. A window that contains only
one opening is also referred to as a 'borrowed light' or 'view window'. Non-
labeled borrowed lights are available in tack, face or profile-welded, knocked-
down or knocked-down drywall (slip-on) construction. Labeled configurations
are available as profile-welded only. Typical Elevations >>

Tables 5, 6 and 7 provide detail relating to maximum frame rabbet opening sizes for Fleming labeled frame product by rating,
construction, gage and assembly method. The sizes indicated are those permitted by UL and WHI, and reflect the limitations
indicated in Item 294, Page 19.
Table 5
2 and 3 Hour Fleming Fire Door Frames and Transom Frames
UL and WHI Notes (See Pages 19-27 and 31-33)
Maximum Rabbet Sizes (Items in ( ) apply to all Constructions unless noted otherwise)
Assembly

Anchorage
(377-383)

(293,294)
Product

Method

Construction
Typical (307-345)
Construction

or Panels
Material

Specific
Glazing
Elevation Gage
Profile

Notes
(284-290)
(322-326)
Masonry

Existing

Drywall
and/or Plan
Singles Pairs

12
SUW 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
14,16
(1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
14,16 KD
Standard
42" x 86" 84" x 86" 291 284-290
(IPLP) 18 SUW
(1100 x 2200) (2150 x 2200)
36" x 86" 72" x 86"
18 KD
(950 x 2200) (1850 x 2200)
Stainless SUW 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
14,16 292 346-368 465-470
(IPLP) KD (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
Frames

48" x 96" 96" x 96"

Clad 14,16 323 327-331 333-335 - 471-483
(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450)
36" x 96"
12 (900 x 2450)
Lead-Lined 72" x 96"
14 or 484-494
(IPLP) (1800 x 2450)
16 48" x 86"
SUW 291
(1250 x 2200)
10 511
Detention 42" x 86"
12 - 351,353 508-518
Security (1100 x 2200)
14 357-360
Double Egress 12 96" x 120"
- 399-401 399-407
(IPLP) 14,16 (2450 x 3050)
Standard 12
(530-539, 558-565)

291 284-288
Transom Frames

(IPLP) 14,16 48" x 120" 96" x 120"

Stainless (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
292 346-368 465-470
(IPLP) 14
SUW 323 327-331 333-335 540-558
16 48" x 96" 96" x 96"
Clad 471-483
(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450)
291
Double Egress 12 96" x 120"
- 399-401 399-407
(IPLP) 14,16 (2450 x 3050)

16
 Table 6
1 and 1-1/2 Hour Fleming Fire Door Frames, Transom Frames, Sidelights and Windows
Notes (See Pages 19-27 and 31-33)
UL and WHI
(Items in ( ) apply to all Constructions unless noted otherwise)
Maximum Rabbet Sizes

Assembly
(377-383)
(293,294) Anchorage
Product

Construction
Method
Typical (307-345)

(346-368)
Construction

or Panels
Material

Specific
Glazing
Elevation Gage

Profile

Notes
(284-290)

(322-326)
Masonry

Existing
and/or Plan

Drywall
Singles Pairs

12 48" x 120" 96" x 120"

SUW
14,16 (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
Standard 14,16 KD
42" x 86" 84" x 86" 291 327-331 284-290
(IPLP) SUW
(1100 x 2200) (2150 x 2200) 346-368 322-323 336 333-337
18 337
36" x 86" 72" x 86"
KD
(950 x 2200) (1850 x 2200)
Stainless SUW 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
14,16 292 465-470
(IPLP) KD (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
42" x 86"
DW-Series 16 (1100 x 2200) 84" x 86"
KD-DW or 346-358 - - 338-345 390-398
(IPLP) 18 36" x 96" (2150 x 2200)
(950 x 2450)
Adjustable SUW 456
16 96" x 96" 324-326 324-326 338 456-464
(IPLP) KD 457
48" x 96" (2450 x 2450)
Clad 14,16 346-368 322-323 333-337 471-483
(1250 x 2450)
Bullet 521
14 - - 519-529
Resistant 522
Frames

12 36” x 96”
Lead-Lined
14 (900 x 2450) 72” x 96” 346-368 - 484-494
(IPLP) or 323 333-337
16 (1800 x 2450)
SUW 48” x 86”
Acoustic 14 (1250 x 2200) 346-360 495-507
Detention 10 42” x 86”
511 - 508-518
Security 12,14 (1100 x 2200) 291
Flush or
48" x 118"
Rabbetted 16,18 327-331 441-455
(1250 x 3000)
Panel 336
346-368
12 - 337
SUW
Dutch 14,16 42” x 86” 322
430-440
(IPLP) 14,16 KD (1100 x 2200)
16,18 KD-DW 346-360
Contra-Swing 333-337
14,16 408-419
(IPLP) 48" x 96"
346-376
Multi-Opening (1250 x 2450) 96" x 96"
SUW 420-429
(IPLP) 12 (2450 x 2450)
14,16 96" x 120"
322-323
Double Egress (2450 x 3050)
- 399-401 399-407
(IPLP) 96" X 96"
14,16 KD
(2450 X 2450)
Standard 12
291 284-290
(IPLP) 1416 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
Stainless (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
292 465-470
(IPLP) 14
(530-539, 566-576)

16 48" x 96" 96" x 96"

Transom Frames

Clad 471-483
(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 346-368
12 540-557
Dutch 42” x 86”
14 SUW 323 327-331 333-337 566 430-440
(IPLP) (1100 x 2200)
16 - 567
Contra-Swing 14 291
408-419
(IPLP) 16 48" x 96"
Multi-Opening (1250 x 2450) 96" x 96"
12 346-376 420-429
(IPLP) (2450 x 2450)
14
Double Egress 16 96" x 120"
- 399-401 399-407
(IPLP) (2450 x 3050)
Standard 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
Sidelights & Windows

284-290
(IPLP) (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
12 346-376
(566-576)

Multi-Opening 48" x 96" 96" x 96"

14 540-557 420-429
(IPLP) (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450) 327-331 333-337
16 SUW 291 571-574 566
Double Egress 96" x 120" 571-574 571-574
- 399-401 567 399-407
(IPLP) (2450 x 3050)
Contra-Swing 14 48" x 96"
- 346-368 408-419
(IPLP) 16 (1250 x 2450)

17
 Table 7
1/3 (With or Without Hose Stream), 1/2 and 3/4 Hour Fleming Fire Door Frames, Transom Frames, Sidelights and Windows
Notes (See Pages 19-27 and 31-33)
UL and WHI
(Items in ( ) apply to all Constructions unless noted otherwise)
Maximum Rabbet Sizes

Assembly

(377-383)
(293, 294) Anchorage

Construction
Product

Method
Typical (307-345)

(346-368)
Construction

or Panels
Material

Specific
Glazing
Elevation Gage

Profile

Notes
(284-290)

(322-326)
Masonry

Existing
and/or Plan

Drywall
Singles Pairs

12 48" x 120" 96" x 120"

SUW
14,16 (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
Standard 14,16 KD
42" x 86" 84" x 86" 291 327-331 284-290
(IPLP) SUW
(1100 x 2200) (2150 x 2200) 346-368 322-323 336 333-337
18 337
36" x 86" 72" x 86"
KD
(950 x 2200) (1850 x 2200)
Stainless SUW 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
14,16 292 465-470
(IPLP) KD (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
42" x 86"
DW-Series 16 (1100 x 2200) 84" x 86"
KD-DW or 346-358 - - 338-345 390-398
(IPLP) 18 36" x 96" (2150 x 2200)
(950 x 2450)
Adjustable SUW 456
16 96" x 96" 324-326 324-326 338 456-464
(IPLP) KD 457
48" x 96" (2450 x 2450)
Clad 14,16 346-368 322-323 333-337 471-483
(1250 x 2450)
Bullet 521
14 - - 519-529
Resistant 522
Frames

12 36” x 96”
Lead-Lined
14 (900 x 2450) 72” x 96” 346-368 - 484-494
(IPLP) or 323 333-337
16 (1800 x 2450)
SUW 48” x 86”
Acoustic 14 (1250 x 2200) 346-360 495-507
Detention 10 42” x 86”
511 - 508-518
Security 12,14 (1100 x 2200) 291
Flush or
48" x 118"
Rabbetted 16,18 327-331 441-455
(1250 x 3000)
Panel 336
346-368
12 - 337
SUW
Dutch 14,16 42” x 86” 322
430-440
(IPLP) 14,16 KD (1100 x 2200)
16,18 KD-DW 346-360
Contra-Swing 333-337
14,16 408-419
(IPLP) 48" x 96"
346-376
Multi-Opening (1250 x 2450) 96" x 96"
SUW 420-429
(IPLP) 12 (2450 x 2450)
14,16 96" x 120" 322-323
Double Egress (2450 x 3050)
- 399-401 399-407
(IPLP) 96" X 96"
14,16 KD
(2450 X 2450)
Standard 12
291 284-290
(IPLP) 1416 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
Stainless (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)
292 465-470
(IPLP) 14
(530-539, 566-576)

16 48" x 96" 96" x 96"

Transom Frames

Clad 346-368 471-483

(1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450)
12 540-557
Dutch 42” x 86”
14 SUW 323 327-331 333-337 566 430-440
(IPLP) (1100 x 2200)
16 - 567
Contra-Swing 291
14,16 408-419
(IPLP) 48" x 96"
Multi-Opening (1250 x 2450) 96" x 96"
12 346-376 420-429
(IPLP) (2450 x 2450)
14
Double Egress 16 96" x 120"
- 399-401 399-407
(IPLP) (2450 x 3050)
Standard 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
284-290
Sidelights & Windows

(IPLP) (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)

12 346-376
Multi-Opening 48" x 96" 96" x 96"
14 420-429
(IPLP) (1250 x 2450) (2450 x 2450)
(566-576)

16 291 540-557
Double Egress 96" x 120" 327-331 333-337
SUW - 399-401 571-574 571-574 571-574 566 399-407
(IPLP) (2450 x 3050)
567
Contra-Swing 48" x 96"
- 346-368 408-419
(IPLP) 14 (1250 x 2450)
Stainless 16 48" x 120" 96" x 120"
292 346-376 284-290
(IPLP) (1250 x 3050) (2450 x 3050)

18
 FLEMING FIRE DOOR FRAME PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD FRAME PRODUCT CONSTRUCTIONS 302. Reinforcing for self-closing device is not mandatory;
284. Items 285 to 389 are applicable to all Fleming frame prod- · On inactive leaf of pairs in mechanical equipment rooms
uct, unless indicated otherwise. · With labeled floor closers (pivots)
285. 'Standard' construction refers to frame, transom frame · When labeled spring hinges are used
and sidelight assemblies with single doors or pairs of 303. When labeled spring hinges are used, a minimum of 2 per
doors (swinging in the same direction) and window ap- door leaf are required. See Page 34, Items 636 and 637 and
plications only. Page 35, Items 679 and 680 for additional information.
286. The factors determining whether frame product is con- 304. Labeled gaskets, weather-stripping and door seals are per-
sidered a Fleming 'Standard' construction (or not) are; mitted on all Fleming labeled frame products. Such prod-
specialized applications, performance based features, ucts are supplied and installed by others. See Page 36,
or the use of materials that affect fire performance. Items 689 to 697 for additional information.
287. Preparations for hardware, lights, panels, profile, assem- 305. If doors are by others, hardware preparations in Fleming
bly type or fire test methodology do not determine con- frame product are governed by the door manufacturer's list-
struction type. ings.
288. Refer to the Fleming Technical Manual for standard and 306. Also see Pages 34 to 36, Items 619 to 697, "Hardware Re-
optional features provided and available for each frame quirements for Fleming Fire Doors and Frame Product".
series. Anchorage
289. Those constructions not considered 'Standard' include; 307. Items 308 to 344 apply to all Fleming frame products and
· Specialized applications; double egress, dutch, adjust- ratings, unless noted otherwise.
able, multi-opening or panel-over door 308. Each jamb of frame product must be provided with anchor-
· Performance based; sound, lead-lined, bullet-resistant, age to suit the partition in which it will be installed. See the
or detention security Fleming Technical Manual for details of anchors provided for
· Material based; stainless steel or clad fire rated frame products.
290. All Standard Construction frame products are intended for 309. All frame product, except DW-Series and frames with face-
use with all Fleming doors, unless indicated otherwise. dimpled anchors, may be installed to wrap or butt the adja-
Frame Material cent partition.
291. Standard material for all Constructions/Gages/Series; A40 310. DW-Series frames and face-dimpled anchors are designed
galvanneal, except when stainless steel is specified. Gal- for wrap applications only.
vanized (G90) is permitted and available. 311. Wall anchors (except faced-dimpled or snap-in drywall types)
292. Standard for stainless steel; Type 304, 'XL Blend S' are positioned inside the jamb profile directly above or below
(brushed) Finish. Type 304, 'XL Buff' (mirror), Type 316 each hinge preparation and directly opposite on the strike
'XL Blend S' and 'XL Buff' Finishes are available. jamb.
Sizes 312. Except as noted, the quantity of anchors per jamb must be
293. The sizes indicated on Pages 16 to 18, Tables 5, 6 and 7, as per Table 8.
reflect the maximums permitted by UL and WHI, prepared Table 8
for hardware as detailed on Pages 34 to 36, Items 619 to
697 and within the following limitations. Maximum Over-All Quantity of Wall
Unit Height Anchors Per Jamb (*1)
294. Fleming door sizes may limit the maximum frame rabbet
opening permitted. E-Series doors are available up to 44" x
84" (1150 x 2150) maximum leaf size. Lead-lined, dutch 62" (1575) 2
and clad frames are also limited by the Fleming doors used 92" (2340) 3
in them. See Page 6, Items 44 and 45 regarding minimum 122" (3100) 4
door sizes.
144" (3660) 5
Hardware Preparations
295. See the Fleming Technical Manual for standard and optional (*1): Except face-dimpled or snap-in type drywall anchors
hardware locations, preparations provided and available 313. Jambs in the same assembly may be provided with differ-
for each frame series. ent anchor types (ie; unit masonry at one jamb, drywall at
296. As a minimum, each door opening in labeled frame product the other), but must be secured to the partition. They may
must be prepared for hinges, labeled self-latching and self- not be anchored to an adjacent frame product.
closing devices. Refer to Pages 34 to 36, Items 619 to 697 314. Although recommended (to add rigidity and for its sound
for detailed information on hardware requirements. deadening properties), grouting of jambs at cast-in place
297. All Fleming frame products, (except those for 1-3/8" (35) concrete and new or existing unit masonry is not required to
doors), are provided with 4-1/2" (114) standard weight maintain the validity of the fire rating.
(0.134"/3.4) hinge reinforcing, distributor convertible to heavy 315. Grouting of jambs in drywall partitions is not recommended.
weight (0.180"/4.6), unless noted otherwise. 316. Grouting of 'closed' sections is not recommended.
298. All door openings exceeding 96" (2450) height must be pre- 317. Floor anchors are provided on jambs terminating at the floor.
pared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight hinges (minimum). 318. When a jamb is prepared for EWA guides, face-dimpled or
299. Frame product must be prepared for the strikes indicated snap-in drywall type anchors, the floor anchor is not required
on the labeled self-latching device manufacturer's templates. and may be omitted.
300. Fire labeled electric or electronic hardware is permitted 319. Mullions adjacent to door openings are supplied with loose,
in all Fleming frame product prepared for 1-3/4" (44.4) or 12 gage floor anchors, screw fixed through the face and
thicker doors with Electro-Lynx wiring harnesses or ap- bolted to the floor.
proved conduit. 320. Concrete or drywall screws, bolts or expansion shells, re-
301. Each door opening must be reinforced for a separate quired for floor or wall anchorage, are not supplied or
self-closing device for each leaf, except as noted below. installed by Fleming.

19 Continue = Continue g
321. Exposed screw heads of wall anchors may be body-filled, 328. Existing Wall Anchor (EWA) guides, welded in place, are
ground smooth and touched-up, by others after installation. provided for all sizes, constructions and ratings.
New Unit Masonry Partitions 329. Preparations are located 6" (150) maximum from the top
322. Loose masonry wall anchors (wire or T-strap) are permitted and bottom of the jamb, with intermediate preparations equally
on the following; spaced between.
· Standard and stainless steel construction, 1-1/2 hour 330. For machine bolt applications, steel expansion shell anchors
frames up to; are installed in cast-in place concrete and existing unit ma-
· 48" x 96" (1250 x 2450) singles sonry. Structural steel must be drilled and tapped.
· 96" x 96" (2450 x 2450) pairs 331. Quantity of anchors per jamb must be as per Table 8.
· Double egress, 1-1/2 hour frames to 96" x 96" (2450 x 2450) 332. For A-Series frames see Items 324 to 326.
· Multi-opening frames up to 100" (2540) O/A width and
96" (2450) rabbet height Drywall Partitions
· Contra-swing frames 333. Steel Stud Anchors (SSA), 1 or 2-piece Combination Stud
· Dutch door frames Anchors (CSA) and Wood Stud Anchors (WSA) are permit-
· Frames with rabbeted or flush hollow metal panels ted in all frame products within the following limitations;
· Sidelight and window assemblies up to 3/4 hour rating, · 2 or 3 Hour;
with over-all unit sizes up to; · KD or SUW standard or stainless steel frames
· 100" (2540) width, and · SUW double egress frames
· 98" (2490) height · SUW standard or stainless steel transom frames
· All other ratings;
· All frame product

323. Captive (welded to jamb) masonry anchors (bridge and strap

type) are required on;
· 3 hour frames WSA CSA SSA
· All frames over 96" (2450) rabbet height 334. Steel stud anchors and wood stud anchors must be captive
· Transom frames, lead-lined, acoustic, bullet-resistant (welded to jamb).
and detention security frames 335. Combination stud anchors may be shipped loose on frames
· Multi-opening frames over 100" (2540) O/A width up to 1-1/2 hour rating, but must be captive on 3 hour frames
· Sidelights and windows exceeding; and on all contra-swing, lead-lined, transom frame, sidelight
· 3/4 hour rating and window assemblies.
· 100" (2540) width or
336. For butted applications in drywall partitions, Existing Wall An-
· 98" (2490) height
chor (EWA) guides are welded in place at each preparation.
Preparations are located 6" (150) maximum from the top
and bottom of the jamb and head, with intermediate prepa-
rations spaced at 24" (600) on center. SUW frame products
have jamb and head soffits pierced and dimpled for 1/4" (6.4)
diameter, #8 x 3-1/2" (89) flat head bugle type drywall screws;
· Up to 1-1/2 hour rating
· Not exceeding;
324. For A-Series frames, jamb and head faces are pierced and · 100" (2550) unit width, or
dimpled for 1/4" diameter x 2-1/4" long (6.4 x 57), flat head · 120" (3050) unit height
Tapcon concrete screws. 337. Welded-in custom, 'deep off-set' steel stud anchors may also
325. A-Series frame jambs up to 86" (2200) rabbet height require be used for butted applications in drywall partitions. See
3 dimples per face, and up to 96" (2450) rabbet height re- Table 8 for quantity of anchors per jamb.
quire 4 per face. Jamb face dimples are located 4" (100)
from top and bottom, with intermediate dimples equally
spaced between.
326. A-Series single frame heads require 2 dimples per face, lo-
cated 4" (100) from each end. Heads for pairs require an
additional dimple in each face at the mid-point of the rabbet
width.
Existing Partitions: Cast-In Place Concrete, 338. Face-dimpled wall anchors, described in Items 324 to 326
Structural Steel and Unit Masonry Walls are permitted in A-Series frame wrap applications. Drywall
327. Frame product jamb soffits are pierced and dimpled for 1/4" screws, #8 x 2-1/4" (57) flat head bugle type, secure the
(6.4) diameter, flat head Tapcon concrete screws or 3/8" (9.5) frame to the partition.
diameter machine bolts and steel expansion shell anchors. 339. Face-dimpled base anchors and adjustable tension anchors
Distributor must specify required diameter. are provided standard on DW-Series construction frames
only.
340. Face-dimples, 1/4" (6.4) diameter, are required in each face
of hinge and strike jambs of DW-Series frames at their
base to secure the jambs to the board and studs with #8
x 2-1/4" (57) flat head bugle type drywall screws.
Continue = Continue g
20
341. Snap-in type drywall wall anchors required in the face of; 348. Jamb Depths (A)
· Each strike jamb, above the strike reinforcement · Minimum (also see Items 361 and 362)
· Each head, centered on the opening, for pairs only · Single Rabbet (also see Item 349)
342. In lieu of face-dimpled type base anchors, DW-Series jambs · UL; 2-1/2" (63.5)
may be provided with snap-in type. · WHI
343. Snap-in type anchors are available with 1/2" (12.7) off-sets · Sidelights and windows; 4" (101.6)
for mounting on the face of the wall board, or 1" (25.4) for · All other frame product; 3" (76.2)
mounting between wall board and studs. Snap-in type dry- · Double Rabbet
wall anchors are shipped loose. · WHI sidelights and windows; 4" (101.6)
· All other frame product; 3-1/2" (88.9)
344. Each DW-Series jamb is also provided with a welded-in, ad-
· Maximum
justable tension anchor, located 5" (125) from top of jamb.
· Frames and transom frames; 14-1/2" (368)
· Sidelights and windows; 10-1/2" (267)
349. Single rabbet profiles less than 4" (101.6) jamb depth are
permitted for single frames only
350. Door Rabbet (B)
· For doors
· 1-3/4" thick; 1-15/16" (49.2)
· 1-3/8" thick; 1-9/16" (39.7)
· All others; door thickness + 3/16" (4.8)
· For glazed or paneled openings
· Standard; 1-15/16" (49.2)
345. Rough stud opening sizes for Fleming 'after wall' wrap ap- · Minimum; Glazing space + 7/8" (22.2)
plication frames are as indicated in Table 9. Tolerances are 351. Soffit (C)
+ 1/4" (6) / - 0. · Minimum
Table 9 · Frames; 3/16" (4.8)
· All other frame product; 1" (25)
Fleming Rough Opening Sizes · Maximum; none
Frame Frame Rabbet Frame Rabbet 352. Opposite Rabbet (D)
Series Width Height · Minimium (single rabbet); 0
+ 1-7/8" + 3/4" · Standard (double rabbet); 1-9/16" (39.7)
DW-Series · Maximum; None
(48) (19)
+ 1-5/8" + 13/16" 353. Stop Heights (E)
A-Series · Minimum
(41) (21)
· At doors and paneled openings; 5/8" (16)
Profile Requirements · At glazed openings, unless labeled glazing material
346. Unless noted otherwise, Items 348 to 376 apply to all frame manufacturer's listings indicate otherwise; 5/8" (16)
components; jambs, heads, sills, center rails, corner posts (See Table 11, Pages 28 to 31 for specific require-
and mullions. Detention, bullet-resistant, DW, A-Series and ments.)
double egress construction frames have specific restrictions 354. Face Widths (F)
for various profile elements. Refer to each for details. · Minimum
347. Refer to the Fleming Technical Manual for standard profiles · Single Rabbet
for each frame Series. · JD less than 4" (100); 2" (50)
DOUBLE RABBET SINGLE RABBET
· JD 4" (100) and larger
PROFILES PROFILES · At perimeter of doors; 1-1/4" (32)
· Not at perimeter of doors; 1" (25)
G
G

· Double Rabbet
D

· At perimeter of doors; 1-1/4" (32)

Open Sections · Not at perimeter of doors; 1" (25)
C

(Jambs, Heads · Maximum (Also see Item 355)

C
A

H and Sills) · Jambs, heads and mullions

H
· Sidelights and windows exceeding 3/4 hour rating;
B

B
GJ

4" (102)
· All others; 12" (305)
G

K F E E F
· Sills and center rails; 12" (305)
A - Jamb Depth F - Face 355. The face width appearance of a section may be increased
B - Door Rabbet G - Return by constructing a 4-sided opening, installing an approved
C - Soffit H - 2nd Return construction in-fill panel and a 20 gage fascia sheet tack-
D - Opposite Rabbet J - Shadow-Line Return welded into the opening, flush with the surrounding section
E - Stop Height K - Shadow-Line Face
faces. Alternately, for UL labeled frame product, 1-3/4" (44.4)
thick panels may be used. See Page 26, Items 548 to 550,
D

Closed Sections 554 and 557 for in-fill and panel constructions. Exposed
(Mullions and face joints may be body filled and ground smooth.
Glazing

C
Space

Center Rails) 356. All sills with face widths exceeding 4" (100) are supplied with
C
A

2" (50) wide, 16 gage channel clips, welded in place at 14"

(350) on center maximum.
B

357. Returns (G)

Rem.

Width
Stop

E F E E F · Minimum; 0 (1/4" (6.4) when a return is specified)

· Maximum; 3/4" (19.1)
21 Continue = Continue g
358. 2nd (or Drywall) Returns (H) (when required) Assembly Methods
· Minimum; 1/2" (12.7) 377. For frames noted as KD (knocked-down) or KD-DW on
· Maximum; 3/4" (19.1) Pages 16 to 18, Tables 5, 6 and 7, components are pro-
359. Shadow-Line Returns (J) (when required) vided unassembled to the project with the contractor re-
· Minimum; 1/4" (6.4) sponsible for installation assembling them in accordance
· Maximum with the Installation Instructions provided.
· WHI; 3/4" (19.1) 378. KD frames can be provided for conversion to SUW con-
· UL; 2-1/2" (64) with combined Shadow-Line Return (J) struction with the 'Punch Miter Only' (PMO) option.
and Return (G) not to exceed 3" (76) 379. SUW (set-up and welded) is a term used to describe
360. Shadow-Line Face Widths (K) (when required) frame product assembled by the factory or UL/WHI ap-
· Minimum; 1/4" (6.4) proved distributor. Unless indicated otherwise for a spe-
· Maximum; 4" (101.6) cific frame series, the following are the minimum SUW
361. Center rails, sills and mullions, not surrounding a door open- assembly methods required for fire rating;
ing, may be recessed from jambs and other mullions. · Standard construction frames; tack-welded (TW)
362. Minimum jamb depth (A) of recessed components · Non-standard construction frames and all transom
· Single Rabbet; 2-3/8" (60.3) frames; face-welded (FW)
· Double Rabbet; 4-1/4" (107.7) · Sidelight and window frames;
· Not exceeding 3/4 hour rating; profile-welded (PW)
363. Doors may be hinged off fixed mullions in all frame product
· Exceeding 3/4 hour rating; see Page 26, Item 568
up to 1-1/2 hour rating.
380. Tack-Welded (TW); Interior of each corner joint to be tacked
364. Sloped and curved components (as viewed in elevation), not
in 3 places, 2 at each face and 1 at each return. A hairline
immediately surronding openings for doors, are permitted in
joint is visible. Used to convert standard construction KD
UL labeled transoms, sidelights and windows.
frames to SUW.
365. Vector-Series option (V2 or V3) is available on 2" (50) face,
381. Face-Welded (FW); Exposed intersecting face joints are
16 gage, 3-sided, KD and KD-DW frame product only. Not
continuously welded, body filled and ground smooth, pre-
available on A-Series or double egress. V-Series KD frames
senting seamless faces. Welds are on the interior of the
may be factory or IPLP distributor converted to SUW.
profile for open sections, exterior for all others.
366. Hospital profile sections are permitted
382. Profile-Welded (PW); Exposed intersecting face joints con-
367. Sanitary bases, 6" (150) maximum off floor are permitted, tinuously welded, body filled and ground smooth, presenting
except on lead-lined, bullet-resistant and acoustic frames. seamless faces. Interior welds for open sections, exterior
368. Cased open frame profiles are permitted only for; welds for all others. For open sections, intersecting rab-
· Sills in 4-sided door openings in frames and bets, soffits and returns have continuous interior welds.
· Fleming acoustic frames 383. Fixed mullion, center rail and corner post fronts and backs
Hollow Metal Removable Mullions are assembled;
369. Fleming hollow metal removable mullions between doors are · With 1-piece mullion clip, or
permitted in SUW; · With 2-piece mullion clips, spot-welded 2" (50) from each
· UL Standard, Contra-Swing and Multi-Opening construc- end and at 12" (300) on center, or
tion frames, transoms and sidelights up to 1-1/2 hour · Without clips, plug welded 2" (50) from each end and at
rating 18" (450) on center
· WHI Standard and Contra-Swing construction frames, Available Options
transoms and sidelights up to 1-1/2 hour rating 384. Communicating frame products are permitted up to the maxi-
· WHI Multi-Opening frames up to 3/4 hour mum rabbet sizes noted for each Construction/Series/
370. Maximum individual rabbet opening size on either side of Gage. Each leaf in a communicating frame assembly
Fleming removable mullion; 48" x 96" (1250 x 2450) with all must be labeled and equal in fire protection rating to the
self-latching devices. frame product.
371. Fleming between door removable mullion fronts and backs 385. 4-sided frame products are permitted up to the maximum
are assembled; rabbet size noted for each Construction/Series/Gage. Sills
· With 1-piece mullion clip, or in 4-sided assemblies may have an integral door stop or
· With 2-piece mullion clips, spot-welded 2" (50) from each may be cased open type section.
end and at 12" (300) on center, or 386. Standard undercut on Fleming doors in 4-sided frames;
· Without clips, plug welded 2" (50) from each end and at 1/4" (6.4)
18" (450) on center
387. 4-sided assemblies are restricted to use with Fleming
372. For contra-swing removable mullion details see Page 23, labeled doors only and are not permitted in floors or ceil-
Item 410. ings (horizontal applications).
373. Fleming hollow metal removable mullions behind doors are 388. Split (2 piece) frames for wrapping existing partitions are
permitted in Standard construction SUW frames up to 1-1/2 permitted up to 3 hour rating in;
hour rating. Maximum rabbet size; 96" x 96" (2450 x 2450) · 12, 14 or 16 gage SUW Standard construction frames
with listed rim type fire exit devices only. · 48" x 96" (1250 x 2450) singles
374. Fleming behind door mullion fronts and backs are assembled · 96" x 96" (2450 x 2450) pairs
plug-welded 2" (50) from each end and at 9" (230) on center. 389. Frame product with unequal leaf width pairs are permitted.
375. Fleming hollow removable mullions are considered part of Widest leaf of the pair cannot exceed the largest single leaf
the frame product, however, a "Component for Field As- width permitted for the Construction/Series/Gage of door
sembled Listed Fire Door Frame" mylar sticker is required used.
on the inside of the mullion front, applied at the labeling
facility. See Part Number 52097, Page 33.
376. Doors may not be hinged off removable mullions.

Continue = Continue g
22
 NON-STANDARD FRAME CONSTRUCTIONS Multi-Opening (Banks of Doors)
Knocked-Down Slip-On Frames (DW-Series) 420. Face-welded multi-opening frames and transom frames,
390. DW-Series frames are designed for 'after wall' installation in and profile-welded sidelight assemblies are required.
wrap applications (studs and wallboard are constructed, 421. Maximum over-all unit width for frames up to 3/4 hour;
frame components are then installed in the prepared rough 154" (3900) in drywall, 162" (4100) in all other partitions.
opening). For 1-1/2 hour frames; 154" (3900) in all partitions. For
391. Face widths; 2" (50) only. For all other profile requirements transom and sidelight sizes see Table 10, Page 25.
see Page 21, Items 346 to 358. V2 and V3 option available. 422. Maximum individual door leaf size; 48" x 96" (1250 x 2450).
392. Face-dimpled base anchors and tension anchors are pro- Number of door openings is not restricted.
vided standard. Snap-in type base anchors are permitted. 423. Profile requirements - See Page 21, Items 346 to 376.
See Page 20, Items 338 to 343 for anchor requirments. 424. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337.
393. See Page 21, Table 9 for rough stud opening sizes. 425. Frame product may incorporate combinations of;
394. DW-Series frames prepared for 1-3/8" (35) doors are per- · Singles, Pairs
mitted up to 36" x 84" (915 x 2150) prepared for 3-1/2" (88.9) · Double egress
or 4" (1012.2) templated, standard weight (0.134"/3.4) hinges · Contra-swing
and small ASA strike (ANSI A115.3). See Page 34, Item 642 · Fixed or removable mullions between the doors
for additional information. 426. Doors may not be hinged off removable mullions.
395. DW-Series frames are included in Fleming’s In-Plant Label- 427. Multi-Opening construction not available KD or KD-DW.
ing Program (IPLP). 428. Multi-Opening frame products are included in the Fleming
396. DW-Series frames are intended for use with all Fleming D, In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
E, CW, SL, SLE, TR, TRE and TRSL-Series doors and 429. Multi-Opening assemblies are restricted to use with D, E,
labeled hollow or solid core wood doors. CW, SL or SLE-Series doors
397. H-Series doors are not recommended with DW-Series Dutch Door
frames. 430. Dutch door construction frames are available KD, tack-
398. DW-Series transom and sidelights are not available. welded and in DW-Series.
Double Egress (D/E) 431. Dutch door construction transom frames are face-welded.
399. Head profile at door opening may be single rabbet or 'double 432. Profile requirements - See Page 21, Items 346 to 368.
stopped' (like D/E jambs). 433. Anchorage - See Pages 19 to 21, Items 307 to 344.
400. Face widths (F); 434. Strike jamb must be prepared for 1 strike for self-latching
· Minimum; 1-1/4" (32) device in bottom leaf.
· Maximum; 4" (102)
435. Strike jamb may be prepared for 2 strikes when both leafs
401. All other profile requirements see Page 21, Items 346 to 368. latch into frame.
402. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337. 436. Closer reinforcing in head of frame may be omitted when
403. KD construction permitted for frames not exceeding 96" top leaf utilizes labeled spring hinges. See Page 34, Items
(2450) rabbet height or 1-1/2 hour rating. 636 and 637 for additional information.
404. Face-welded construction required when rabbet height ex- 437. Dutch door frame products are included in the Fleming In-
ceeds 96" (2450) and for 3 hour ratings. Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
405. Face-welded double egress transom and profile-welded side- 438. Pairs of dutch doors are not eligible for fire labeling.
light assemblies are permitted. 439. Dutch doors are not permitted in labeled sidelight frames.
406. Double egress frame products are included in the Fleming 440. For use with Fleming's labeled dutch doors only.
In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
407. Double egress frames are intended for use with labeled Frame with Panel Above Door
double egress doors only (Fleming or solid core wood). 441. Maximum door/panel rabbet opening height; 118" (3000)
442. Nominal panel size;
Contra-Swing (C/S) · 1-3/4" (44.4) thick only
408. Fleming proprietary internal reinforcing required in all con- · 32" (815) height maximum
tra-swing mullions. · 6" (150) height minimum
409. Contra-swing mullions may be fixed or removable. · 1344 in2 (.87m2) area maximum
410. Contra-swing mullion fronts and backs are assembled with- 443. Panel face sheets; 16, 18 or 20 gage (matching door gage)
out mullion clips, plug-welded 2" (5) from each end and at 444. Panels may be fixed or removable
18" (450) on center maximum.
445. Bottom of panel may be rabbeted or flush.
411. Doors may not be hinged off removable contra-swing mullions.
446. Rabbetted panel bottom height; 3/4" (19) minimum
412. Contra-swing frame product may have equal or unequal door
447. Flush type requires flat bar astragal affixed to back (push-
and opposite rabbets.
side) of panel. Astragals are shipped loose for installation
413. Single rabbet contra-swing mullions are permitted on site by others.
414. Profile requirements - See Page 21, Items 346 to 376.
415. Anchorage - See Page 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337.
416. Contra-swing face-welded construction frames and transom
frames and profile-welded sidelight assemblies are permit- 448. Core material; kraft honeycomb standard, polystyrene op-
ted. tional. TRR construction not available.
417. Contra-swing frame products are included in the Fleming 449. Removable panels are provided with mylar "Component for
In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). Field Assembled Listed Fire Frame Frame" label, Fleming
418. Contra-swing removable mullions are not permitted in KD part number 52097, installed in the top end channel. Fixed
construction frame products. panels do not require this label.
419. Restricted to use with D, E, CW, SL or SLE-Series doors. 450. Face-welded assembly minimum.

23 Continue = Continue g
451. Profile requirements - See Page 21, Items 346 to 368. lic cladding (ie; stainless steel (Types 304 or 316), brass,
452. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337. bronze, aluminum) with a maximum thickness of 1/16" (1.6).
Not available for sidelights and windows.
453. Frame with Panel Above Door construction is not included
in the Fleming In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). 472. Metallic cladding may be applied to the door side and/or
opposite side of the frame profile
454. With flush panels, only single D16, D18, D20 or CW-Se-
ries Standard construction doors are permitted. 473. Removable glazing stops are clad to match the transom
frame. Exception; Glazing stops for stainless steel clad tran-
455. With rabbetted panels, only D16, D18, D20 or CW-Series
som frames are fabricated from stainless steel.
Rabbetted Top Cap construction doors are permitted.
474. Hardware back-sets and door rabbet size of the base frame
Adjustable Jamb Depth (A-Series) are adjusted from 1-15/16" (49.2), to suit cladding thickness.
456. Three (3) profiles to suit jamb depths (A) of;
475. Frame rabbet opening widths are not adjusted. Doors are
· 4-1/2" to 6-3/4" (114 to 172)
undersized to suit cladding applied to the door and/or frame.
· 5-1/16" to 7-7/8" (129 to 200)
· 7-7/8" to 13-1/2" (200 to 343) 476. Metallic clad frame product is not included in the Fleming In-
· Door rabbet (B); 1-15/16" (49.2) Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
· Stop width (C); Fixed by jamb depth 477. Metallic clad frames and transom frames are intended for
· Opposite rabbet (D); Varies by jamb depth use with Fleming Standard, Clad, Lead-Lined, TR, TRE,
· Stop height (E); 5/8" (16) TRSL and DSS-Series doors only.
· Face width (F); 2" (50) 478. UL and WHI labeled non-metallic cladding are permitted on
· Returns (G); 1/2" (12.7) Fleming labeled Standard construction frames and transom
· Drywall returns (H); 13/32" (10.3) frames, to the lesser of the size and rating of the Frame
· Shadow-line faces (J) or returns (K); Not available Construction/Series/Gage used, or the limits of the clad-
· Sanitary bases; Not available ding manufacturer’s individual listings. Not permitted for
457. Profile dimensions other than indicated above, shadow-line sidelight or window frames. Such materials are classi-
or hospital profiles, mullions or sanitary bases are not avail- fied as to fire protection only.
able for A-Series frames. 479. For positive pressure jurisdictions, non-metallic cladding
458. A-Series frames with face-dimpled wall anchors are for wrap must be labeled as such for compliance and are limited to
applications only. See Table 9, Page 21, for rough opening use on 1/3 hour (no hose stream) frames only, unless listed
size requirements. otherwise.
459. Anchorage - See Page 20, Items 324 to 326 and 338. 480. Labeled non-metallic cladding may be installed by the dis-
460. Optional wall anchors; wire, bridge and strap, existing wall tributor or in the field, in accordance with the cladding
anchors, Z and wood stud types. See Pages 19 and 20, manufacturer’s listings and installation instructions.
Items 307 to 338 for details of each. 481. Labeled non-metallic claddings are not provided or installed
461. A-Series frames are provided KD standard and can be con- by Fleming.
verted to tack-welded or face welded by the factory or the 482. Base frame and transom frame profile requirements with
UL/WHI approved distributor. either metallic or non-metallic claddings - See Page 21, Items
346 to 368.
483. Anchorage with either metallic or non-metallic claddings -
See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337.
Lead-Lined
484. All Standard construction frames are available with factory
installed lead-lining.
485. Lead-lined frames are profile-welded.
462. Transom, sidelight or window applications are not available. 486. Lead-lining thickness or weight must be specified. Available
lead-linings are;
463. A-Series frames are included in the Fleming In-Plant Label-
· 1/32" / 2psf (0.8 / 9.8kg/m2)
ing Program (IPLP).
· 3/64" / 3 psf (1.2 / 14.6kg/m2)
464. A-Series frames are intended for use with all Standard con- · 1/16" / 4 psf (1.6 / 19.5kg/m2)
struction Fleming doors, except H-Series.
487. Lead-lining is secured to the inside of the frame section from
Stainless Steel the stop/soffit intersection to the end of the return, on the
465. Section components are fabricated from stainless steel in door side only.
lieu of A40 galvanneal. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316, in 488. Frame lead-lining may also be installed by others as part of
XL-Blend S (brushed) or XL-Buff (mirror), are permitted. the wall construction. The lead-lining provided in the parti-
466. Type 304 and 316 frames are KD, standard. Type 304 and tion is extended into the frame profile and secured to the
316, frames and transom frames are available in face-welded inside of the soffit as shown below.
construction. Only Type 304, XL Blend S Finish sidelight
and window frames are available profile-welded.
467. Profile requirements - See Page 21, Items 346 to 368.
468. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337.
469. Stainless steel frame products are included in the Fleming
In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
489. Lead lined frames must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy
470. Stainless steel frame product is intended for use with all
weight hinges (minimum).
Fleming Standard, Clad, Lead-Lined, TR, TRE, TRSL and
DSS-Series doors. 490. Profile requirements - See Pages 21 and 22, Items 346 to
368
Clad
491. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337.
471. All SUW Standard construction frames and transom frames
are available with factory installed, non-combustible metal- 492. Sanitary bases are not permitted on lead-lined frames.
Continue = Continue g 24
493. Lead-Lined frame construction is included in the Fleming 522. For all other profile requirements, see Page 21, Items
In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). 346, 348, 350 and 351 to 357.
494. For use with Fleming LD16 Series doors only. 523. Bullet-resistant frames are face-welded construction.
Acoustic (SF-Series) 524. Frame internally reinforced on 'threat side' only. For 'pull-
495. Maximum rating; STC 46. side' threat, full door side face bullet-resistant reinforcing
496. Available in SF14 Series frames only. provided. For 'push-side' threat, bullet-resistant reinforcing
required;
497. Acoustic frames are profile-welded. · Single rabbet; full opposite face
498. Profile requirements - See Pages 21 and 22, Items 346 to · Double rabbet; full opposite face and stop side
364 525. Available with welded-in anchorage to suit cast-in place, new
499. Captive anchors are required in all types of partitions or existing unit masonry partitions only. See Pages 19 and
500. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337 for 20, Items 307 to 331 for detailed information.
additional information. 526. Bullet-resistant frames must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114)
501. Sanitary bases are not permitted on acoustic frames. heavy weight hinges, 5" (127) extra heavy over 36" x 84"
502. Frame must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight hinges (900 x 2150). Continuous, labeled, full surface, geared hinges
(minimum) are permitted.
503. Frame supplied with factory installed Fleming surface 527. Only ASA strikes are permitted for mortise lock or mortise
mounted gasket/stop system. Substitutions of other doors fire exit devices.
or gasketing systems will void the STC rating as unit is tested 528. Bullet-resistant frames are not included in the Fleming
as an assembly. In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
504. When fire protection rating and factory acoustic certification 529. Labeled bullet-resistant frames are for use only with
are required, fire exit devices are not permitted. Fleming bullet-resistant labeled doors
505. If factory acoustic certification is not required, frames may TRANSOM, SIDELIGHT AND WINDOW ASSEMBLIES
be prepared for fire exit devices. 530. Maximum over-all transom, sidelight and window unit widths,
heights, areas and ratings available are detailed in Table 10.
Table 10
Over-All Unit Sizes : Width x Height x Area (If Applicable) (*1)

Application
506. Acoustic Frame construction is not included in the Fleming Fire Protection Ratings
Material
Product

In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). Wall(*4)

1 and 1/3 (*3), 1/2
507. For use with Fleming SD16 Series Acoustic doors only 2 and 3 Hr
1-1/2 Hr and 3/4 Hr
Detention Security 52" (1350) 52" (1350) 52" (1350)
508. Assembly meets NAAMM HMMA 863-90 static load, impact Drywall
Single

120" (3050) 120" (3050) 136" (3450)

load, rack and removable glazing stop test requirements. 52" (1350) 52" (1350) 52" (1350)
Other
120" (3050) 144" (3650) 144" (3650)
A40 Galvanneal

509. Available in 14 gage frames only.

100” (2550) 100” (2550) 100" (2550)
510. Detention security frames are profile-welded. Drywall
Transom Frames(*2)

120” (3050) 120” (3050) 136" (3450)

Pair

511. Profile requirements; 100” (2550) 100" (2550) 100" (2550)

Other
· Jamb Depth (A) 120” (3050) 144" (3650) 144" (3650)
· Minimum; 4" (100) 154" (3900) 154" (3900)
Opening

Drywall -
Mulit-

· Maximum; 14-1/2" (368) 120" (3050) 136" (3450)

· Door Rabbet (B); 2-3/16" (55.6) standard 154" (3900) 162" (4100)
Other -
144" (3650) 144" (3650)
· Stop Height (E); 3/4" (19) standard
Pair Single

· Face Width (F) 52" (1350) 52" (1350) 52" (1350)

Stainless

All
120" (3050) 120" (3050) 120" (3050)
Steel

· Minimum; 2" (50)

· Maximum; 6" (152) 100” (2550) 100” (2550) 100” (2550)
All
· All other elements - See Page 21, Items 351 & 357 to 120” (3050) 120” (3050) 120” (3050)
360 120” (3050)
A40 Galvanneal

120” (3050) 154” (3900)

512. Detention security frames are not permitted in drywall parti-
Sidelights and Windows

Drywall - Area: 96 ft2 136” (3450)

tions. (10.66m 2)
All

513. Captive anchors are required in all other types of partitions 144” (3650)
514. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 332. 144” (3650) 162” (4100)
Other -
Area: 120 ft2 144” (3650)
515. Frame must be prepared for 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight hinges (13.32m 2)
(minimum).
Stainless
Steel

516. Frames may be prepared for all labeled mortised, pocket or 100” (2540)
All

All - -
jamb mounted self-latching devices or strikes. 120” (3050)

517. Detention security frame construction is not included in *1: Must comply with all 3 criteria; width, height and area (if applicable)
the Fleming In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP). *2: Transom frame widths are based on 2” (50) face components and 48"
518. For use with S-Series (Detention Security) doors only. (1250) leaf widths
*3: With or without hose stream test
Bullet-Resistant (BR-Series) *4: A unit is considered ‘in drywall’ when either the jambs, head or sill contact
a drywall and steel or wood stud partition
519. Available with Level 3 (.44 Magnum revolver) rating maxi-
Unit Width Unit Width Unit Width Unit Width
mum, in accordance with UL 752.
520. Available in single frame applications only.
Unit Height

521. Face widths;

Unit Area Unit Area
· 2" (50) minimum
· 4" (100) maximum

25 Continue = Continue g
531. The quantity of door openings, lights and/or panels in a 553. Cores for 1-3/4" (44.4) 'door' construction panels;
sidelight or window unit is not limited except by the di- · D and CW-Series; honeycomb std, polystyrene optional
mensional restrictions outlined in Table 11, Pages 28 to · H-Series; vertical stiffeners and fiberglass only
31, "Labeled Glazing Materials for Transoms, Sidelights · SL-Series; polystyrene only
and Windows". 554. Fixed 1-3/4" (44.4) panels constructed as a door, may be
532. Approved panel constructions and labeled glazing mate- provided with glass lights or louver. See Page 7, Items 76 to
rials may be utilized in the same assembly. 119 for lights, Page 8, Items 120 to 134 for louvers.
533. Profile requirements - See Pages 21 and 22, Items 346 555. For UL labeled transom, sidelight and window frames only,
to 376 1-3/4" (44.4) panels, tack-welded into 4-sided rabbet open-
534. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337 and ings (2 places per vertical edge), are permitted. Panels are
Page 26, Item 572 to 574. Fleming tack-welded 'inner/outer' construction.
535. Only square or rectangular glazed or paneled openings are 556. Honeycomb is standard core, with polystyrene available.
permitted in WHI labeled transoms, sidelights or windows. 557. See Table 11, Page 28 for size limitations.
536. Removable transom mullions are not permitted 2 and 3 Hour Transom Frames
537. Operable transoms or sidelights are not permitted. 558. Only approved panels are permitted in Fleming UL or WHI 2
538. Louvers or dampers are not permitted in labeled transom, and 3 hour transom frames. See Items 548 to 557 and Table
sidelight or window rabbet openings, except as a compo- 11, Page 28 for approved panel constructions.
nent in an operable or fixed labeled door leaf. 559. Labeled in-fill panels are secured with #6 x 1-1/4" (32) oval
539. Labeled split transoms, sidelights or windows not available. head sculux self-drilling SMS, 2" (50) from the end of each
glazing stop and at 6" (150) on center.
Glazed Frame Product and Glazing Materials
540. UL labeled glazing materials are required in UL frame prod- 560. Labeled 2 and 3 hour transom frames are face-welded con-
uct. UL or WHI labeled glazing materials may be used in struction minimum.
WHI frame product. 561. Labeled glazing materials are currently limited to 2 hour fire
541. Except as indicated in Item 546, refer to Table 11, Pages 28 protection rating, therefore glazed 3 hour transoms are not
to 31 for labeled glazing materials eligible for use in Fleming’s permitted.
UL and WHI transom, sidelight and window assemblies. 562. Profile requirements - See Page 21 and 22, Items 346 to
542. Labeled glazing materials must have a fire protection rating 376
at least equal to that of the frame product in which it will be 563. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337 and
installed. Items 572 to 574.
543. Specific glazing compounds or other installation components 564. 2 and 3 hour transom frames are included in the Fleming In-
may be required for individual glazing materials. Refer to Plant Labeling Program (IPLP).
the glazing material manufacturer's listings for such require- 565. 2 and 3 hour transom frame are intended for use with all
ments. Fleming labeled doors.
544. Each piece of glazing material must labeled. 1 and 1-1/2 Hour Transom, Sidelight and
545. Glazing materials to be installed in positive pressure assem- Window Frames
blies must be labeled as such to indicate compliance. 566. Labeled glazing materials and/or approved panels are per-
546. Glazing materials evaluated to UL 263, "Fire Tests of Build- mitted in all Fleming 1 and 1-1/2 hour frame products. See
ing Construction and Materials", are tested as 'walls' and Table 11, Pages 28 to 31 for eligible labeled glazing materi-
unless indicated otherwise in their individual listings, are not als and Items 548 to 557, for approved panel constructions.
permitted in labeled frame product. 567. Labeled glazing materials and/or in-fill panels are secured
547. Glazing materials are not supplied or installed by Fleming. with #6 x 1-1/4" (32) oval head sculux self-drilling SMS, 2"
(50) from the end of each removable glazing stop and at 6"
Paneled Frame Product (150) on center.
548. All panel constructions in Items 549 to 557 must be installed
at the labeling facility. As such they are considered part of 568. Multi-opening transom frames, sidelights and windows ex-
the frame product and the frame label covers both the frame ceeding 3/4 hour rating are profile-welded and intersecting
product and its panels. external soffit joints at mullions and center rails are continu-
ously welded, ground smooth.
549. Minimum in-fill panel construction for;
· 1, 1-1/2, 2 and 3 hour frame product; 1 sheet of 20 gage 569. Labeled transom frame applications are face-welded.
steel laminated to each face of 3/8" (9.5) thick inorganic 570. Profile requirements - See Page 21 and 22, Items 346 to
cement board, nominal density - 110 pcf (1760 kg/m3) 372
· 1/3, 1/2 and 3/4 hour frame product; 1 sheet of 20 gage 571. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337 and
steel laminated to each face of 1/2" (12.7) thick non-rated Item 572 to 574.
gypsum wall board 572. Heads of 1 and 1-1/2 hour sidelight and window frames must
550. In-fill panels are secured in openings with 3/4" wide x 5/8" be punched and dimpled for Existing Wall Anchor (EWA)
tall (19 x 16) screw fixed, removable glazing stops. guides as detailed on Page 20, Items 327, 328 and 330,
551. For UL labeled frame product, panels constructed as 1-3/4" welded in place at 16" (400) on center (maximum), 16" (400)
(44.4) thick D, H or SL18 Series doors, tack-welded into 3 or from each end. Tapcon concrete screws or machone bolts
4-sided rabbet openings (3 places per vertical edge), are and steel expansion shell anchors are required for cast in-
permitted. For vertical edge seam construction require- place concrete, structural steel and new or existing unit
ments, see Page 6, Items 57 to 60. masonry. For drywall applications, #8 x 3-1/2" (89) flat head,
552. Size of 1-3/4" (44.4) door panel constrution limited to; bugle type drywall screws are used.
· Minimum; 12" x 24" (305 x 610) 573. Heads of 1 and 1-1/2 hour sidelight and window frames must
· Maximum have the faces continuously reinforced with 3/4" x 3/4" (19 x
· D20 Series; 42" x 86" (1100 x 2200) 19) x 12 gage angles, tack-welded in place at 24" (600) on
· SL18 Series; 48" x 96" (1250 x 2450) center (maximum).
· D16, D18, H16, CW-Series; 48" x 120" (1250 x 3050)
=
Continue g
Continue
26
574. Sills in sidelights and windows exceeding 3/4 hour rating 587. The number of segments in an assembly is not restricted,
are reinforced with continuous 16 gage floor channels, except by building code. Codes may restrict the maximum
notched to fit between the vertical members extending to area of an assembly within a separation. (ie; not to exceed
the floor. Channels are shipped loose and secured to the 25%). This must be determined by the project architect dur-
floor. ing the design process.
575. 1 and 1-1/2 hour transom frames, sidelight and window 588. Angle between adjacent segments is not limited.
frames are included in the Fleming In-Plant Labeling Pro- 589. Segmented elements are permitted in plan only. Corner
gram (IPLP). posts used as horizontal components are not permitted.
576. 1 and 1-1/2 hour transom frames, sidelight and window 590. Special reinforcing or grouting of corner-posts is not required
frames are intended for use with all Fleming labeled doors. or recommended.
1/3 (With or Without Hose Stream), 1/2 and 3/4 591. Corner posts are not permitted in stainless steel construc-
Hour Transom, Sidelight and Window Frames tion.
577. Labeled glazing materials and/or approved panels are per-
mitted in all Fleming 1/3, 1/2 and 3/4 hour frame products.

*
See Table 11, Pages 28 to 31, for eligible labeled glazing

*
*

*
*
*
materials and Items 548 to 557, for approved panel construc-

*
*
tions.

*
578. Also refer to Testing Authority listings for addition informtion
on individual glazing material manufacturer's products.

*
*

*
579. Labeled glazing materials and/or in-fill panels are secured

*
with #6 x 1-1/4" (32) oval head sculux self-drilling SMS, 2"

*
*
(50) from the end of each removable glazing stop and at 12"
(300) on center.

*
580. Labeled single door and pairs of doors transom frames, not
exceeding 3/4 hour rating, are face-welded.

*
*
581. Labeled multi-opening transoms and all sidelights and win-
dows, not exceeding 3/4 hour rating, are profile-welded. 592. Field splices are permitted in sidelight and window frames
582. Profile requirements - See Page 21 and 22, Items 346 to not exceeding 3/4 hour rating.
376 593. Field splice alignment channels and/or clips are welded to
583. Anchorage - See Pages 19 and 20, Items 307 to 337. one segment at the labeling facility. Contractor responsible
for installation must;
584. Sidelight and window frames not exceeding 3/4 hour rating
· Assemble the field spliced sections over the alignment
in all partition types, may incorporate vertical 2, 3 and 4-way
channels and/or clips
hollow metal corner posts. Typical profiles are shown be-
· Continuously weld the butted outside face joints
low.
*2 · Body fill, grind smooth, touch-up with zinc-rich primer
594. Field splices may be used in conjunction with hollow metal
*1
*1 corner posts and segmented sidelight and window frames.
*2

595. 1/3, 1/2 and 3/4 hour transom frames, sidelight and window
frames are included in the Fleming In-Plant Labeling Pro-
gram (IPLP).
596. 1/3, 1/2 and 3/4 hour transom frames and sidelight frames
are intended for use with all Fleming labeled doors.
Other Restrictions and Requirements
597. Only rectangular door openings are permitted in any Fleming
*1 labeled frame product.
598. Doors may not be hinged off removable mullions
599. Hollow metal removable mullions, between or behind door
applications, are not permitted in 3 hour frame product.
600. Non-labeled facings; claddings, finished, protective plates
or plant-ons are not permitted (ie; wood veneers, plastics,
paper or fabric). Refer to Page 24, Items 471 to 483 for
details of metallic and labeled non-metallic claddings per-
mitted.
*1 : 1" (25) face width minimum 601. Fleming Therma-Frame, Trimwall and Replacement (R-Se-
*1

*2 : 1/2" (12.7) off-set minimum ries) frame products are not eligible for labelling
Note : Doors and glazing may be installed on
602. Double acting fire door assemblies are not permitted
either side of the integral stop
603. The use of Fleming H-Series doors is not recommended
in Fleming DW or A-Series frames.
604. Transom, sidelight and window frames are not permitted
in openings requiring a temperature rise rating (TRR).
585. Individual 'segments lengths' (shown as ‘*’ on the plan views 605. Fire door assemblies are not permitted in floors or ceil-
at right) may not exceed the over-all 'unit widths' detailed in ings (horizontal applications).
Table 10, Page 25.
586. Over-all assembly height may not exceed the 'unit heights'
detailed in Table 10, Page 25.
Continue =
27
 Table 11: Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Transoms, Sidelights and Windows
The following Table summarizes the maximum exposed areas, widths and heights of labeled glazing material permitted in Fleming's fire labeled
transom, sidelight and window frames. Each piece of glazing must be labeled by the glazing manufacturer or their UL and/or WHI approved distributor.
The information presented was current at time of publication. Readers are advised to consult UL's "Fire Resistance Directory", or WHI's "Directory of
Listed Products", for additional or up-dated information.
(f)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Individual Exposed Light Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour 1/3 Hour
2 & 3 Hour 1-1/2 Hour 1 Hour
/ Distributor Description (WHS(c)) (NHS(b))
1296 in2 5268 in2
1/4" (6)
UL (0.84m 2) (3.40m 2)
Asahi, Georgian Wired Glass - - -
WHI 54" (1370) 110-3/8” (2800)
Central (GWG) (d)
54" (1370) 110-3/8” (2800)
or
Pilkington 1/4" (6) Georgian Wired 4608 in2 5268 in2
Glass (GWG) with UL (2.97m 2) (3.40m 2)
- - -
Specified Glazing WHI 48” (1250) 110-3/8” (2800)
Compound (d) 96” (2450) 110-3/8” (2800)
3/8" (10) Cement Board
with 20 Gage UL
Face Sheets WHI 3456 in2 3456 in2 3456 in2 3456 in2 3456 in2
In-Fill Panel (2.23m 2) (2.23m 2) (2.23m 2) (2.23m 2) (2.23m 2)
96” (2440) 96” (2440) 96” (2440) 96” (2440) 96” (2440)
1-3/4" (44) 54” (1370) 54” (1370) 54” (1370) 54” (1370) 54” (1370)
Inner/Outer UL
Construction Panel
Fleming
Panels 5760 in2 5760 in2 5760 in2 5760 in2 5760 in2
1-3/4” (44)
(3.72m 2) (3.72m 2) (3.72m 2) (3.72m 2) (3.72m 2)
D or H-Series UL
48” (1220) 48” (1220) 48” (1220) 48” (1220) 48” (1220)
Construction Panel
120” (3050) 120” (3050) 120” (3050) 120” (3050) 120” (3050)
1/2" (13) Gypsum Board 1296 in2 1296 in2 1296 in2
with 20 Gage UL (0.84m 2) (0.84m 2) (0.84m 2)
- -
Face Sheets (e) WHI 54” (1370) 54” (1370) 54” (1370)
In-Fill Panel 54” (1370) 54” (1370) 54” (1370)
'FireLite' or 2627 in2 3325 in2 3325 in2 3325 in2
'FireLite NT' (1.69m 2) (2.15m 2) (2.15m 2) (2.15m 2)
UL -
3/16" (5) 46-1/2" (1180) 95" (2415) 95" (2415) 81-1/2” (2070)
and 56-1/2" (1435) 95" (2415) 95" (2415) 95" (2415)
Anemostat,
Mestek, 'FireLite Plus' 2721 in2 3325 in2 3325 in2
Nippon 5/16" (8) (1.76m 2) (2.15m 2) (2.15m 2)
WHI - -
Electric Non-Wired 54” (1370) 54” (1370) 81-1/2” (2070)
or Ceramic Glazing 77” (1955) 95" (2415 95" (2415)
Technical 'Fireglass 20'
Glass 6272 in2
1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4"
(4.05m 2)
(6, 10, 13, 19) UL - - - -
106-1/2" (2705)
Tempered Non-Wired
106-1/2" (2705)
Glazing (e)
'Pyroguard'
1288 in2
5/16" (8)
(0.83m 2)
CGI Non-Wired UL - - - -
28" (710)
Laminated Glazing (e)
46" (1170)
(3/4" Stop Ht Req'd)
'Insulgard' 2 2
1156 in 1156 in
13/16" (21) 2 2
GE (0.75m ) (0.75m )
Wired-Laminated UL - - -
Polymers 34" (865) 34" (865)
Glazing (e)
34" (865) 34" (865)
(1-1/4" Stop Ht Req'd)
2 2
'FRP-100 Inferno-Lite' 1296 in 1296 in
2 2
Globe- 13/16" (21) (0.84m ) (0.84m )
UL - - -
Amerada Wired-LaminatedGlazing(e) 42" (1070) 42" (1070)
(3/4" Stop Ht Req'd) 42" (1070) 42" (1070)
'Pyroedge-20'
3698 in2
1/4" or 3/8"
UL (2.39m 2)
(6 or 10) - - - -
WHI 40-3/4"
Tempered
90-3/4"
Glazing
Interedge ‘Pyrobel 45-16’ 4608 in2 4608 in2
2 2
or 5/8” (16) (2.97m ) (2.97m )
WHI - - -
Glaverbel Non-Wired Laminated 96” (2440) 96” (2440)
Glazing (e) 96” (2440) 96” (2440)
‘Pyrobel 90-37’ 3419 in2 3419 in2 3419 in2 3419 in2
2 2 2 2
1-1/2” (37) (2.21m ) (2.21m ) (2.21m ) (2.21m )
WHI -
Non-Wired Laminated 82-3/8” (2090) 82-3/8” (2090) 82-3/8” (2090) 82-3/8” (2090)
Glazing (e) 82-3/8” (2090) 82-3/8” (2090) 82-3/8” (2090) 82-3/8” (2090)
Notes (d) : With or without a 2nd layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & C i
3/4 Hour donly
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997, UBC 7-4 1997) (e) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing manufacturer's stop
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirements and/or glazing thickness
(b) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (f) : Each glazed opening must meet all 3 criteria; area, width and height
(c) : WHS - With Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (g) : 2 Hour fire protection rating maximum (3 Hour not available)
Continue g 28
 Table 11 (Continued): Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Transoms, Sidelights and Windows
(f)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Individual Exposed Light Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,g) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour 1/3 Hour
1-1/2 Hour 1 Hour
/ Distributor Description
2 Hour (WHS(c)) (NHS(b))
'Pyrostop 45-200' 1860 in2
2
3/8" (10) (1.20m )
WHI - - - -
Non-Wired 47-1/4” (1200)
Glazing (e) 47-1/4” (1200)
'Pyrostop 45-200'
3/4" (19) 4500 in2 4500 in2
2 2
and (2.90m ) (2.90m )
UL - - -
45-250, 45-350, 45-360 95-1/4" (2420) 95-1/4" (2420)
1-5/16" (33) 95-1/4" (2420) 95-1/4" (2420
Non-Wired Glazing (e)
5605 in2 5605 in2 5605 in2
2 2 2
‘Pyrostop 60-101' (3.62m ) (3.62m ) (3.62m )
7/8" (22) UL - -
96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
and 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
'Pyrostop 60-201'
1-1/16" (27) 4290 in2 4290 in2 4290 in2
2 2 2
Non-Wired Glazing (e) WHI - -
(2.77m ) (2.77m ) (2.77m )
(1" Stop Ht Req'd) 78” (1980) 78” (1980) 78” (1980)
78” (1980) 78” (1980) 78” (1980)
Pilkington
or ‘Pyrostop
2 2 2
Technical 60-251, 60-261 5605 in 5605 in 5605 in
2 2 2
Glass 60-351,60-361' (3.62m ) (3.62m ) (3.62m )
UL - -
1-5/8" (41) 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
Non-Wired Glazing (e) 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
(1" Stop Ht Req'd)

3724 in2 3724 in2 3724 in2 3724 in2

2 2 2 2
(2.40m ) (2.40m ) (2.40m ) (2.40m )
UL -
96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
‘Pyrostop 90-102' 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440) 96" (2440)
1-7/16" (37),
Non-Wired Glazing (e) 1860 in2 (g) 1860 in2 1860 in2 1860 in2 1860 in2
2 2 2 2 2
(1.20m ) (1.20m ) (1.20m ) (1.20m ) (1.20m )
WHI
47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200)
47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200) 47-1/4” (1200)
'Pyrostop 120-104,
120-262, 120-362'
2 2 2 2
2-1/8" (54) 3724 in 3724 in 3724 in 3724 in
2 2 2 2
'Pyrostop 120-202' (2.40m ) (2.40m ) (2.40m ) (2.40m )
UL -
1-9/16" (40) 111" (2820) 111" (2820) 111" (2820) 111" (2820)
'Pyrostop 120-201' 111" (2820) 111" (2820) 111" (2820) 111" (2820)
2-13/64" (56)
Non-Wired Glazing (e)
3965 in2
2
(2.56m )
'Superlite I-20' UL - - - -
109" (2770)
1/4", 3/8" or 1/2" 109" (2770)
(6, 10 or 13)
Non-Wired 3965 in2
2
Laminated Glazing (e) WHI - - - -
(2.56m )
48-1/4” (1225)
109" (2770)
‘Superlite I-W’ 4608 in2 4608 in2
2 2
1/4” (6) (2.97m ) (2.97m )
WHI - - -
Non-Wired 100” (2540) 100” (2540)
(e)
Safti Laminated Glazing 106” (2690) 106” (2690)
or
O'Keeffe's 3341 in2
2
(2.16m )
UL - - - -
48" (1220)
96" (2440)
'Superlite I-XL' 1318 in2
1/4" (6) (0.85m )
2
Non-Wired 19” (485) 2 2
Laminated 3522 in 3522 in
73-1/2” (1865) 2 2
Glazing (2.27m ) (2.27m )
WHI - - or
2 48” (1220) 48” (1220)
1296 in
2 96” (2440) 96” (2440)
(0.84m )
36” (915)
36” (915)
nd
Notes (d) : With or without a 2 layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour only
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997, UBC 7-4 1997) (e) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing manufacturer's stop
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirements and/or glazing thickness
(b) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (f) : Each glazed opening must meet all 3 criteria; area, width and height
(c) : WHS - With Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (g) : 2 Hour fire protection rating maximum (3 Hour not available)

29 Continue g
 Table 11 (Continued) : Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Transoms, Sidelights and Windows
(f)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Individual Exposed Light Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,g) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour 1/3 Hour
2 Hour 1-1/2 Hour 1 Hour
/ Distributor Description (WHS(c)) (NHS (b))

'Superlite II-45'
2432 in2 2432 in2
21/32" (17)
(1.57m 2) (1.57m 2)
Non-Wired WHI - - -
70-1/2” (1790) 70-1/2” (1790)
Laminated Glazing
70-1/2” (1790) 70-1/2” (1790)
(7/8" Stop Ht Req'd)(e)
'Superlite II-45'
4600 in2 4600 in2
1-1/2" (38)
(2.97m 2) (2.97m 2)
Non-Wired WHI - - -
100” (2540) 100” (2540)
Laminated Glazing
(e) 93-1/2” (2375) 93-1/2” (2375)
(1-1/4” Stop Ht Req'd)
'Superlite II-20'
2516 in2
1-1/2" (38)
(1.62m 2)
Non-Wired WHI - - - -
43” (1090)
Laminated Glazing
77-1/2” (1970)
(7/8" Stop Ht Req'd)(e)
Safti
or 'Superlite II-XL' 2432 in2 2432 in2
O'Keeffe's 3/4" (19) (1.57m 2) (1.57m 2)
UL - - -
Non-Wired 34-1/2" (875) 34-1/2" (875)
Laminated Glazing(e) 70-1/2" (1790) 70-1/2" (1790)
4952 in2 4952 in2 4952 in2
(3.19m 2) (3.19m 2) (3.19m 2)
UL - -
'Superlite II-XL' 124-1/2" (3165) 124-1/2" (3165) 124-1/2" (3165)
1" (25) 124-1/2" (3165) 124-1/2" (3165) 124-1/2" (3165)
Non-Wired 4952 in2 4952 in2
Laminated Glazing(e) (3.19m 2) (3.19m 2)
WHI - - -
106-1/2” (2705) 106-1/2” (2705)
124-1/2" (3165) 124-1/2" (3165)
'Superlite II-NT' 4990 in2 4990 in2 4990 in2 4990 in2
1-1/2" (38) (3.22m 2) (3.22m 2) (3.22m 2) (3.22m 2)
UL -
Non-Wired 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200)
Laminated Glazing(e) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200) 126" (3200)
4626 in2
(2.98m 2)
'Pyroswiss' or UL - - - -
50" (1270)
‘Pyroswiss US’ 92-3/4" (2355)
3/16" (5)
Tempered 2660 in2
Non-Wired Glazing (1.72m 2)
WHI - - - -
34” (865)
78-1/4” (1990)
‘Pyroswiss Extra’ 4638 in2
3/16” (5) (2.99m 2)
WHI - - - -
Tempered 60” (1525)
Non-Wired Glazing 92-3/4” (2355)
'Pyroswiss G'
4738 in2
5/16",3/8",1/2" & 3/4"
(3.06m 2)
(8,10,13 & 19) WHI - - - -
93-1/2” (2375)
Tempered
93-1/2” (2375)
Vetrotech Non-Wired Glazing(e)
St-Gobain
'Swissflam-45 N2' 3775 in2 3775 in2
5/8" (16) and 3/4" (19) (2.44m 2) (2.44m 2)
WHI - - -
Laminated Non-Wired 84” (2135) 84” (2135)
Glazing(e) 84” (2135) 84” (2135)
'Swissflam-60 N2' 4465 in2 4465 in2 4465 in2
1" (25) (2.88m 2) (2.88m 2) (2.88m 2)
WHI - -
Laminated Non-Wired 95” (2415) 95” (2415) 95” (2415)
Glazing(e) 95” (2415) 95” (2415) 95” (2415)
'Swissflam-60 N2' 3325 in2 3325 in2 3325 in2
1-1/8" (28) (2.15m 2) (2.15m 2) (2.15m 2)
WHI - -
Laminated Non-Wired 95” (2415) 95” (2415) 95” (2415)
Glazing(e) 95” (2415) 95” (2415) 95” (2415)
'Swissflam-90 N2' 1084 in2 1084 in2 1084 in2 1084 in2
1-3/8" (38) (0.70m 2) (0.70m 2) (0.70m 2) (0.70m 2)
WHI -
Laminated Non-Wired 31-7/8” (810) 31-7/8” (810) 31-7/8” (810) 31-7/8” (810)
Glazing(e) 34” (865) 34” (865) 34” (865) 34” (865)
nd
Notes (d) : With or without a 2 layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour only
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997, UBC 7-4 1997) (e) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing manufacturer's stop
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirements and/or glazing thickness
(b) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (f) : Each glazed opening must meet all 3 criteria; area, width and height
(c) : WHS - With Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (g) : 2 Hour fire protection rating maximum (3 Hour not available)
30
Continue g
 Table 11 (Continued) : Labeled Glazing Materials For Use In Fleming Transoms, Sidelights and Windows
(f)
Labeled Glazing Material Rating and Maximum Individual Exposed Light Area x Width x Height
Manufacturer 'Trade Name' Lab (a,g) 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour 1/3 Hour
2 Hour 1-1/2 Hour 1 Hour
/ Distributor Description (WHS(c)) (NHS(b))

‘Swissflam 120-N2’
2-1/8” (56) and 3288 in2 (g) 3288 in2 3288 in2 3288 in2 3288 in2
2-7/16” (62) (2.12m 2) (2.12m 2) (2.12m 2) (2.12m 2) (2.12m 2)
WHI
Laminated Non-Wired 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400)
Glazing(e) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400) 94-5/8” (2400)
(3/4” Stop Ht Req’d)
2 2 2 2
'Keralite FR-R' or ‘FR-F’ 1763 in 1763 in 1763 in 1763 in
2 2 2 2
3/16" (5) (1.14m ) (1.14m ) (1.14m ) (1.14m )
WHI -
Vetrotech Laminated Non-Wired 60-1/4” (1530) 60-1/4” (1530) 60-1/4” (1530) 60-1/4” (1530)
St-Gobain Glazing 60-1/4” (1530) 60-1/4” (1530) 60-1/4” (1530) 60-1/4” (1530)
'Keralite FR-L' 490 in2 490 in2 490 in2 490 in2
5/16" (8) (0.32m 2) (0.32m 2) (0.32m 2) (0.32m 2)
WHI -
Laminated Non-Wired 26-1/2” (675) 26-1/2” (675) 26-1/2” (675) 26-1/2” (675)
Glazing 26-1/2” (675) 26-1/2” (675) 26-1/2” (675) 26-1/2” (675)
'Keralite FR-L' 1665 in2 1665 in2 1665 in2
3/8" (10) (1.07m 2) (1.07m 2) (1.07m 2)
WHI - -
Laminated Non-Wired 60” (1525) 60” (1525) 60” (1525)
Glazing(e) 60” (1525) 60” (1525) 60” (1525)
'Omnilite'
360 in2
13/16" (21)
UL (0.23m 2)
Non-Wired - - - -
WHI 36" (915)
Laminated Glazing(e)
36" (915)
(1" Stop Ht Req'd)
Viracom 'Omnilite' 500 in2
or 27/32" (22) UL (0.32m 2)
- - - -
Sieracin/ Wired-Laminated 40" (1020)
Trans Tech Glazing(e) 40" (1020)
'Omnilite' 2
880 in
27/32" (22)
UL (0.57m 2)
Wired-Laminated - - - -
40" (1020)
Glazing(e)
40" (1020)
(3/4” Stop Ht Req’d)
nd
N t
Notes (d) : With or without a 2 layer of tempered glass at 1/3, 1/2 & 3/4 Hour only
: Not Positive Pressure compliant (UL10C, UBC 7-2 1997, UBC 7-4 1997) (e) : Requires non-standard glazing kit due to glazing manufacturer's stop
(a) : Where permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction height requirements and/or glazing thickness
(b) : NHS - No Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in the US only (f) : Each glazed opening must meet all 3 criteria; area, width and height
(c) : WHS - With Hose Stream; for 1/3 Hour doors in Canada only (g) : 2 Hour fire protection rating maximum (3 Hour not available)

FLEMING FIRE LABELS

606. Listing authorities, UL and WHI, have developed inde- label, Part Number 52097, applied by the labeling facility
pendent policies regarding the information required and to the inside of each component.
the format of their labels. 612. Fleming's UL labels are eligible for use in all North Ameri-
607. Mylar labels are pre-printed with all required information. can jurisdictions.
Factory labeled WHI products are available only with mylar 613. Fleming's WHI labels are used in all traditional/negative
labels. Factory labeled UL products are provided with mylar test jurisdictions in North America. For WHI positive pres-
labels standard, metal type available when specified. sure and/or smoke and draft control compliance, Fleming's
608. Fire protection ratings are stamped or scribed into metal supplemental labels, Part Numbers 52072, 52073, 52074
labels by the approved labeling facility. or 52075, must also be provided on fire doors adjacent to
609. For UL frames, transom frames and sidelight frames, the fire door label. This label contains additional infor-
Fleming also utilizes an 'embossed' label. The emboss- mation required in these jurisdictions. Although not man-
ment is provided standard on all eligible components datory, distributors may apply Part Numbers 52072 or
prepared for hinges. The embossment is a bona-fide UL 52073 to frame product as well.
label, recognized in NFPA 80. See the Fleming Technical 614. Tables 12 and 13 detail, by Fleming Part Number, the
Manual for additional information on the embossed label appropriate label to be used for each fire endurance, tem-
program. perature rise rating and product category. See Pages 32
610. Labels are applied between the two upper hinge prepa- and 33 for facsimiles of Fleming's UL and WHI fire door and
rations. If continuous hinges are provided, metal or mylar frame labels.
labels must be applied to; 615. An AHJ should not reject a label if it references multiple
· The inside of the top end channel or top of steel top cap, Standards, so long as it specifically indicates compliance
at the hinge end, on doors with the Standards mandated in their governing code. As
· The hinge end of the head/transom mullion door rabbet, well, NFPA 80 specifically includes the statement, "La-
on frame product. (Only 1 fire label is required per frame.) bels or classification marks may be of metal, paper, or
611. Each UL Fleming jamb and head provided KD or KD-DW, plastics, or may be stamped or die cast into them." There-
hollow metal removable panels, hollow metal removable mul- fore, all Fleming labels, metal, mylar or embossed type,
lions and field spliced frame product, must bear a Fleming are in full compliance with all code requirements and
"Component for Field Assembled Listed Fire Door Frame" should not be rejected by an AHJ based on their 'material'.

31 Continue = Continue g
616. If a door or frame product is not eligible for fire rating, a 617. The field application of fire labels, except under UL or WHI
fire label cannot and will not be applied. However, a fac- Special Field Inspection Programs, is not permitted. See
tory Letter of Certification, covering construction only, may the Fleming Technical Manual or contact Technical Services
be provided. Such Certifications are project and opening – Ajax, for additional information on these Programs.
specific, and will detail the reason(s) for ineligibility. Ac- 618. Fleming products are also available with Factory Mutual
ceptance of a Letter of Certification is at the sole discre- Research (FM) labels and certification to British Standards
tion of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Contact Fleming Institute (BSI) requirements. Contact Fleming Technical
Technical Services - Ajax, for further information. Continue = Services – Ajax, for additional information.
FLEMING FIRE DOOR LABELS
Table 12 Metal - Pt No 52084 (*1)
FLEMING FIRE DOOR LABELS SWINGING TYPE FIRE DOOR
FIRE RATING : HOUR
Fleming Label Part Number ISSUE NUMBER : A-1010
Fire PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
Temperature UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
Endurance UL WHI
Rise Rating MIN. LATCH THROW: SINGLES - 1/2 IN. PAIRS - 3/4 IN. OR
Rating
Fleming
FIRE DOOR TO BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
Metal Mylar Mylar TEMPERATURE RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF AT 30 MINUTES
R8930-52084 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Steel Doors & Frames

52036
2 or 3 Hour 52093
(*2)
1 or 1-1/2 None
52084 52094
Hour (Exceeds 650°F
at 30 Minutes)
(*1) 52037 Metal - Pt No 52085 (*1, 3, 4)
3/4 Hour 52095 (*2) SWINGING TYPE FIRE DOOR
FIRE RATING : HOUR
1/3 Hour 52096
TEMP RISE: 250ºF AT 30 MIN. & 250ºC AT 60 MIN.
ISSUE NUMBER : A-1010
250°F, 450° or 650°F PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
at 30 Minutes and UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
3 Hour N/A
Fleming
MIN. LATCH THROW: SINGLES - 1/2 IN. PAIRS - 3/4 IN. OR
250°C at FIRE DOOR TO BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
(*3) R8930-52085 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Steel Doors & Frames
60 Minutes
250°F, 450° or 650°F
at 30 Minutes and 52085
1-1/2 Hour N/A
250°C at (*1,4)
(*3) Mylar - Pt No 52093
30 or 60 Minutes 52038
(*4,5) SWINGING TYPE FIRE DOOR
250°F, 450° or 650°F FIRE RATING : 3 HOUR
at 30 Minutes and ISSUE NUMBER : A-1010
3/4 Hour
250°C at PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
(*3) UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
30 Minutes MIN. LATCH THROW: SINGLES - 1/2 IN. PAIRS - 3/4 IN. OR

Fleming
FIRE DOOR TO BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
*1: Required hourly rating stamped or scribed onto label by labeling facility. R8930-52093
TEMPERATURE RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF AT 30 MINUTES
S
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Steel Doors & Frames
*2: For positive pressure and/or smoke and draft control jurisdictions,
Fleming's Supplemental mylar labels are required, in addition to the
standard WHI mylar label. For Positive Pressure compliance only, use
Pt # 52072. For Positive Pressure and Smoke and Draft Control
compliance, use Pt. # 52073.
*3: 250°C required for Canadian Code compliance only. Mylar - Pt No 52094
*4: Temperature Rise Rated labels are applied only by the factory. TRR SWINGING TYPE FIRE DOOR
not included in Distributor IPLP Program. FIRE RATING : 1-1/2 HOUR
ISSUE NUMBER : A-1010
*5: When Temperature Rise Rating and Positive Pressure compliance are PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
specified, supplemental label, Pt. # 50274 is also applied. For TRR, UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
MIN. LATCH THROW: SINGLES - 1/2 IN. PAIRS - 3/4 IN. OR
Positive Pressure and Smoke and Draft Control, supplemental label,
Fleming
FIRE DOOR TO BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
Pt. # 52075 is also applied. TEMPERATURE RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF AT 30 MINUTES
S
R8930-52094 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Steel Doors & Frames

Mylar - Pt No 52036 (*2)

Warnock Hersey LISTED FIRE DOOR
WHI - XXXXXX
C US Mylar - Pt No 52095
RATING: 3 HR
W/N XXXXX SWINGING TYPE FIRE DOOR
"DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896
FIRE RATING : 3/4 HOUR
ISSUE NUMBER : A-1010
PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
Mylar - Pt No 52037 (*2) UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
MIN. LATCH THROW: SINGLES - 1/2 IN. PAIRS - 3/4 IN. OR
LISTED FIRE DOOR
Fleming
FIRE DOOR TO BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
Warnock Hersey
TEMPERATURE RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF AT 30 MINUTES
WHI - XXXXXX R8930-52095 SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Steel Doors & Frames

C US RATINGS: 1 1/2 HR
2
3/4 HR
2
MAX LITE SIZE/NFPA 80 100 in 1296 in
W/N XXXXX
"DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896

Mylar - Pt No 52096
Mylar - Pt No 52038 (*4, 5) SWINGING TYPE FIRE DOOR
LISTED FIRE DOOR FIRE RATING : 1/3 HOUR
Warnock Hersey ISSUE NUMBER : A-1010
WHI - XXXXXX PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
RATINGS 1 1/2 HR 3/4 HR UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104

C US MAX TEMP RISE 450°F 30 MIN 250°F 30 MIN MIN. LATCH THROW: SINGLES - 1/2 IN. PAIRS - 3/4 IN. OR

Fleming
FIRE DOOR TO BE EQUIPPED WITH FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
250°C 60 MIN 250°C 30 MIN
W/N XXXXX MAX LITE SIZE/NFPA 80 100 in
2
1296 in
2
R8930-52096
TEMPERATURE RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF AT 30 MINUTES
S
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Steel Doors & Frames
"DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896

Mylar - Pt No 52072 (*2) Mylar - Pt No 52073 (*2) Mylar - Pt No 52074 (*4, 5) Mylar - Pt No 52075 (*4, 5)
SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
S S
PRODUCT ALSO CONFORMS TO PRODUCT ALSO CONFORMS TO PRODUCT ALSO CONFORMS TO PRODUCT ALSO CONFORMS TO
UBC 7-2(1997) AND UL10C UBC 7-2(1997) AND UL10C UBC 7-2(1997) AND UL10C UBC 7-2(1997) AND UL10C
TEMP RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF TEMP RISE EXCEEDS 650ºF TEMP RISE 250ºF AT 30 MINUTES TEMP RISE 250ºF AT 30 MINUTES
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

32
 FLEMING FRAME PRODUCT LABELS

Table 13
FLEMING FRAME PRODUCT LABELS Mylar - Pt No 52001

Fleming Label Part Numbers Warnock Hersey LISTED FIRE DOOR FRAME
Fire
WHI - XXXXXX
Product Endurance UL WHI
Rating Mylar C US RATING: 3 HR
Metal Mylar W/N XXXXX "DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896
2 or 3 Hour N/A N/A
Double
Egress 1/3, 3/4, 1 or Mylar - Pt No 52002
52090 52003
Frames

1-1/2 Hour
52080 (*1)
2 or 3 Hour N/A 52001 Warnock Hersey LISTED FIRE DOOR FRAME
All Other
1/3, 3/4, 1 or WHI - XXXXXX
Frames 52090 52002
1-1/2 Hour C US RATINGS: 1 1/2 HR 3/4 HR
W/N XXXXX "DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896
2 Hour
N/A
Glazed 1 or 1-1/2 Hour 52081 (*1) 52001
Transom
Frames

3/4 or 1/3 Hour 52091 Mylar - Pt No 52003

2 or 3 Hour N/A 52001
Warnock Hersey LISTED DOUBLE EGRESS
Paneled 1/3, 3/4, 1 52080 (*1) FIRE DOOR FRAME
52090 52002
or 1-1/2 Hour WHI - XXXXXX
C US
1 or 1-1/2 Hour N/A N/A W/N XXXXX RATINGS: 1 1/2 HR 3/4 HR
Glazed 52081 (*1) "DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896
Sidelight
Frames

1/3 or 3/4 Hour 52091 52004

1 or 1-1/2 Hour N/A N/A
Paneled 52080 (*1) Mylar - Pt No 52004
1/3 or 3/4 Hour 52091 52004
Warnock Hersey LISTED SIDELIGHT/
1-1/2 Hour WINDOW FRAME
Window
Frames

N/A N/A WHI - XXXXXX

Glazed 1 Hour 52082 (*1) C US
W/N XXXXX RATING: 3/4 HR
1/3 or 3/4 Hour 52092 52004 "DO NOT REMOVE OR COVER LABEL" FILE REF: L14896

*1: Required hourly rating stamped or scribed onto label by labeling facility

Metal - Pt No 52080 (*1) Mylar - Pt No 52090

F I RE DO O R F RAME FIRE DOOR FRAME

FIRE RATING : HOUR FIRE RATING : 1-1/2 HOUR
ISSUE NUMBER : A-2043 ISSUE NUMBER : A-2043

PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C

R8931-52080
UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames
R8931-52090
UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames

Metal - Pt No 52081 (*1) Mylar - Pt No 52091

FIRE DOOR FRAME FOR LIGHTS

FIRE DOOR FRAME FOR LIGHTS
FIRE RATING : HOUR FIRE RATING : 3/4 HR
ISSUE NUMBER : A-2043 ISSU E N UMBER : A-2043
PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL10B, UL10C
UBC 7-4 (1997) AND CAN4-S104 UBC 7-2 (1997) AND CAN4-S104

R8931-52081
MUST BE GLAZED WITH UL CLASSIFIED GLAZING MAT'L
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames R8931-52091
MUST BE GLAZED WITH UL CLASSIFIED GLAZING MAT'L
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames

Metal - Pt No 52082 (*1) Mylar - Pt No 52092

F IRE WI NDO W F RAME F IRE WI NDO W F RAME

FIRE RATING : HOUR FIRE RATING : 3/4 HOUR
ISSUE NUMBER : A-2043 ISSUE NUMBER : A-2043
PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL9, UBC 7-4 (1997) PRODUCT CONFORMS TO UL9, UBC 7-4 (1997)
AND CAN4-S106 AND CAN4-S106

R8931-52082
MUST BE GLAZED WITH UL CLASSIFIED GLAZING MAT'L
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames R8931-52092
MUST BE GLAZED WITH UL CLASSIFIED GLAZING MAT'L
SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS S Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames

Mylar - Pt No 52097

FDF Underwriters Laboratories Inc.®

U
C ® L US
F DF-P
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada ®
COMPONENT FOR FIELD

FDF-L ASSEMBLED LISTED

FIRE DOOR FRAME
LISTED A464 ISSUE NO. : A-2043
R8931-52097
Fleming
Steel Doors & Frames

UL Embossed Frame Label Component for Field Assembled Frame Label

Provided standard on all eligible frame Appied inside UL KD and KD-DW Assembly Method frame
components prepared for hinges components, removable hollow metal panels (above door applications),
hollow metal removable mullions and field spliced frame product
33
 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR FLEMING FIRE DOORS AND FRAME PRODUCT

General 637. Where labeled spring hinges (as specified in Item 636) or
619. To be eligible for use on Fleming product, hardware must be; pivot floor closers are used, they are also considered self-
· Labeled for fire protection on swinging hollow metal doors and closing devices. See Page 35, Item 667 for additional infor-
· To the size and rating required for the assembly in which mation.
it will be installed 638. Full length, labeled continuous hinges are permitted,
620. Exception: Hinges - See Items 629 to 631 for additional within the size and rating limitations of their individual
information. listings. Reinforcing requirements and mounting meth-
621. UL labeled doors and frame product must be prepared ods are as per the hinge manufacturer’s listings, tem-
for UL labeled hardware. WHI labeled doors and frame plates and installation instructions.
product may be prepared UL or WHI labeled hardware. 639. For doors 1-3/4" (44.4) and thicker, and their frames up to
622. Fire door hardware and accessories must comply with 38" (965) width or 96" (2450) height, up to 1-1/2 hour rating;
the requirements of NFPA 101, the "Life Safety Code", and steel, olive knuckle or paumelle type hinges, 6" (152.4) height
NFPA 80, "Fire Doors and Fire Windows". and 0.225" (5.72) thickness minimum are permitted, unless
623. Door and frame preparations must be in accordance with smaller sizes are indicated in the hinge manufacturer's list-
the hardware manufacturer's listings, templates and instal- ings.
lation instructions. 640. For all ratings, doors 1-3/4" (44.4) and thicker, and their
624. If doors by others are to be installed in Fleming frame prod- frames up to 48" x 120" (1250 x 3050); steel, top, bottom
uct, hardware preparations in frames must be in accordance and intermediate pivot sets, 4" (101.6) minimum height and
with the door manufacturer's listings. 0.225" (5.72) thickness, are permitted.
625. Electrically or electronically operated/controlled hardware 641. Labeled pivot sets, including pocket pivot type, other than
must be labeled for both Fire and Electrical Protection. described in Item 640, are permitted, except on SLE-Series
doors, within the size and rating limitations of their individual
626. Only low voltage devices are permitted. Electrical compli-
listings.
ance is based on National Electrical Code Class 1 or 2 Cir-
cuit requirements. 642. For all ratings, UL labeled 1-3/8" (35) thick doors and their
frames, up to 36" (915) width or 84" (2150) height; 3-1/2"
627. Refer to Testing Authority listings for limitations on individual
(88.9) or 4" (101.2) height, 0.123" (2.12) thick, steel, mortise
hardware manufacturer's products.
or surface, ball bearing hinges are permitted. Due to mount-
628. As a minimum, each labeled fire door and frame product ing screw interference, templated hinges exceeding 4" (101.6)
must be prepared for hinges, labeled self-latching and self- height are not compatible with 1-3/8" (35) thick Fleming doors.
closing devices.
Self-Latching Devices and Strikes
Hinges & Pivots
643. All labeled self-latching devices are permitted on Fleming
629. For all ratings, door and frame product sizes, hinges and
labeled doors and frame product to the maximum size and
pivots (except spring hinges) must be steel, mortise or sur-
rating indicated on Pages 4 and 5 for doors and 16, 17
face, ball bearing type.
and 18 for frame product, for each Construction/Series/
630. Hinges or pivots other than ball bearing type are permitted if Gage, except as indicated below. Also see Item 619.
they meet the requirements of ANSI A156.1, "Standard for
644. Self-latching devices include;
Butts and Hinges", and are labeled for fire protection.
· Single-point locks/latches (cylindrical/mortise)
631. Hinges as described in Item 630, when used in positive · Flush bolts (automatic, self-latching or manual types)
pressure jurisdictions, must be labeled as complying with · Surface bolts (manual type)
these standards. · Fire exit devices (rim, mortised, surface or concealed
632. For all ratings, 1 pair of hinges is required on each door vertical rod types [with or without bottom rod] or mortise
leaf up to 60" (1525) rabbet height and 1 additional hinge with top rod only (surface or concealed))
for each additional 30" (760) of height or fraction of thereof. · 2 or 3-point locks/latches
See the Fleming Technical Manual for standard hinge 645. Minimum latch throw for single-point latches, unless indi-
location information. cated otherwise in the latch manufacturer's listings;
633. For all ratings, doors 1-3/4" (44.4) and thicker, and their · Singles up to 96" (2450) height; 1/2" (12.7)
frames up to 96" (2450) rabbet height; 4-1/2" (114) stan- · Singles over 96" (2450) and for all pairs; 3/4" (19)
dard weight (0.134"/3.4 thick) hinges are required mini- 646. All labeled, manually operated single-point latches comply
mum, except as noted below. with the requirements for positive pressure testing and need
634. For all ratings, doors 1-3/4" (44.4) and thicker, and their not be labeled for such compliance.
frames exceeding 96" (2450) rabbet height, for S, SD, LD 647. Electrically or electronically operated single-point latches
Series, and Bullet-Resistant doors not exceeding 36" x 84" used in positive pressure applications must be fire labeled
(900 x 2150); 4-1/2" (114) heavy weight (0.180"/4.57 thick) as such to verify compliance.
hinges are required minimum. 648. Self-latching devices with other than 2-3/4" (69.9) backsets,
635. Electric hinges of equivalent height and weight to those to a maximum of 5" (127), or as indicated in the individual
detailed in Items 633 and 634 are permitted. latch manufacturer's listings, are permitted.
636. For all ratings, doors 1-3/4" (44.4) and thicker, and their 649. Minimum latch throw for flush or surface bolts; 3/4" (19).
frames up to 36" (915) width or 84" (2150) height; 4" (101.6), 650. All labeled, flush or surface bolts comply with the require-
0.105" (2.67) thick, labeled spring hinges are permitted, un- ments for positive pressure and need not be labeled for such
less indicated otherwise in their listings. Where labeled spring compliance.
hinges are used, a minimum of 2 per door leaf are required.
651. Roller latches are not permitted as self-latching device on
For door openings exceeding 60" (1525) height using labeled
fire door assemblies.
spring hinges, a 3rd hinge is required, either;
· Another labeled spring hinge, or 652. Fire door assemblies in a required 'means of egress'
· A steel, mortise or surface, ball bearing type hinge match- having an 'occupancy load' of 100 persons or more, must
ing the height and weight of the spring hinge be equipped with fire exit devices.

Continue = Continue g 34
653. Fire exit devices are labeled for both panic (cycle, exit and 673. Frame product must be prepared for the strike (or strikes)
exit loading) and for fire protection. indicated in the self-latching device manufacturer's listings
654. Fire exit devices comply with the requirements of positive and templates.
pressure and need not be labeled for such compliance. 674. Open-back strikes are permitted in the inactive leaf of 1-1/2
655. Fire exit device styles permitted, as indicated in the listings hour pairs of;
of each device manufacturer may include; · Standard construction H, CW, D16, D18, SL16 and
· Crash-bar SL18 Series doors up to 96" x 96" (2450 x 2450)
· Touch-bar · Standard construction E18 Series doors
· Inset-touch bar · Standard construction SLE Series doors
656. Rim type fire exit devices are permitted on pairs of labeled · Standard construction WHI D20 Series doors up to 96" x
doors only when used with a; 96" (2450 x 2450)
· Labeled removable hardware mullion · Standard construction WHI E20 Series doors
· Fixed hollow metal mullion 675. Labeled electric strikes, electromagnets (also called
· Fleming labeled removable hollow metal mullion maglocks), door position switches and electric power trans-
657. Hardware mullions are for behind the door applications only. fer units are permitted in all Fleming fire door assemblies,
1-3/4" (44.4) and thicker, within the size and rating limita-
658. Fleming hollow metal mullions are available for both between
tions of the individual hardware manufacturer's listings.
and behind the door applications.
676. All labeled electric strikes comply with the requirements for
659. See Page 22, Items 369 to 376 for additional information on
positive pressure and need not be labeled for such compli-
Fleming's labeled removable hollow metal mullions.
ance.
660. Only vertical rod type fire exit devices are permitted as the
677. Labeled deadbolts, (also called auxiliary locks) may be pro-
self-latching device on labeled double egress assemblies.
vided in addition to a self-latching device when;
661. Vertical rod type fire exit devices, except mortise fire exit de- · Permitted by the AHJ in doors not in a 'means of egress',
vices with integrated top rod only, are not permitted for single or
door applications. · Interconnected with the active-latch, retracting with the
662. When both leaves of a pair are required for exiting purposes; operation of the self-latching device
· Each may be prepared for fire exit devices, or
Self-Closing Devices
· The inactive leaf may be prepared for a vertical rod fire
678. This group includes labeled;
exit device and open-back strike, with the active leaf pre-
· Swinging door closers
pared for a mortise fire exit device or a single-point latch
· Door holders (for use with automatic detection equipment
663. Pairs and double egress doors within a 'means of egress' and self-closing door closers)
may not be equipped with astragals, door edges or project- · Combination closer/holders (surface or floor mounted,
ing latches that inhibit the free use of either leaf. See Item concealed or semi-concealed - for use with labeled au-
683 for additional information. tomatic fire detectors)
664. For 3 hour pairs within a 'means of egress', vertical rod fire · Spring hinges
exit device (surface or concealed) with ASA type strike on 679. Each leaf and door opening must be prepared for a self-
one leaf and mortise fire exit device with coordinator and a closing device. Exceptions; dutch doors, where a closer is
'push-side' mounted astragal on the other are permitted. required for the top leaf only; and the inactive leaf of pairs in
665. For 3 hour pairs within a 'means of egress', each prepared mechanical equipment rooms.
for rim fire exit devices and a removable 'behind the doors' 680. If closers with through bolt mountings, labeled spring hinges,
hardware mullion are permitted and an astragal is not re- or floor closers (pivots) are used, closer reinforcing is not
quired. The provisions for lock edge seam requirements of mandatory. (Note; All Fleming doors are provided with closer
Page 8, Items 138 to 141 apply. reinforcing as a standard feature.)
666. For 3 hour applications, when 2 leaves are required for exit- 681. Labeled combination door closers and holders with integral
ing purposes in a 'means of egress' and the movement of latches are permitted in single door applications up to 1/3
equipment is not an issue, a L/R configuration, (2 single hour (without hose stream) only, and do not require any ad-
doors with a fixed hollow metal 'between the doors' mullion), ditional latching.
with either rim or mortise fire exit devices, may be used. The 682. Labeled fire door operators with automatic closers are per-
provisions for lock edge seam requirements of Page 8, Items mitted for use in pairs of hollow metal, Standard or Double
138 to 141 apply. Egress construction doors and frame product with concealed
667. Panic exit devices are not permitted on labeled fire doors. vertical rod fire exit devices only.
668. Where the inactive leaf of a pair is not required for 'exiting Coordinators
purposes', it may be prepared for automatic or self-latching 683. Labeled coordinators are required for all pairs of doors in a
top and bottom flush bolts, or 2-point locks. 'means of egress' where an astragal, door edge or project-
669. Where the inactive leaf of a pair is not required for 'exiting ing latch will inhibit the free use of either leaf by preventing
purposes', it may be prepared for manually operated flush the inactive leaf from closing and latching prior to the active
or surface top and bottom bolts when; leaf.
· The room is not normally occupied by humans, and 684. Coordinators are not required for pairs of doors where each
· Acceptable to the AHJ leaf closes and latches independently.
670. The use of 3-point locks on single doors and the active leaf Door Viewers
of pairs is permitted. 685. Labeled door viewers are permitted on all Fleming doors up
671. For pairs using 3-point locks, the inactive leaf must be pre- to a maximum rating of 1-1/2 hours.
pared for 2-point locks. Flush or surface bolts are not per- 686. Door viewers used in positive pressure jurisdictions must
mitted in lieu of the 2-point lock. be labeled as such to verify compliance.
672. 2 and 3-point locks or latches are not labeled as and 687. Each leaf may be prepared for a maximum of 2 viewers.
cannot be used where fire exit devices are required.
688. Door may be prepared at factory, distributor’s shop or in
Continue = the field. See Page 3, Item 12 for additional information.

35
 3rd Party Astragals, Gaskets, Weatherstrip, UL and WHI to differentiate between the types of prod-
Door Seals and Door Bottoms ucts, by application. Under this system, all Fleming fire
689. These products are investigated to ensure that they do not doors are Category A - "Fire Doors Not Requiring Addi-
adversely affect the rating of the fire door assembly and are tional Components" to be positive pressure labeled and
Classified for fire protection only. do not require gaskets of any kind for compliance.
690. Labeled products within this group are permitted for use 694. For smoke and draft control compliance, all Fleming doors
with all Fleming labeled doors and frame product (except (and all other swinging doors) must be used with Category
acoustic assemblies) to the size and rating limitations of H - "Labeled Smoke and Draft Control Gaskets". Category
the individual hardware manufacturer’s listings. H products must be labeled and bear the "S" symbol.
691. Products used at the meeting edges of pairs are not in- 695. Also permitted for use with all Fleming labeled doors and
tended to replace a required astragal, nor to alter the clear- frame product are Category J - "Labeled Gasket Materials",
ances between pairs of doors specified in NFPA 80. See such as gaskets, weather stripping, door bottoms, thresh-
Page 8, Item 135 for additional information. olds and other similar products. These have been positive
692. Labeled 3rd party, surface mounted weather, sound or light pressure fire tested, but are not intended to assist an as-
sealing type astragals are permitted; sembly in attaining either positive pressure or smoke and
· In conjunction with Fleming's flat bar astragal on all draft control compliance.
Fleming doors up to 3 hour rating, or 696. All Category J products are eligible for use with Fleming la-
· As a stand-alone astragal when the requirements of beled doors and frame product in traditional/negative pres-
Page 8, Items 137 to 140 are met sure jurisdictions.
693. For positive pressure and smoke and draft control com- 697. Labeled 3rd party products are not supplied or installed by
pliance, a category system has been jointly developed by Fleming.
Continue =
REFERENCED STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

List of Equipment and Materials, Volume II, Fire Resistance Directory - Volume 3
Building Construction
Outline of Investigation for Fire Door Frames, Issue # 4
Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Publication Number: UL-63
Publication Number: CAN4-S104-M80
Fire Test of Window Assemblies, 7th Edition
Standard Method of Fire Tests of Windows Publication Number: ANSI/UL9-00
and Glass Block Assemblies
Publication Number: CAN4-S106-M80 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 9th Edition
Publication Number: ANSI/UL10B-01
Available From: Underwriters Laboratories of Canada
7 Crouse Road, Toronto, ON M1R 3A9 Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 1st Edition
Tel: 416-757-3611 Publication Number: ANSI/UL10C-01
Web: www.ul.com
Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies, 3rd Edition
Publication Number: UL1784-01
Directory of Listed Products
Available From: Underwriters Laboratories. Inc.
Available From: Intertek Testing Services
333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062
(Warnock Hersey, Inc.)
Tel: 847-272-8800
3933 US Route 11, Courtland, NY 10345
Web: www.ul.com
Tel: 607-758-6234
Web: www.etlsemko.com
DHI Installation Guide
Publication Number: ANSI/DHI A115-IG
Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows
Publication Number: NFPA 80-1999
Available From: Door and Hardware Institute
14150 Newbrook Drive, Chantilly, VA 20151
Life Safety Code
Tel: 703-222-2010
Publication Number: NFPA 101-2000
Web: www.dhi.org
Recommended Practice for the Installation
of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
Publication Number: NFPA 105-1999 Publication Number: ICBO UBC 7-2 (1997)

Available From: National Fire Protection Association Fire Tests of Window Assemblies
1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 Publication Number: ICBO UBC 7-4 (1997)
Tel: 617-770-3000
Web: www.nfps.org Available From: International Code Council
5360 Workman Mill Road, Whittier, CA 90601
Tel: 562-692-4226
Web: www.icbo.org

36
 INDEX
Item Numbers are referenced unless a Page Number is specifically indicated (ie: P1 = Page 1)
1-3/8" Doors P5, 50, 275, 642 CW-Series Drs P1, 40, 49, 53, 65, 205 DW-Series Frames 390-398 Smoke & Draft Control 22, 23,
2 & 3 Pt Locks 644, 668-672 Astragals 135, 141, 142, 148-151 Doors Permitted 396, 397 694-696
2nd Returns 358 Frame Product Permitted 39 Maximum Sizes P17, P18 Glazing Kits Doors
4-Sided Frs 48, P16, 385-387 Max Sizes P4, P5, 43, 44 Edges-Doors; See Vertical Seams 3rd Party 30, 94-101
A40-Galvanneal 40, 42 Minimum Sizes 45, 46 Electric/Electronic Hardware 625, Fleming 30, 76-93
Acoustic Drs; See SD-Series Drs Rabbetted Meeting Stiles 141 626, 635, 647, 675, 676 Thermal 81, 107, 108
Acoustic Frs; See SF-Series Frs Top Cap P5, 166-172 Electro-Lynx Harness 72, 300 Glazing Materials
Adjustable Frs; See A-Series Frs Vertical Seams 61 Electromagnets 675 Doors 102-119, 232, 255
Anchors; See Wall Anchors and Also see; Clad, Dutch, Double Embossed Doors; See E & P12, P13, P14, P15
Floor Anchors Egress and Rabbetted Drs SLE-Series Doors Frames 540-547, 577-579
Arched Doors 280, 597 Dampers; See Louvers Embossed Labels; See Labels P28, P29, P30, P31
Arched Frs 364, 584-591, 597 Dead Bolts 677 E-Series Doors P1, 40, 65 Grout 314-316, 590
A-Series Frames 278, 456-464 Detention Security Doors; See Astragals 135, 138, 139 GWG; See Glazing Materials-
Assembly Methods 461 S-Series Doors 142, 144, 145, 148-151 Doors and Glazing Materials-
Doors Permitted 464 Detention Security Frs 508-518 Frames Permitted 39 Frame Product
Maximum Sizes P17, P18 Assembly Method 510 Max Sizes P4, P5, 43, 44 Handing Terminology P15
Assembly Methods Doors Permitted 518 Minimum Sizes 45, 46, 294 Hardware 619-697
Frame Product 377-383 Hardware 515, 516 Vertical Edge Seams 59, 63, 64 Doors 66-75
Rem Mullions 371, 374 Max Sizes P16, P17, P18 Also see; Double Egress,SLE- Double Egress 156, 660
Astragals 12, 135-151, 663-665, 683 Distributor Responsibilities 7 Series & Rabbetted Doors Dutch 174-177, 679
3rd Party 689-697 Also see In-Plant Labeling Existing Wall Anchors; See Wall Frame Product 295-306
Authority Having Jurisdiction 2, 8 Door Bottoms; See Gaskets Anchors-Existing General Requirements 619-628
P15, P31, 615, 616 Door Position Switches 675 Exposed Seam Drs 59, 190, 191 Positive Pressure 19, 25, 26
Bevels 57, 58 Door Rabbet 350 Face Profile 354-356 Also see; Hinges, Self-
Bolt; See Flush Bolt & Surface Bolt Door Series P1 Face Dimpled Anchors; See Wall Latching Devices, Strikes,
Borrowed Light; See Window Frs Door Viewers 685-688 Anchors-Masonry Existing and Self-Closing Devices,
Bridge and Strap Anchors; See Doors Drywall Coordinators, Door Viewers,
Wall Anchors-Masonry Arched 280, 597 Face-Welded Fr Product 379, 381 3rd Party Astragals &
British Standards Institute 618 By Others 27, 305, 611 Factory Mutual 618 Gaskets
BR-Series Drs P1, 40, 260-271 Constructions 33-151, 152-171 Field Modifications 11, 12 Head Profiles 346-360, 366, 367
Frame Product Permitted 271 Cores 53-56 Field Splices Hinges 19, 68, 69, 297, 298
Maximum Sizes P5 Labels; See Labels-Doors Doors 281 303, 629-642
BR-Series Frames Louvers 120-134 Frame Product 592-594 Also see; Spring Hinges and
Doors Permitted 529 Maximum Sizes Labels For 611, P33 Continuous Hinges
Hardware 526, 527 1/3 Hour P5 Fire Door Assembly 1-9 Holders 678-681
Maximum Sizes P17, P18 1/2 Hour P5 Fire Exit Devices 644, 652-656 Honeycomb Core
Builders Hardware; See Hardware 3/4 Hour P5 660-667, 672, 682 Doors 53
Building Codes 2-5, 8, 612, 613, 615 1 Hour P5 Fire Protection Rating 4, 5, 195 Panels; See Panels
Bullet Resistant Doors; See 1-1/2 Hour P5 Wall vs Dr/Fr P2, 5, 6 Hospital Profile 366
BR-Series Doors 2 Hour P4 Fire Test Methods 6, 13-27 H-Series Doors 40, 55, 278
Bullet-Resistant Frames; See 3 Hour P4 Also see; Traditional/Negative Astragals 135, 137, 141, 142,
BR-Series Frames Misc Restrictions 272-283 & Positive Pressure 144, 145, 148-151
Bull-Nosed Doors 279 Also see; Positive Pressure Fixed Doors 90, 126, 538, 551- Described P1
Cased Open Sections 368, 385 Double Acting Doors 281, P15 554, P28 Frames Permitted 39, 278, 603
Ceiling Openings 605 Double Egress P15 Floor Anchors 317-320 Maximum Sizes P4, P5
Center Rails Doors 152-165 Floor Closers; See Self-Closing Minimum Sizes 45, 46
Frame Product 346-362 Astragals 157, 158 Devices Rabbetted
Ceramic Glazing; See Glazing Frames Permitted 165 Floor Openings 605 Meeting Stiles 141
Materials-Doors and Glazing Maximum Sizes P4, P5 Flush Bolts 644, 649, 650, 668 Vertical Seams 57, 61, 65
Materials-Frame Product Fr Product 399-407, P15 669, 671 Also see; Clad and Double
Clad Doors 40, 205-225, 274 Wall Anchorage 402 Flush Panels; See Panels-Flush Egress Doors
Frames Permitted 225 Doors Permitted 407 Fr Assembly Methods 377-382 In-Fill Panels; See Panels-In-Fill
Maximum Sizes P5 Max Sizes P16, P17, P18 Frame Labels; See Labels-Frs In-Plant Labeling Program (IPLP)
Also see; D,CW and Profiles 400, 401 Frame Product Described 10, 28-32
H-Series Doors Drywall Returns; See 2nd Returns Assembly Methods 377-383 Doors 87, 95, 128, 164, 182
Clad Fr Product 471-483, 600 D-Series Drs P1, 40, 50, 53, 65, 205 Defined 2, P16 Distributors Not Included 88
Doors Permitted 477 Astragals 135, 138-142, 148-151 Labels; See Labels-Frames 96, 129
Max Sizes P16, P17, P18 Frame Product Permitted 39 Material 291, 292 Excluded Products 32, 171
Classified 2 Max Sizes P4, P5, 43, 44 Maximum Sizes 196, 203, 218, 234, 249, 258
Closer Reinforcing 679, 680 Minimum Sizes 45, 46 1/3 Hour P18 269, 274, 476, 517, 506, 528
Closers 678-682 Rabbetted Meeting Stiles 141 1/2 Hour P18 Frame Product 31, 395, 406
Also see Self-Closing Devices Top Cap P5, 166-172 3/4 Hour P18 417, 428, 437, 463, 469
and Spring Hinges Vertical Seams 59, 60, 63, 64 1 Hour P17 493, 564, 575, 595
Closures; See Fire Door Assy Also see; Clad, Dutch, Double 1-1/2 Hour P17 Installation
Combination Stud Anchors; See Egress and Rabbetted Drs 2 Hour P16 By Others 9, 206, 320
Wall Anchors-Drywall DSS-Series Drs P1,132,198-204 3 Hour P16 On Site 100, 130, 221
Communicating 276, P15, 384 Astragals 138, 142, 148-151, 199 Misc Restrictions 597-605 Interconnected Locks 677
Continuous Hinges 638, 661 Frames Permitted 204 Profile Requirements 346-368 Jamb Depth 348, 349
Contra-Swing Frs P15, 408-419 Maximum Sizes P5 Standard Construction 284-321 Jamb Profiles 346-360, 366, 367
Anchorage 415 Minimum Sizes 45, 46 Wall Anchors 322-345 KD Frs P16, P17 & P18, 337, 378
Doors Permitted 419 Vertical Seams 57, 59, 60, 63 Also see; Positive Pressure KD-DW Frames; See DW-
Maximum Sizes P17, P18 Dutch Door Frs 430-440 Frame with Flush Panel; See Series Frames
Rem Mullions 369-376, 409, 411 Doors Permitted 440 Panels-Flush Knocked-Down; See KD Frames
Coordinators 664, 683-684 Max Sizes P17, P18, 294 Fr with Rabbetted Panel; See and DW-Series Frames
Core Materials-Doors 53-56, 273 Dutch Door Shelves 179 Panels-Rabbetted Labeled 2
Corner Posts 584-591 Dutch Doors 173-185 G90-Galvanized 40 Labels
Curved Astragals 148, 179 Galvanneal; See A40-Galvanneal Field Assembled Frame
Doors 280, 597 Frames Permitted 185 Gaskets 304, 503, 689-697 Components 611, P35
Frs 64, 584-591, 597 Maximum Sizes P5 Positive Pressure 27, 693 Doors 10, 11, 606-618, P32
695, 696 Embossed 609, 615, P33
37
 INDEX (Continued)
Labels-Field Applied 617 Panic Exit Devices 667 Sizes Wall Anchors 302, 534-563
Frames 10, 606-618, P33 Pivots; See Hinges Doors P4, P5, 43-48 571, 583
Glazing Mat'ls 112, 113, 544 Polystyrene Doors 53, 54 Frame Product P16, P17, P18 Trim-Wall Series Frames 601
545 Polystyrene Panels 551-577 Glazing Materials TRR Doors 186-197
Supplemental 613, P32 Positive Pressure 606-618 Doors P12, P13, P14, P15 Constructions; Also see;
Laminated Glazing; See Glazing Doors 17 Fr Product P28, P29, P30, P31 TR, TRE & TRSL-Series Drs
Materials-Doors and Glazing Frame Product 18 SLE-Series Doors P1, 42, 47 Frames Permitted 197, 604
Materials-Frame Product Glazing Kits 77, 98, 99, 113 54, 80 Labels 189, P32
Latch Throw 645, 649 Glazing 113, P12-P15 Astragals 135, 137, 150, 151 Ratings 5, 6, 186, 187, 194,
LD-Series Doors P1, 40, 132 Hardware 19, 631, 647, 686 Maximum Sizes P4, P5 P32
226-235 Louvers 131 Minimum Sizes 45, 46 TR-Series P1, 40, 57, 132
Frames Permitted 235 Labels 612, 613, P32, P33 Vertical Edge Seams 58, 62 148, 186-197
Maximum Sizes P5 Supplemental Labels 613, P32 SL-Series Doors P1, 42, 54, 80 Astragals 138, 139, 142
Minimum Sizes 45, 46 Testing 13-19, 25, 26 Astragals 135, 137, 150, 151 144, 145, 148-151, 192
Edge Seams 57, 64, 65, 229 Power Transfer Units 675 Maximum Sizes P4, P5 Glazing Mat'ls 193, P12,
Lead-Lined Profile Requirements 346-368 Minimum Sizes 45, 46 P13, P14, P15
Doors; See LD-Series Doors Also see; Transom, Sidelight Vertical Edge Seams 58, 62 Maximum Sizes P4, P5
Frames 484-494 and Window Frames Sloped Fr Components 364 Minimum Sizes 45, 46
Doors Permitted 494 Profile-Welded 379, 382 Smoke & Draft Control 6, 20-24 Vertical Seams 64, 65
Max Sizes P16, P17, P18, 294 Rabbetted Doors 59, 64, 65 132, 681 TRE-Series P1, 40, 57,132,
Letter of Certification 616 141,166-172, 279, 683 Labels 691, 692, P32, P33 148, 186-197
Listed - Defined 2 Maximum Sizes P5 Soffit 351 Astragals 138, 139, 142
Listings- Defined 2 Rabbetted Panels; See Panels- Sound Doors; See SD-Series Drs 144, 145, 148-151, 192
Lock Seam Doors; See D, DSS, E, Rabbetted Sound Frs; See SF-Series Frs Described P1
LD, SD, TR and TRE-Series Drs Rabbetted Top Cap Doors 172 Special Field Inspections 617 Max Sizes P4, P5, 43, 44
Louvers Radius Door Edges 279 Split Frames 388, 539 Minimum Sizes 45, 46
Doors 12, 30, 120-134 Radius Frames 364, 584-591, 597 Also see; A-Series Frames Vertical Seams 64, 65
Frame Product 538 Ratings Spring Hinges 302, 303, 610 TRSL-Series P1, 42, 132
Mail Slots 283 Glazing Mat'ls Doors 637, 678, 680 148, 186-197
Maintenance 9 P12-P15, 195 Also see; Self-Closing Devices Astragals 137, 142-145
Material Wall vs Door & Frame P2 S-Series Drs P1, 40, 55, 251-259 148, 192
Doors 40-42 Removable Mullions 536, 598 Frames Permitted 259 Maximum Sizes P4, P5
Frames 291, 292, 465, 466 599, 656-659 Maximum Sizes P4, P5 Minimum Sizes 45, 46
Maximum Sizes Behind Doors 373-376, 665 Vertical Edge Seams 57, 61 Vertical Seams 58, 62
Doors P4, P5 Between Drs 369-372, 375, 376 Stainless Steel Undercut 30, 47, 48, 246, 386
Fre Product P16, P17, P18 Hardware Type 656, 657 Doors; See DSS-Series Doors Unequal Leaf Pairs 389
Glazing Materials Labels For 611, P33 Frame Product 465-470 Vector Series Frames 365
Doors P12, P13, P14, P15 Removable Panels; See Panels- Doors Permitted 470 Vertical Seams 57-65, 140
Fr Product P28, P29, P30, P31 Rabbetted and Panels-Flush Max Sizes P16, P17, P18 Vertically Stiffened Doors; See
Means of Egress 652, Returns 357 Standard Construction BR, H and S-Series Doors
662-666, 677, 683 Roller Latches 651 Doors 33-39 View Window; See Window Frs
Rough Stud Openings Sizes 345 Maximum Sizes P4, P5 Viewers; See Door Viewers
Minimum Sizes R-Series Frames 601 Frame Product 284-389 Wall Anchors
Doors 45, 46 Sanitary Bases 367 Defined 285-289 Butt Applications 309
Glass Lights 79, 83 SD-Series Drs P1, 40, 236-250 Max Sizes P16, P17, P18 Drywall 333-345
Miscellaneous Restrictions Frames Permitted 250 Stop Height 353 DW-Series Frames 310
Doors 272-283 Maximum Sizes P5 Strikes 673-676 Existing 318, 320, 321,327-
Frame Product 597-605 Minimum Sizes 45, 46 Surface Bolts 644, 649, 650 332, 336, 337
Mono-Rail Cutouts 283 Seals; See Gaskets, Positive 669, 671 Face Dimpled 318
Mullions Pressure and Smoke and Draft SUW; See Set-Up and Welded Face Dimpled-DW-Series
Assembly 371, 374, 383, 410 Control T Anchors; See Wall Anchors- Frs 310
Floor Anchors 319 Seamless Edges Doors 61, 64 Masonry Locations 301, 307-345
Profiles 346-367 Also see; Vertical Seams Tack-Welded Doors 60, 63 Masonry 322-326
Removable; See Rem Mullions Security View Ports 283 153-155, 229, 238 Quantity 312
Multi-Opening Frs P16, 420-429 Self-Closing Devices 67, 75 Tack-Welded Fr Product 379, 380 Snap-In Drywall 318
Configurations 425 301-303, 678-682 Tension Anchors; See Wrap Applications 309, 310
Doors Permitted 429 Self-Latching Devices 70, 71 Wall Anchors-DW-Series Frs Also see; Transom, Sidelight
Maximum Sizes P17, P18 643-677, 681 TB-Series Frames 601 & Window Fr-Wall Anchors
Removable Mullions 369-376 Set-Up & Welded 378-383 Thickness-Doors 49-52 Wall vs Door/Fr Ratings P2
Non-Rated 2, 9, 616 SF-Series Frames 495-507 Top Caps 30, 282 Weather-Stripping; See Gaskets
Non-Standard Stop Heights Doors Permitted 507 Traditional/Negative Testing 15, Window Frames
Doors 110, P12, P13, P14, P15 Maximum Sizes P17-P18 25, 26, 94, 99 Assembly Methods 568, 581
Frame Product 353, 511 Shadow-Line Face Profile 360 Labels For 612, 613, P32, P33 Defined P16
Open-Back Strikes 73, 74, 662 Shadow-Line Return Profile 359 Transom Frames Design 530-557, 566-596
Opening-Protectives; See Fire Sidelight Frames P16, 530-596 Assy Methods 560, 568, 569 Glazing Matl 540-547, 566,
Door Assembly Assembly Methods 568, 581 580, 581 567, 577-579, P28, P29,
Operators 682 Design Criteria 530-557, Defined P16 P30, P31
Opposite Rabbet 352 566-596 Doors Permitted 39, 165 Labels; See Labels
Panels Drs Permitted 565, 576, 596 185, 204, 225, 278, 565 Over-All Sizes 530, 585-589
Doors 117-119, P12 Glazing Materials 540-547 576, 596, 604 Panels 548-565, P28
Flush P16 566, 567, 577-579, P28-P31 Transom Frames Profiles 570, 582, 584-591
Frames 31, 441-455, 551- Labels; See Labels Glazing Materials 540-547 Wall Anchors 302, 534, 571-
556, 558, 559, P28 Anchors 534, 571-574, 583 566, 567, 577-579, P28-P31 574, 583
Frames For P17, P18 Maximum Sizes P17, P18 Labels; See Labels Wire Anchors; See Wall
Labels 611, P33 Over-All Sizes 530, 585-589 Max Sizes P16, P17, P18, Anchors-Masonry
In-Fill Panels 548-565, P28 530-596 Wood Grained Drs; See SL &
Doors 30,117-119, P12 Profiles 533, 570, 582, 584-591 Over-All Sizes 530,585-589 SLE-Series Doors
Frames 31, 355, 549, 550, Sills 346-362 Panels 548-565, P28 Wood Stud Anchors; See Wall
558, 559, P28 Single Point Latches; See Self- Profiles 533, 562, 570, 582 Anchors-Drywall
Rabbetted P16, 441-449 Latching Devices Stainless Steel; See Z Anchors; See Wall Anchors-
Frames For P17, P18 Stainless Steel Drywall
38
 Steel Doors & Frames

20 Barr Road
Ajax, Ontario, Canada
L1S 3X9

Phone : (905) 683-3667 • Toll Free : 1-800-263-7515 • Fax : (905) 427-1668

E-Mail : [email protected] • Web Site : www.flemingdoor.com

CANADIAN
STEEL DOOR
The National Association of HOLLOW METAL MANUFACTURERS A QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DOOR & HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS
Architectural Metal Manufacturers A S S O C I A T I O N REGISTERED COMPANY I N S T I T U T E ASSOCIATION
This publication, developed by Fleming Door Products Ltd., to provide guidance on the use and application of commercial steel door and frame products, contains advisory information only
and is provided as a public service. A continuous Research and Development Program is in place, therefore Fleming Door Products Ltd. reserves the right to incorporate changes at any
time without notice and disclaims all liability of any kind for the use or adaptation of the materials contained herein. Copyright April 1999,2005 • Printed in Canada